NXT Mechanial Reference

Manual Update Notice
The following manual has been revised and released:
Manual title: NXT Mechanical Reference

Manual number (updated edition): QD008-27
Manual number (previous edition): QD008-26
Date of issue: February 10, 2010
The main changes that have been made are detailed in the table below.
Chapter, Section Summary of changes
1.3.3 Tray Unit-LT/LTC Added items relating to the tray unit-LTC.

1.4 Safety Labels Added items relating to the tray unit-LTC.
1.5 The EMERGENCY STOP Button Added items relating to the tray unit-LTC.
2.8 Tray Unit-LTC Components Newly added.
2.11 Nozzle Changer Components Added items relating to the tray unit-LTC.
2.15 Machine Configuration Added items relating to the tray unit-LTC.
3.5.4 Tray unit-LTC Newly added.
4.14 Tray Unit-LTC Newly added.
5.1 Pulling Out/Returning a Module Added items regarding the air blow exhaust type
tray unit-LT waste tape box.
5.2 Removing/Inserting a Module Added items regarding the air blow exhaust type
5.6 Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-LT Added items regarding the air blow exhaust type
5.7 Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-LTC Newly added.
6.1.2 Points of caution Added cautions for placing heads.
6.2 Maintenance Checklist Added items relating to the tray unit-LTC.
6.2.2 Maintenance performed by maintenance Added parts camera lens cleaning and PCU
personne lubrication.
6.4.7 Cleaning the tray unit-LTC feeder slots and Newly added.
connectors
6.5.4 Cleaning the tray unit-LTC shuttle belts Newly added.
(reject parts, tray drawer)
6.5.8 Cleaning the placing head syringes Added handling cautions for the head cleaner.
6.5.9 Syringes and O-rings inside syringe Changed grease types for syringes.
lubrication
6.7.1 XY-robot lubrication Added items to check after applying grease.
6.7.2 Lubricating the flat cable for the X-axis and Added items to check after applying grease.
Y-axis
6.7.4 Lubricating the Q-axis gear and R-axis gear The maintenance period and grease type were
on the H12HS head changed.
Manual Update Notice
Chapter, Section Summary of changes
6.8.4 Cleaning the parts camera lens Newly added.

6.9.5 Lubricating the H01 head Changed the type of grease used on the Q-axis
gear.
gear.
gear and R-axis gear.
6.9.8 Lubricating the H08/H12(S) head Changed the type of grease used on the Q-axis
gear and R-axis gear.
6.9.9 Lubricating the H12HS head The maintenance period for lubricating the Q-axis
gear and R-axis gear were changed.
6.9.20 Lubricating the tray unit-LTC moving parts Newly added.
6.9.21 Checking and adjusting the tray unit-LTC Newly added.
belt tension
6.10.4 Removing rejected parts (reject parts Added items relating to the tray unit-LTC.
conveyor, tray unit-L/LT/LTC)
6.10.7 Cleaning the nozzles Added cleaning for nozzles with rubber tips.
6.10.10 Cleaning the conveyor belt and belt Added details regarding cleaning the belt cleaner.
cleaner
6.10.12 Lubricating the PCU (Pallet Change Unit) Newly added.
7.4 Replacing the Module Servo Amplifier Battery Revised the content.
7.11 Replacing a Fuse on a Base Control I/F Revised the content.
Board
7.21 Replacing the Tray Unit-LTC Servo Newly added.
Controller Battery
7.22 Replacing the Tray Unit-LTC Servo Newly added.
Controller Battery
7.23 Replacing the Tray Unit-LT Control Board Newly added.
Fuse
8.21 Replacing the Connector for the Tray Unit- Newly added.
LTC and Parts Supply Base
8.22 Removing Tray Unit-LTC Covers Newly added.
Minor changes and corrections have also been

made at various locations throughout the manual.
Note:
For a copy of the entire manual, contact your nearest Fuji sales representative or send an e-mail request to
the address below.
E-mail: intnetqst@fuji.co.jp
Fuji Scalable Placement Platform
NXT
Mechanical Reference
Original Instructions
QD008-27
CAUTION !
Contact Fuji or a Fuji representative before
transporting this product to a foreign location within
your company or selling it to a third party within
your country or a different country.
If this product is sold or transported to a different
country without contacting Fuji, it may not be
possible for us to supply spare parts or provide
maintenance.
Fuji Scalable Placement Platform
NXT
Mechanical Reference
The manuals listed below are shipped with the NXT machine.
NXT Set Up Manual
NXT System Reference
NXT Mechanical Reference
FUJI Intelligent Feeder Manual
NXT Programming Manual
In order to operate this machine in the safest and most efficient
manner, please read the provided manuals thoroughly and
observe all instructions and warnings.
Keep these manuals in an accessible location near the machine.
QD008-27
Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd.

Copyrights
All rights regarding this manual are reserved by Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd. This manual may
not, in whole or in part, be reproduced by any means (electronic, mechanical or otherwise), or reused in
any way, without the prior written permission of Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
Warranty and Liability

Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd. accepts no responsibility for situations that may arise due to any of
the following:
• The use of third party parts.
• The use of non-genuine Fuji parts.
• Incorrect settings made by the customer.
• Improper use of Fuji equipment.
Notice
Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd. reserves the right to change the content of this manual without
notice.
Every effort has been made to ensure that this manual is correct in every detail. However, please contact
Fuji in the unlikely event that errors or omissions are detected.
Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd. accepts no liability whatsoever for damages that may arise as a
result of this manual, with the exception of problems that originate in our products.
QD008-27 Contents
Contents
1. Safety Guideline .................................................. 1
1.1 About Symbols ................................................. 1
1.1.1 Degree of Hazards ..................................................1
1.1.2 Examples of the Symbols .......................................1
1.2 Safety Rules for All Machine Types ................. 2
1.3 Safety Rules for NXT ....................................... 6
1.3.1 Main Unit .................................................................6
1.3.2 Tray Unit-L ............................................................11
1.3.3 Tray Unit-LT/LTC ..................................................12
1.3.4 Tray Unit-M ...........................................................13
1.3.5 Disposal of linear motor magnets .........................13
1.4 Safety Labels ................................................. 14
1.4.1 NXT-2 Safety Label Explanations .........................17
1.5 The EMERGENCY STOP Button ................... 18
1.6 Locking System .............................................. 19
1.6.1 Lockout Procedure ................................................19
1.6.2 Unlocking Procedure ............................................21
2. NXT Components .............................................. 23
2.1 Body Components .......................................... 23
2.2 Placing Head Components ............................ 24
2.3 Parts Camera Components ............................ 27
2.4 Mark Camera & Lighting Components ........... 28
2.5 Feeder Pallet Components ............................ 29
2.6 Tray Unit-L Components ................................ 30
2.7 Tray Unit-LT Components .............................. 31
2.8 Tray Unit-LTC Components ........................... 32
2.9 Tray Unit-M Components ............................... 33
2.10 Reject Parts Conveyor Components ............ 34
2.11 Nozzle Changer Components ...................... 35
2.12 Waste Tape Processing Unit Components .. 36
NXT Mechanical Reference i

Contents QD008-27
2.13 PCU (Pallet Change Unit) Components ....... 37

2.14 MCU (Module Change Unit) Components ... 38
2.15 Machine Configuration ................................. 39
2.15.1 Standard machine configuration, M3(S) ............. 39
2.15.2 Standard machine configuration, M6(S) ............. 40
2.15.3 Standard machine configuration, base ............... 42
3. Functions of Each Component ........................... 45
3.1 Base ............................................................... 45
3.1.1 8M ........................................................................ 45
3.1.2 4M ........................................................................ 45
3.1.3 2M ........................................................................ 45
3.2 Modules ......................................................... 46
3.2.1 M3(S) ................................................................... 46
3.2.2 M6 ........................................................................ 46
3.2.3 M6S ...................................................................... 46
3.3 Placing Head .................................................. 47
3.3.1 H01 head .............................................................. 48
3.3.2 H02 head .............................................................. 48
3.3.3 H04 head .............................................................. 48
3.3.4 H08 head .............................................................. 48
3.3.5 H12(S) head ......................................................... 48
3.3.6 H12HS head ......................................................... 48
3.4 Nozzle Changer ............................................. 49
3.5 Parts Supply System ...................................... 50
3.5.1 Feeder pallet ........................................................ 50
3.5.2 Tray unit-L ............................................................ 50
3.5.3 Tray unit-LT .......................................................... 50
3.5.4 Tray unit-LTC ....................................................... 50
3.5.5 Tray unit-M ........................................................... 50
3.6 Vision System ................................................ 50
3.6.1 Parts camera ........................................................ 50
3.6.2 Mark camera ........................................................ 50
3.7 Panel Conveyance ......................................... 51
ii NXT Mechanical Reference

QD008-27 Contents
3.7.1 Double conveyor ...................................................51

3.7.2 Single conveyor ....................................................51
3.7.3 Single conveyor S .................................................51
3.8 Electrical Control System ............................... 51
3.8.1 Operation panel ....................................................51
3.8.2 Module CPU box ...................................................51
3.8.3 Module servo box .................................................51
3.8.4 Base CPU box ......................................................51
4. Sensor Positions ................................................ 53
4.1 How to check I/Os .......................................... 53
4.1.1 IOMonitor ..............................................................53
4.1.2 EquipmentCheck ..................................................54
4.2 Base Sensors ................................................. 55
4.2.1 2M base ................................................................55
4.2.2 4M base ................................................................56
4.2.3 8M base ................................................................57
4.2.4 Base module related inputs for modules 1 to 4 ....58
4.2.5 Base module related inputs for modules 5 to 8 ....58
4.2.6 Base inputs ...........................................................58
4.2.7 Base module related outputs for modules 1 to 4 ..58
4.2.8 Base module related outputs for modules 5 to 8 ..58
4.3 Placing Head Sensors .................................... 59
4.3.1 H01 head ..............................................................59
4.3.2 H02 head ..............................................................60
4.3.3 H04 head ..............................................................62
4.3.4 H08 head ..............................................................63
4.3.5 H12(S) head .........................................................64
4.3.6 H12HS head .........................................................65
4.4 Module Base Sensors .................................... 66
4.5 XY-Robot Sensors ......................................... 67
4.5.1 M3(S) module .......................................................67
4.5.2 M6S module ..........................................................68
4.6 Nozzle Changer Sensors ............................... 69
NXT Mechanical Reference iii

Contents QD008-27
4.7 Feeder Pallet Sensors ................................... 70

4.8 Waste Tape Processing Sensors ................... 71
4.9 Double Conveyor Sensors ............................. 72
4.9.1 M3(S) module ....................................................... 72
4.9.2 M6(S) module ....................................................... 74
4.10 Single Conveyor Sensors ............................ 75
4.10.1 M3(S) module ..................................................... 75
4.10.2 M6(S) module ..................................................... 76
4.11 Single Conveyor S Sensor ........................... 77
4.11.1 For M6S modules only ....................................... 77
4.12 Tray Unit-L ................................................... 78
4.12.1 Safety components ............................................ 78
4.12.2 Tray tower components ...................................... 79
4.12.3 Shuttle components ........................................... 80
4.12.4 Reject parts conveyor ........................................ 81
4.12.5 Remover components ........................................ 82
4.13 Tray Unit-LT ................................................. 83
4.13.5 Remover components ........................................ 87
4.14 Tray Unit-LTC .............................................. 88
4.15 Tray Unit-M .................................................. 92
5. Basic Operation .................................................. 95
5.1 Pulling Out/Returning a Module ..................... 95
5.1.1 Pulling out a module ............................................. 95
5.1.2 Returning a module .............................................. 97
5.2 Removing/Inserting a Module ........................ 98
iv NXT Mechanical Reference

QD008-27 Contents
5.2.1 Preparing to remove a module .............................98

5.2.2 Removing a Module from the Machine ...............100
5.2.3 Inserting a module into the machine ...................107
5.3 Removing/Attaching Side Covers ................ 112
5.3.1 Removing ............................................................112
5.3.2 Attaching .............................................................112
5.4 Removing/Loading a Feeder Pallet .............. 113
5.4.1 Removing a feeder pallet ....................................113
5.4.2 Loading a feeder pallet .......................................117
5.5 Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-L ................ 120
5.5.1 Preparation .........................................................120
5.5.2 Inserting a tray unit-L into the module ................123
5.5.3 Removing a tray unit-L from the module .............124
5.5.4 Preparation for loading a feeder pallet ................125
5.6 Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-LT .............. 126
5.6.1 Preparation .........................................................126
5.6.2 Inserting a tray unit-LT into the module ..............133
5.6.3 Removing a tray unit-LT from the module ..........134
5.7 Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-LTC ............ 137
5.7.1 Preparation .........................................................137
5.7.2 Inserting a tray unit-LTC into the module ............141
5.7.3 Removing a tray unit-LTC from the module ........142
5.8 Removing/Attaching a Placing Head ............ 145
5.8.1 Important points when removing and attaching heads
..............................................................................145
5.8.2 Removing a placing head ...................................146
5.8.3 Attaching a placing head ....................................149
5.8.4 Setting nozzle jigs ...............................................153
5.9 Removing/Attaching a Nozzle Station .......... 155
5.9.1 Removing ............................................................155
5.9.2 Attaching .............................................................158
5.10 Exchanging Backup Plates ........................ 159
NXT Mechanical Reference v

Contents QD008-27
5.10.1 Procedure (when no tray unit-L/LT is attached) 160

5.10.2 Procedure (when a tray unit-L/LT is present) ... 183
5.11 Attaching/Removing a Tray Unit-M ............ 214
5.11.1 Preparation ....................................................... 215
5.11.2 Attaching procedure ......................................... 216
5.11.3 Attaching procedure (with an optional change unit)
.............................................................................. 217
5.11.4 Removal procedure .......................................... 221
5.11.5 Removing procedure (with an optional change unit)
.............................................................................. 222
5.11.6 Setting a tray unit-M tape duct or cover ........... 225
6. Preventive Maintenance ................................... 227
6.1 About Preventative Maintenance ................. 227
6.1.1 Maintenance frequency ...................................... 227
6.1.2 Points of caution ................................................. 228
6.1.3 Required equipment ........................................... 229
6.1.4 Applying grease ................................................. 233
6.2 Maintenance Checklist ................................. 234
6.2.1 Maintenance performed by operators when the
machine is waiting to produce ............................. 234
6.2.2 Maintenance performed by maintenance personnel
.............................................................................. 235
6.3 Daily Maintenance (Every 24 Hrs) ............... 240
6.3.1 Cleaning the reject parts box ............................. 240
6.3.2 Cleaning the waste tape box .............................. 240
6.4 Weekly Maintenance (Every 160 Hrs) ......... 241
6.4.1 Cleaning the nozzle station holders ................... 241
6.4.2 Cleaning the glass cover on the parts camera ... 242
6.4.3 Cleaning the glass cover inside parts camera lighting
unit ....................................................................... 243
6.4.4 Cleaning the feeder pallet .................................. 244
6.4.5 Cleaning inside the module ................................ 245
6.4.6 Cleaning the tray unit-LT feeder slots and connectors
.............................................................................. 247
6.4.7 Cleaning the tray unit-LTC feeder slots and
connectors ........................................................... 247
vi NXT Mechanical Reference

QD008-27 Contents
6.5 Monthly Maintenance (Every 700 Hrs) ......... 248

6.5.1 Cleaning the reject parts conveyor belt ..............248
6.5.2 Cleaning the tray unit-L shuttle belts (reject parts, tray
drawer) .................................................................248
6.5.3 Cleaning the tray unit-LT shuttle belts (reject parts,
tray drawer) ..........................................................249
6.5.4 Cleaning the tray unit-LTC shuttle belts (reject parts,
tray drawer) ..........................................................249
6.5.5 Cleaning the placing head vacuum filters ...........250
6.5.6 Exchanging nozzle clamp pins and cleaning the
nozzle pickup surface ...........................................253
6.5.7 Cleaning the head flange filter ............................255
6.5.8 Cleaning the placing head syringes ....................256
6.5.9 Syringes and O-rings inside syringe lubrication ..260
6.5.10 Checking and replacing mechanical valve O-rings
..............................................................................265
6.6 3 Monthly Maintenance (Every 2000 Hrs) .... 266
6.6.1 Machine lubrication (base, module support surfaces)
..............................................................................266
6.7 6 Monthly Maintenance (Every 4000 Hrs) .... 267
6.7.1 XY-robot lubrication ............................................267
6.7.2 Lubricating the flat cable for the X-axis and Y-axis
..............................................................................277
6.7.3 Lubricating H04/H08/H12(S)/H12HS head
(arm rotation axis) ...............................................282
6.7.4 Lubricating the Q-axis gear and R-axis gear on the
H12HS head .........................................................283
6.7.5 Lubricating the conveyor panel clamp parts .......284
6.7.6 Cleaning the H01 sleeve assembly <for heads
without flange filter> .............................................286
6.7.7 Cleaning the tray unit-M ......................................290
6.8 Yearly Maintenance (Every 8000 Hrs) ......... 291
6.8.1 Cleaning the air regulator ...................................291
6.8.2 Lubricating the nozzle changer up/down shafts ..292
6.8.3 Cleaning the half mirror of the mark camera light
source ..................................................................295
6.8.4 Cleaning the parts camera lens ..........................296
NXT Mechanical Reference vii

Contents QD008-27
6.8.5 Replacing the placing head vacuum filters

<H04, H08, H12(S) and H12HS heads> ............. 298
6.9 12000 Hr Maintenance ................................. 299
6.9.1 Cleaning the mist separator filter ....................... 299
6.9.2 Cleaning the vacuum pump filter ........................ 300
6.9.3 Cleaning the tray unit-L fan filter ........................ 301
6.9.4 Replacing and lubricating the placing head
mechanical valve O-rings .................................... 302
6.9.5 Lubricating the H01 head ................................... 304
6.9.8 Lubricating the H08/H12(S) head ....................... 309
6.9.9 Lubricating the H12HS head .............................. 311
6.9.10 Lubricating the waste tape processing unit ...... 313
6.9.11 Lubricating the double conveyor ...................... 314
6.9.12 Lubricating the single conveyor ........................ 315
6.9.13 Lubricating the single conveyor S .................... 316
6.9.14 Checking the conveyor belt tension ................. 318
6.9.15 Checking the single conveyor S belt tension ... 320
6.9.16 Lubricating the tray unit-L moving parts ........... 323
6.9.17 Checking the tray unit-L belt tension ................ 325
6.9.18 Lubricating the tray unit-LT moving parts ......... 328
6.9.19 Checking and adjusting the tray unit-LT belt tension
.............................................................................. 330
6.9.20 Lubricating the tray unit-LTC moving parts ...... 334
6.9.21 Checking and adjusting the tray unit-LTC belt
tension ................................................................. 336
6.9.22 Lubricating the tray unit-M TY-axis clutches .... 340
6.9.23 Lubricating the tray stoppers of the tray unit-M 342
6.9.24 Checking the tray unit-M belt tension ............... 344
6.10 Irregular Maintenance ................................ 348
6.10.1 Maintenance to remedy a pallet clamp error .... 348
6.10.2 Maintenance to remedy a processing error ...... 349
6.10.3 Maintenance to remedy a tape feed error ........ 349
6.10.4 Removing rejected parts (reject parts conveyor,
tray unit-L, tray unit-LT/LTC) .............................. 350
viii NXT Mechanical Reference

QD008-27 Contents
6.10.5 Removing empty trays (tray unit-L, tray unit-LT)

..............................................................................351
6.10.6 Cleaning the Module Top Cover .......................352
6.10.7 Cleaning the nozzles ........................................353
6.10.8 Checking and replacing the placing head vacuum
filters <H01/H02 heads> ......................................356
6.10.9 Checking the conveyor belt tension ..................356
6.10.10 Cleaning the conveyor belt and belt cleaner ...357
6.10.11 Cleaning the soft backup pins .........................358
6.10.12 Lubricating the PCU (Pallet Change Unit) ......359
7. Replacing Consumable Parts .......................... 363
7.1 Replacing Conveyor Belts ............................ 363
7.1.1 Recommended frequency ...................................363
7.1.2 Procedure (example of M6(S) module) ...............363
7.2 Replacing the Conveyor Belt Cleaner .......... 366
7.2.2 Procedure ...........................................................366
7.3 Replacing Panel Clamper Pins .................... 367
7.3.2 Procedure ...........................................................367
7.4 Replacing the Module Servo Amplifier Battery
........................................................................ 368
7.4.1 Battery type .........................................................368
7.4.3 Procedure ...........................................................368
7.5 Replacing the Placing Head Battery ............ 370
7.5.1 Battery type .........................................................370
7.5.3 Procedure ...........................................................370
7.6 Replacing the Module CPU Battery ............. 375
7.6.1 Battery type .........................................................375
7.6.3 Preparation procedures ......................................375
7.6.4 Procedure for replacing the battery ....................376
7.6.5 Making all settings after changing the battery ....380
NXT Mechanical Reference ix

Contents QD008-27
7.7 Replacing the Base CPU battery ................. 384

7.7.1 Battery type ........................................................ 384
7.7.2 Recommended frequency .................................. 384
7.7.3 Preparation procedures ...................................... 384
7.7.4 Procedure for replacing the battery .................... 384
7.7.5 Making all settings after changing the battery .... 386
7.8 Replacing the Nozzle Station Fluorescent
Stickers .......................................................... 387
7.8.1 Replacement frequency ..................................... 387
7.8.2 Procedure ........................................................... 387
7.9 Replacing a Fuse on a Board inside a Module
........................................................................ 389
7.9.1 Module remote I/O boards ................................. 389
7.9.2 Module I/F board and module connector board
(inside the module control box) ........................... 390
7.10 Replacing a Fuse on the Base Remote I/O
Boards ............................................................ 391
7.10.1 Remote I/O board 1 (for an 8M base) .............. 392
7.10.5 Remote I/O board 1 (for a 4M base) ................ 396
7.11 Replacing a Fuse on a Base Control I/F Board
........................................................................ 399
7.11.1 Base control I/F board 1 (for an 8M Base) ....... 400
7.11.5 Base control I/F board 1 (for a 4M Base) ......... 404
7.11.6 Base control I/F board 2 (for a 4M Base) ......... 405
7.11.7 Base control I/F board 1 (for a 2M base) ......... 406
7.12 Replacing the Thermofuse on the Vacuum
Pump ............................................................. 407
7.12.1 8M base / 4M base ........................................... 407
x NXT Mechanical Reference

QD008-27 Contents
7.12.2 External control box ..........................................408

7.12.3 Add on vacuum pump box ................................409
7.13 Replacing the Cooling Fan ......................... 410
7.13.1 Module fan ........................................................410
7.13.2 Base fan ............................................................412
7.13.3 Fan for the DC power supply unit on the feeder
pallet ....................................................................413
7.14 Replacing the Tray Unit-L Servo Controller
Battery ............................................................ 415
7.14.1 Battery type .......................................................415
7.14.2 Procedure .........................................................415
7.15 Replacing the Tray Unit-L Servo Axis Amplifier
Battery ............................................................ 417
7.15.1 Recommended frequency .................................417
7.15.2 Procedure .........................................................417
7.16 Replacing the Tray Unit-L Interface Board Fuse
........................................................................ 418
7.16.1 Procedure .........................................................418
7.17 Replacing the Sponge Pad on the Tray Unit-L
Remover ......................................................... 419
7.17.2 Replacing procedure .........................................419
7.18 Replacing the Tray Unit-LT Servo Controller
Battery ............................................................ 420
7.18.1 Battery type .......................................................420
7.18.2 Procedure .........................................................420
7.19 Replacing the Tray Unit-LT Servo Axis Amplifier
Battery ............................................................ 422
7.19.2 Procedure .........................................................422
7.20 Replacing the Tray Unit-LT Interface Board
Fuse .............................................................. 423
7.20.1 Procedure .........................................................423
7.21 Replacing the Tray Unit-LTC Servo Controller
Battery ............................................................ 424
7.21.1 Battery type .......................................................424
NXT Mechanical Reference xi

Contents QD008-27
7.21.2 Procedure ......................................................... 424

7.22 Replacing the Tray Unit-LTC Servo Axis
Amplifier Battery ............................................. 426
7.22.1 Recommended frequency ................................ 426
7.22.2 Procedure ......................................................... 426
7.23 Replacing the Tray Unit-LTC Control Board
Fuse .............................................................. 428
7.23.1 Procedure ......................................................... 428
7.24 Replacing the Tray Unit-M Control Board
Fuses ............................................................. 429
7.24.1 Procedure ......................................................... 429
7.25 Replacing the Vacuum Pump's Inlet Valves/
Outlet Valves & Gaskets ................................ 430
7.25.1 Recommended frequency ................................ 430
7.25.2 Required equipment ......................................... 430
7.25.3 Replacement procedure ................................... 431
8. Replacing Parts ................................................ 443
8.1 Replacing the Parts Camera ........................ 443
8.1.1 Required tools .................................................... 443
8.1.2 Required time ..................................................... 443
8.1.3 Procedure ........................................................... 443
8.2 Replacing the Mark Camera ........................ 447
8.2.1 Required tools .................................................... 447
8.2.2 Required time ..................................................... 447
8.2.3 Process .............................................................. 447
8.3 Replacing the Reject Parts Unit ................... 451
8.3.1 Required time ..................................................... 451
8.3.2 Procedure ........................................................... 451
8.4 Replacing the Waste Tape Processing Unit 453
8.4.1 Required tools .................................................... 453
8.4.2 Required time ..................................................... 453
8.4.3 Procedure ........................................................... 453
8.5 Replacing the Module Servo Box ................. 456
8.5.1 Required tools .................................................... 456
xii NXT Mechanical Reference

QD008-27 Contents
8.5.2 For M3(S) modules .............................................456

8.5.3 For M6(S) modules .............................................459
8.6 Replacing the Module Control Box ............... 462
8.6.1 Required tools .....................................................462
8.6.2 For M6(S) modules .............................................462
8.6.3 For M3(S) modules .............................................464
8.7 Replacing the Module CPU Box ................... 466
8.7.1 Required tools .....................................................466
8.7.2 Preparation procedures ......................................466
8.7.3 Procedure ...........................................................467
8.7.4 Making all settings after replacing the CPU box .468
8.8 Replacing the Base Control Box 1 ............... 470
8.8.1 Required tools .....................................................470
8.8.2 For 8M base ........................................................470
8.8.3 For 4M base ........................................................472
8.9 Replacing the Base Control Box 2 ............... 474
8.9.1 Required tools .....................................................474
8.9.2 For 8M base ........................................................474
8.9.3 For 4M base ........................................................476
8.10 Replacing the Base Control Box 3 ............. 478
8.10.1 Required tools ...................................................478
8.10.2 For 8M base only ..............................................478
8.11 Replacing the Base Control Box 4 ............. 480
8.11.1 Required tools ...................................................480
8.11.2 For 8M base only ..............................................480
8.12 Replacing the Base CPU Box .................... 482
8.12.1 Required tools ...................................................482
8.12.2 Preparation procedures ....................................482
8.12.3 For 8M base ......................................................483
8.12.4 For 4M base ......................................................485
8.12.5 For 2M base (external control box) ...................487
8.12.6 Settings after replacement ................................488
8.13 Replacing the Vacuum Pump Control Box . 489
8.13.1 8M base and 4M base ......................................489
NXT Mechanical Reference xiii

Contents QD008-27
8.13.2 External control box ......................................... 491

8.13.3 Add on vacuum pump box ............................... 493
8.14 Replacing the DC Power Supply Unit on the
Feeder Pallet .................................................. 495
8.14.1 M3(S) module ................................................... 495
8.14.2 M6(S) module ................................................... 497
8.15 Replacing a Conveyer Controller ............... 499
8.15.1 M3(S) module ................................................... 499
8.15.2 M6(S) module ................................................... 502
8.16 Replacing the Connector between the Feeder
Pallet and the Parts Supply Base ................... 506
8.16.1 Required tools .................................................. 506
8.16.2 M3(S) module ................................................... 506
8.16.3 M6(S) module ................................................... 507
8.17 Replacing the Connector for the Tray Unit-L and
Parts Supply Base .......................................... 508
8.17.1 Required tools .................................................. 508
8.17.2 Procedure ......................................................... 508
8.18 Detaching and Attaching the Tray Unit-L Cover
........................................................................ 509
8.18.1 Required tools .................................................. 509
8.18.2 Tray unit-L cover nomenclature ....................... 509
8.18.3 Detachment ...................................................... 510
8.18.4 Attachment ....................................................... 515
8.19 Replacing the Connector for the Tray Unit-LT
and Parts Supply Base ................................... 516
8.19.1 Required tools .................................................. 516
8.19.2 Procedure ......................................................... 516
8.19.3 Procedure ......................................................... 516
8.20 Removing Tray Unit-LT Covers ................. 517
8.20.1 Required tools .................................................. 517
8.20.2 Tray unit-LT cover configuration ...................... 517
8.20.3 Removing covers ............................................. 518
8.21 Replacing the Connector for the Tray Unit-LTC
and Parts Supply Base ................................... 525
xiv NXT Mechanical Reference

QD008-27 Contents
8.21.1 Required tools ...................................................525

8.21.2 Procedure .........................................................525
8.22 Removing Tray Unit-LTC Covers ............... 526
8.22.1 Required tools ...................................................526
8.22.2 Tray unit-LTC cover configuration ....................526
8.22.3 Removing covers ..............................................527
9. Measurement and Adjustment ......................... 535
9.1 On machine PAM (Placement Accuracy
Measurement) ................................................ 535
9.1.1 Required parts ....................................................535
9.1.2 About the sample job ..........................................537
9.1.3 Notes on performing on machine PAM ...............537
9.1.4 Preparing ............................................................538
9.1.5 Placing accuracy measurement (PAM) flow chart
..............................................................................541
9.1.6 Setting PAM measurement mode .......................542
9.1.7 PAM measurements ...........................................544
9.1.8 Creating a final offset file ....................................546
9.1.9 Correcting the placement accuracy (final offset file)
..............................................................................549
9.1.10 Changing the type of PAM mode ......................556
9.2 Sensitivity Adjustment for the Conveyor Panel
Pass Sensor ................................................... 557
9.2.1 Remote adjustment procedure ...........................558
9.2.2 On-machine adjustment procedure ....................559
9.3 Module Vacuum Sensor ............................... 560
9.3.1 Procedure ...........................................................560
9.4 Module Pressure Sensor .............................. 561
9.4.1 Procedure ...........................................................561
9.5 Base Vacuum Sensor .................................. 562
9.5.1 Procedure ...........................................................562
9.6 Base Pressure Sensor ................................. 564
9.6.1 Procedure ...........................................................564
9.7 Adjusting Panel Clamp Sensors ................... 566
9.7.1 Required items ....................................................566
NXT Mechanical Reference xv

Contents QD008-27
9.7.2 Procedure ........................................................... 566

10. Supplementary Information ............................ 569
10.1 Noise Levels .............................................. 569
10.1.1 Measured noise levels ..................................... 569
Index ......................................................................... 571
xvi NXT Mechanical Reference

QD008-27 1. Safety Guideline
1. Safety Guideline
Fuji machines are designed and produced with safety as one of our main considerations.
However, even a perfectly designed machine can be damaged, or someone can still be
injured, if the user does not follow the safety rules. It is the responsibility of the user to make
sure that all safety rules are followed at all times.
Be sure to read the safety rules before operating the machine and always use the machine
in accordance with these safety rules.
1.1 About Symbols

This section provides an explanation of the relevant safety precautions to be adhered to by
all people who use or work on this machine. An explanation of the warning labels attached
to the machine is also provided.
This manual employs the use of descriptive symbols and provides details of the level of
danger involved in certain operations to accompany the explanations of machine warning
labels and safety related items. Be sure you understand the meanings of these symbols
before reading the manual.
1.1.1 Degree of Hazards
Symbol Definition
Failure to observe this hazard warning will lead to severe
DANGER injury or death.
Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to severe

WARNING injury or death.
Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to

CAUTION personal injury or damage to the machine.
1.1.2 Examples of the Symbols
Symbol Explanation
Hazard
A triangle is used to draw your attention to a hazard. The symbol
inside the triangle indicates the nature of the hazard (in this case,
electrical shock).
Prohibition
A circle with a diagonal line is used to draw your attention to an
operation that is prohibited. The symbol inside the circle indicates
the nature of the operation (in this case, “Do not touch”).
A circle with an exclamation mark is used to draw your attention to to

a mandatory action. In other words, you are required to carefully
perform the given instructions.
NXT Mechanical Reference 1

1. Safety Guideline QD008-27
1.2 Safety Rules for All Machine Types
DANGER
Do not go near movable parts during automatic or manual
operation.
• Body parts or clothing may get caught in the machine, resulting

in serious injury or death.
D00001-00
WARNING
Do not insert hands or other body parts into the conveyor
inlets.
• Body parts may get caught in the machine, resulting in injury.

• If using a single machine independently, install safety covers or
interlock sensors at the conveyor openings, in accordance with
your local safety regulations, to prevent injuries. W00001-00
Do not operate the machine with the safety covers or doors

open.
• When safety covers or doors are removed, body parts or

clothing may get caught in the machine, resulting in personal
injury.
• When maintenance work is completed, return the safety covers
and doors to their original (closed) position. W00002-00
Always verify the position of the EMERGENCY STOP

buttons before operating the machine.
• Always be aware of the positions of the EMERGENCY STOP

buttons so that they can be pushed quickly in case of an
emergency. W00003-00
Check the safety functions before starting operation.
• Before starting the machine, check the operation of the

EMERGENCY STOP buttons, the safety switches on the
covers and doors, and all other machine safety features.
• Contact a Fuji serviceman immediately if any of the safety
functions fail and do not use the machine. W00004-00
Do not remove safety switches or disable safety functions.
• Do not short or remove the machine’s safety switches or disable

any safety functions. Persons working on the machine may be
seriously injured if operation commands are issued by mistake. W00005-00
2 NXT Mechanical Reference

WARNING
Ensure that there is nobody inside the machine when
working on the machine with two people or more.
• Verify that nobody is in or near the machine before operating

the machine. Operating the machine may result in injury to
people who are in or near the machine. W00006-00
Do not go near a machine that has stopped moving.
• There are times during automatic operation when the machine

may appear to have stopped, such as while it is waiting for a
panel, waiting for the next machine, reading marks, or
transmitting data. In such cases, once certain conditions are
fulfilled, the machine will begin moving again automatically, so
care should be taken. Only go near the machine after the
EMERGENCY STOP button has been pushed.
• When the “production screen” is displayed on the operation
panel, the machine will begin to move once certain conditions
are satisfied. Be aware that the machine will begin to move
regardless of whether these conditions are satisfied
intentionally or inadvertently. W00007-00
Do not place hands near the main conveyor.
• Hands or other body parts may get caught in the machine.
W00008-00
Always turn off power to the machine before performing

maintenance.
• Failure to observe this is extremely dangerous and may result

in sudden machine movements or electric shock.
W00009-00
Do not insert or remove connectors while power is being

supplied to the machine.
• Removing or inserting connectors while power is being supplied

to the machine may not only cause damage to the machine, but
may also cause electric shock. W00010-00
Stay clear from the machine when it is being lifted.
• Never put hands or feet under the machine when the machine
is being raised by means of a jack or other device for leveling or
transport. W00011-00
Do not wear gloves made of cloth when operating the

machine.
• Rubber gloves will tear when caught by the machine and

prevent hands from being drawn into the machine. Gloves
made of cotton or similarly strong material may cause hands to
be drawn into the machine. W00012-00

WARNING
Long hair should be tied back.
• Long hair may get caught in machines that are operating.

Hair should be kept short or tied back so that it does not get
caught in the machine. W00013-00
Turn off the air supply when removing items such as

cylinders, valves, or filters.
• Removing cylinders, valves, or filters without turning the air

supply off may cause parts or particles to be propelled into the
eyes.
• Be sure to turn off the air supply when removing cylinders,
valves, or filters. W00014-00
Wear protective glasses when removing parts from the

machine.
• Be sure to wear protective glasses when removing or

exchanging parts.
W00015-00
Check the machine operation panel and the target axes while
manually operating the machine.
• When operating the machine, carefully follow the instructions

that are displayed on the operation panel.
• Operating the machine without looking at the operation panel
may lead to operating errors or result in damage to the machine
or products. W00016-00
Do not touch the servo amp power terminal for at least five
minutes after turning off the power.
• The servo amp retains a high voltage even after the power has
been turned off.
• Always wait at least five minutes, and ensure that the CHARGE
lamp is off, before performing any work that may result in
contact with the servo amp terminal. W00017-00
CAUTION
Do not operate the machine with sensors removed or
disabled.
• Removing or disabling sensors will disarm the interlock,

resulting in collisions and damage to the machine.
C00001-00

CAUTION
Confirm the operational status from the messages on the
operation panel for machines that support automatic
changeover.
• On machines equipped with an automatic changeover system,

it is difficult to determine the changeover status from the front of
the machine during production. Follow the instructions on the
operation panel. C00002-00
Use the handle when opening or closing the safety doors,

fences, or covers.
• Opening or closing the safety doors, fences, or covers without

using the handle may result in injury.
• Opening or closing the safety doors, fences, or covers with too
much force may result in damage to the machine. C00003-00
Always wear an antistatic wrist strap when working with

circuit boards.
• Failure to do so may result in board damage.

• Ensure that the wrist strap is connected to the earth bonding
point. C00004-00

1.3 Safety Rules for NXT

1.3.1 Main Unit
WARNING
Do not insert hands or other body parts into the machine in the
spaces between feeders, especially when there are only a few
feeders present on the feeder pallet.
• Failure to do so could result in injury due to contact with the head.

W01001-00
When changing the conveyor width with the module pulled

forward, do not insert hands into the area near the conveyor.
• Body parts may get pinched or caught in the movable conveyor rail,
resulting in serious injury. W01002-00
When mounting an MCU, ensure that no one is between the MCU

and machine base.
• A person could be seriously injured or even crushed to death if

caught between the MCU and base. W01003-00
When pushing a module onto the base, check that no one is

behind the module.
• A person could be seriously injured or even crushed to death if

caught between the base and module. W01004-00
When pushing in a module, do not insert hands between the

module cover support and module.
• Body parts may get pinched or caught, resulting in serious injury.

W01005-00
When pushing in a module, do not insert hands between the

module lower front cover and base.

W01006-00
When pulling out or pushing in a module, do not insert hands or

other body parts in between modules.
• If caught between modules, fingers or other body parts could be cut

or severed. W01007-00
When working on a module in an opening with the cover off,

ensure that no one pushes in or pulls out the module.

W01008-00

WARNING
When working on a base in the opening above the waste tape
box, ensure that no one pulls out a module.

W01009-00
When working on a base in an opening with the cover off, ensure

that no one pushes in or pulls out the module.

W01010-00
Do not rotate the module lock knob to [UNLOCK] when a module

is loaded on the MCU.
• If the module moves on the MCU, it could pinch and sever body
parts, and if it falls from the MCU it could result in serious injury or
death. W01011-00
There is a limit to the number of modules that can be pulled out

safely at the same time. (Maximum: Two M3 modules on a 4M
base.)
• If the maximum is exceeded, the entire machine may fall over to the
front, possibly resulting in serious injury. This is especially true
when the front leveling bolts have not been adjusted. W01026-00
Do not release the module stopper mechanism on the base or

remove the module without mounting an MCU first.
• The module could fall from the base, resulting in serious injury or
death. W01013-00
Do not stare directly at the vision processing light sources.

Wear tinted protective glasses.
• Eye damage may be caused by the light.

W01014-00
Stay off of the base.
• Failure to do so could result in injury.
W01015-00
When handling the MCU, watch out for corners and protrusions.
W01016-00
Always be ready to apply the caster brake when handling the

MCU.
• Always use the caster brake when stopping an MCU loaded with a
module.
W01017-00

WARNING
When lifting a backup plate, be careful not to put your hands in
the areas between the plate, width-changing ball screw, and
hexagonal shaft. Also, be careful not to cut your hands on the
corners of the conveyor rails.
• Failure to do so could result in injury. W01018-00
Do not lift a backup plate if you are not strong enough, and
maintain correct lifting posture if you do lift a backup plate.
• Because the backup plates are very heavy, lifting them incorrectly
could result in back or other injuries.
W01019-00
Do not insert hands or other body parts into the duct of the
waste tape processing unit.
• There is a very sharp cutter blade inside the unit. Exercise extreme
caution, especially when carrying the unit.
W01020-00
Use two or more people to carry the waste tape processing unit.
• Maintenance of the waste tape processing unit is usually

accompanied by removing the unit from the machine. Use two or
more people to carry the unit because it is very heavy. W01021-00
Ensure that the work bench where the waste tape processing
unit is placed is flat.
• The unit may fall to the ground if the work bench is tilted, resulting
in personal injury and/or machine damage.
W01022-00
Do not touch linear motors immediately after production is

stopped.
• Contact with the shaft or coil section could cause burns. The shaft
and coil section of linear motors remain very hot even after
production is stopped. W01023-00
People with a heart pacemaker should stay clear of the Y-axis

linear motor in M6S modules (do not come within 400 mm).
• A strong magnetic field is generated by the Y-axis linear motor in

modules. Exercise extreme caution, because pacemakers may
malfunction due to the magnetic field. W01027-00
Do not disassemble linear motors.
• Never disassemble the linear motor coil and shaft parts. Injury and/
or machine damage may occur by magnetic parts shooting out due
to the strong force of the magnets. W01025-00

CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch your hands when opening and closing
the front or side covers.

C01001-00
Do not insert fingers or other body parts into the gap between
the machine side cover and base.

C01002-00
When working in front of the base, ensure that clothing or arms

are not caught on the guide pins on the top of the base.

C01003-00
When there is no module on the base, do not block the module

position confirmation sensor or module seating confirmation
sensor that activate the air cylinder.
• The air cylinder may activate and move the lever or clamper,
resulting in injury. C01004-00
Do not push or pull on the mark camera unit when moving the
placing head.
• The position of the mark camera may be shifted, which negatively

affects the placing accuracy of the machine.
C01005-00
Do not put your hands underneath the nozzle station when

loading it in the machine.

C01006-00
Place the waste tape processing unit upside down on the work
bench.
• The duct may deform under the weight of the unit if it is not placed
upside down.
C01007-00
When working close to the linear motor of an M6S module

(within 55 mm) do not use ordinary metal tools. Use only non-
magentic tools.
• The magnetic force can pull metal objects and result in injury (by
trapping fingers or other body parts). C01011-00

CAUTION
Keep magnetic cards, wristwatches, and other precision
machines away from the linear motor of M6S modules (do not
bring within 55 mm).
• Damage to items may occur due to the magnetic field generated by

a linear motor. C01012-00
When pulling forward or returning a module, move the module

slowly and gently so it does not strike the stopper.
• It is possible that the machine position may move if the module

strikes the stopper.
C01009-00
Connect a 200 to 230 V AC +/-10%, 50/60 Hz power supply to the

machine primary power supply side.
• The machine may not function properly or be damaged if a power

supply other than that above is used.
C01010-00

1.3.2 Tray Unit-L
WARNING
When pushing a tray unit-L into the machine, ensure that no one
is between the tray unit-L and machine base.
• A person could be seriously injured or crushed to death if caught

between the tray unit-L and machine.
W01028-00
Lock the caster brake whenever the tray unit-L is removed from
the machine.
• Depending on the slope and condition of the floor, the tray unit-L
could roll unexpectedly, possibly resulting in injury.
W01029-00
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch body parts when opening or closing the
tray unit-L doors, drawers, or covers. Do not leave the doors,
drawers, or covers open while the tray unit-L is unattended.
• Body parts may get pinched or caught, resulting in injury.

C01013-00
When using the handle that adjusts the height of the tray unit-L,
make sure that body parts are not caught between the handle
and cover.

C01014-00
When removing or replacing the empty tray box, be careful not

to pinch body parts between the tray unit-L and empty tray box.

C01015-00
Do not insert body parts through the bottom of the tray unit-L
into the inner section where mechanical parts are located.

C01016-00

1.3.3 Tray Unit-LT/LTC
WARNING
When pushing a tray unit-LT/LTC into the machine, ensure that
no one is between the tray unit-LT/LTC and machine base.
• A person could be seriously injured or crushed to death if caught

between the tray unit-LT/LTC and machine.
W01030-00
Lock the caster brake whenever the tray unit-LT/LTC is removed

from the machine.
• Depending on the slope and condition of the floor, the tray unit-LT/
LTC could roll unexpectedly, possibly resulting in injury.
W01031-00
Securely grip the magazine rack when lifting, carrying, or

positioning it.
• The magazine rack is heavy and injury could result if dropped.

W01032-00
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch body parts when opening or closing the
tray unit-LT/LTC doors or covers. Do not leave the doors or
covers open while the tray unit-LT/LTC is unattended.

C01017-00
When using the handle that adjusts the height of the tray unit-
LT/LTC, make sure that body parts are not caught between the
handle and cover.

C01018-00
When removing or replacing the empty tray box, be careful not

to pinch body parts between the tray unit-LT/LTC and empty
tray box.

C01019-00
Do not insert body parts through the bottom of the tray unit-LT/
LTC into the inner section where mechanical parts are located.

C01020-00

1.3.4 Tray Unit-M
WARNING
Do not insert hands or other body parts in the space between
the tray unit-M and the feeder pallet when attaching or removing
the tray unit-M.

W01033-00
Use two or more people to lift, carry, or position the tray unit-M.
• The tray unit-M is extremely heavy and injury could result if

dropped.
W01034-00
Do not insert hands or other body parts in the side spaces

between the machine and the tray unit-M during automatic
operation.

W01035-00
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch body parts in the tray unit-M door when
opening and closing it. Do not leave the door open while the
tray unit-M is unattended.
• Body parts may be pinched or caught, resulting in injury.

C01021-00
1.3.5 Disposal of linear motor magnets

Extremely powerful magnets are used on the stator of the linear motor. It is extremely
important to follow the caution points below when disposing of the linear motor. If disposal
is done by a third party, be sure to instruct them that demagnetization is necessary before
disposal.
• Before removing the stator, be sure to turn off the machine.
• Before removing the stator, prepare a space with no magnetic materials in which
to put it.
• After removing the stator, cover it with non-magnetic material such as paper or
wood to a thickness of at least 55 mm.
• Do not disassemble the stator under any circumstances.
• Heat the stator to at least 330 degrees Celsius for at least 1 hour
(demagnetization processing). Upon cooling, the stator can be disposed of
along with normal industrial waste.

1.4 Safety Labels

To warn the operator of hazards, safety labels are attached to the machine at the positions
indicated in the figure below.
Familiarize yourself with each label and its message before operating the machine.
M3(S) Module M6 Module
*1 *1
*1
*1
M6S Module
䇌Ϣ㽖䖰㸡㒔ᗼ⬊ࡽᴏⱙ䕉ⱙߛ㾸Ȣ
ᄭ೽⺖ⷈ亳ߏͼᇑ㟉বӹⱙॆ䰾Ȣ
Ð½¤£n-i¶¦æu½Ê©¹qÊ̊÷¾ªºb¶ºª¤ÀŅ̃C¡
s¦b¦ºÏ¥Û-̧X¥¡AÉ¾-Pü̈¶Ëºª¦MIÀ¡C
*1
*1
NXTSAF010Ec

4M base *1
*1
*2
*1
*1
Dependent 4M base
2M base
*1
*1
*1 *1
*2
NXTSAF011E

MSU Engineering panel stand

WARNING
⼊๔
Head Cleaner
Tray unit-LT
Tray unit-L
*1
Tray unit-LTC
*1
*1
*1 Tray unit-M
Side cover
NXTSAF012Ed

1.4.1 NXT-2 Safety Label Explanations
Symbol Explanation
Warning: Pinching danger
Do not insert hands or other body parts in the space between
adjacent modules.
Mandatory action, Direction: Eye protection

Direct exposure to the lighting unit may result in damage to the
eyes. Ensure to use light protection eyewear when necessary.
Caution, Warning: Shock danger

*1: High voltage! Contact may cause electric shock. Turn off
the power prior to servicing.
*2: Connect a 200 - 230V AC +/-10% 50/60Hz primary power
supply to the machine.
Caution, Warning: Cutting danger

An automatic tape cutter is positioned behind this frame.
Exercise extreme caution when performing maintenance.
Warning: Do not step

Do not step or stand on this area.
Caution, Warning: Moving parts

Do not insert hands or other body parts.
Moving parts may cause injury. Turn off the power before
inserting any body parts.
Warning: High Temperature

Contacting with the main body and shaft of the linear motor
could result in burns. They are high temperature.
Warning: Magnetic Field

Heart pacemakers and other precision equipment could be
affected by the magnetic field. Always keep a distance of 400
mm or more.
Warning: Disassembly prohibited

Do not disassemble the linear motor shaft. Injury may occur
by parts shooting out due to the strong force of the magnets.
Mandatory action, Direction: Eye protection

Wear eye protection such as protective glasses while
performing this procedure. There is a danger of foreign
objects such as dust getting in your eyes.

1.5 The EMERGENCY STOP Button

In the event of an emergency, press any of the red EMERGENCY STOP buttons located
on the machine at the positions indicated in the figure below.
EMERGENCY STOP button
EMERGENCY
STOP button
Tray unit-L
EMERGENCY STOP button EMERGENCY STOP button
Tray unit-LT Tray unit-LTC

NXTSAF001Ee

1.6 Locking System

When performing maintenance or service on the machine, all personnel who service the
machine should use locks to prevent others from turning on the machine power or air. This
procedure is referred to as a lockout.
To prevent accidents, especially those caused by mistakes when multiple operators are
present, all related personnel should have thorough knowledge of lockout procedures.
1.6.1 Lockout Procedure

Prepare 2 commercially available padlocks, and require all service personnel to carry
lockout nametags.
1. Switch off the machine power.
2. Rotate the main switch on the base to the OFF position.
NXTSAF004
3. Lock the main switch with a padlock.

All personnel working on the machine should attach their lockout nametags to the
padlock.
Note: The presence of a nametag on the padlock signals that the machine is being serviced and
that the lock is not to be removed.
NXTSAF006

4. In the same manner, rotate the air valve handle to the OFF position and lock with the
second padlock.
All personnel working on the machine should attach their nametags to the padlock.
NXTSAF005
5. The lockout is complete.

1.6.2 Unlocking Procedure

When finished servicing the machine, all personnel should remove their lockout nametags
from the padlocks.
1. Confirm that all personnel are clear of the machine.
2. Confirm that the machine is in a safe condition. Remove the padlock from the air valve
and rotate the handle to the ON position.
NXTSAF007
3. Remove the padlock from the main switch and rotate it to the ON position.
NXTSAF008
4. This concludes the unlocking procedure.

MEMO:

QD008-27 2. NXT Components
2. NXT Components
The primary machine compoments are identified here.
2.1 Body Components

Operation panel
XY-robot
Module
Base
Conveyor
Main switch
Reject parts box
Waste tape box 01MEC-0483E
• Operation Panel:
Used to perform machine operation.
• XY-Robot:
The placing head is attached to the XY-robot.
• Base:
Modules are mounted on the base.
• Module:
Modules can be easily rearranged.
• Conveyor:
The conveyor is responsible for transporting the panels to and from the
production area.
• Reject Parts Box:

Parts that are deemed not to be fit for placement are dumped in the reject parts
box.
• Waste Tape Box:

Used to collect used tape after parts have been picked up.
• Main Switch:
Used to turn the power to the machine ON/OFF.

2. NXT Components QD008-27
2.2 Placing Head Components

The placing head picks up parts from supply devices and places them on the panel.
Battery
<H01 Head>
Z-axis ball screw

Vacuum filters
Z-axis LM rail
Z1-axis ball screw

<H02 Head>
Z2-axis ball screw
Vacuum filters Q1-axis gear

Q2-axis gear
Vacuum filters
Battery 01MEC-0484E

Battery
<H04 Head>
Z-axis ball screw
Z-axis LM rail
Stepping motor
Mechanical valve
Vacuum filter
Battery
<H08 Head>
Z-axis ball screw
Z-axis LM rail
Stepping motor Mechanical valve
Vacuum filter
01MEC-0485E

Battery
<H12(S) Head>
Z-axis LM rail
Z-axis ball screw
Mechanical valve
Stepping motor Vacuum filter
<H12HS Head>
Battery
Z-axis LM rail
Z-axis ball screw
Mechanical valve
Vacuum filter
Stepping motor 01MEC-0486E
Note: For details on the OF head, refer to the "NXT/AIM OF Head Instruction Manual", for the G04
head, refer to the "NXT G04 Head Instruction Manual", and for the H08Q and H12SQ
heads, refer to the "Instruction Manual -Supplement for Heads with Part Side Recognition
-".

2.3 Parts Camera Components

The parts camera captures part images.
Cover
Parts camera light
Parts camera
<For Sidelight Type>
Sidelight Frontlight
01MEC-0487E

2.4 Mark Camera & Lighting Components

The mark camera is used to read fiducial marks on the panel.
Mark camera
Mark camera light
01MEC-0488E

2.5 Feeder Pallet Components

Tape feeders are loaded on the feeder pallet, which enables batch changeover.
Connectors
Clamper
Air cylinder
Connectors
Part supply base
Feeder pallet
<With bucket type tape holder>
01MEC-0489E

2.6 Tray Unit-L Components

The tray unit is used to supply parts to the M6(S) module.
Connector Remover (Option)
Parts removal area

Shuttle
Door
Reject parts conveyor
Parts supply drawer
Control box
Empty tray box

(for remover
equipped units)
Empty tray stopper

(for remover NXTMTU001Ed
equipped units)

2.7 Tray Unit-LT Components

Remover (Option)
Upper door
Shuttle
Reject parts
unit
Emergency stop button
Lower door
Control box
Empty tray stopper

(for remover
equipped units)
Empty tray stopper

(for remover
equipped units) 01MEC-0221E

2.8 Tray Unit-LTC Components

Upper door Shuttle
Reject parts
conveyor
Emergency stop
button Feeder pallet
Lower door
Control box
Waste tape box

Handle Adjusting bolt
01MEC-0500Ea

2.9 Tray Unit-M Components

The tray unit is used to supply parts to the module.
Communication connector
Clamp lever
Door
Shuttle conveyor
Rack
NXTMTU066E

2.10 Reject Parts Conveyor Components

Parts that are rejected based on vision processing results are rejected here.
Reject parts conveyor-M
Conveyor belt
Reject parts conveyor-L
Clamp lever
Conveyor belt
Clamp lever
01MEC-0490E

2.11 Nozzle Changer Components

The nozzle changer is used to store nozzles. The machine automatically changes to the
optimum nozzles during production.
Nozzle station
<H01/H02, M3-2 type>
Nozzle station
<H08/H12(S)/H12HS type>
Nozzle station
<H01/H02, M6-2 type>
Nozzle station
<H01/H02 type for tray unit-L/LT/LTC>
Nozzle changer
Nozzle station
<H04 type>
Nozzle station Nozzle station
<H01/H02 type for tray unit-LT/LT> <H04 type for tray unit-L/LT/LTC>
Nozzle station
<H04 type for tray unit-LT/LT>
01MEC-0491Eb

2.12 Waste Tape Processing Unit Components

This unit cuts waste tape after parts have been picked up.
Cutter
LM guide
Air cylinder
Duct
LM guide
01MEC-0492E

2.13 PCU (Pallet Change Unit) Components

This cart is used for removing and setting feeders pallets in modules.
<PCU for standard feeder pallets>
For M3(S) modules
Guides
Handle
<PCU for bucket type feeder pallets>
For M3(S) modules
NXTDPL020Eb

2.14 MCU (Module Change Unit) Components

This cart is used for removing and setting modules on bases.
Guides
Height adjusting handle
Level adjusting handle

Lifters NXTBAS262E

2.15 Machine Configuration

2.15.1 Standard machine configuration, M3(S)
Module XY-Robot
Placing Head Nozzle
H01 Head Nozzle Height Check Sensor
H02 Head
H04 Head
H08 Head H08Q Head
H12 Head H12S Head H12HS Head H12SQ Head
G04 Head F04 Head
GL Head
Mark Camera
Parts Camera
Conveyor Backup Pin
Double Conveyor Vacuum Backup Pin Unit
Single Conveyor Soft Backup Pin

Parts Eject Box
Auto PCB Support
Feeder Pallet
Nozzle Changer Nozzle Station
Waste Tape Processing Unit H01/H02 Head (M3) Nozzle Station
Operation Panel H04 Head Nozzle Station
Cover G04 Head Nozzle Station
FUJI Intelligent Feeder F04 Head Nozzle Station
FUJI Single Stick Feeder H08/H12(S)/H12HS Head Nozzle Station
Vibratory Stick Feeder
PCU
Tray Feeder
(Pallet Change Unit)
Tray Feeder (M)
MCU
Tray Feeder (L) (Module Change Unit)
Waste Tape Processing Unit
Reject Parts Conveyor (M)
Reject Parts Conveyor (L) NXTINT013Ef

2.15.2 Standard machine configuration, M6(S)

Module XY-Robot
Placing Head Nozzle
H01 Head Nozzle Height Check Sensor
H02 Head
H04 Head
H08 Head H08Q Head
H12Head H12S Head H12HS Head H12SQ Head
OF Head
G04 Head F04 Head
GL Head
Mark Camera
Parts Camera
Conveyor Backup Pin
Double Conveyor Vacuum Backup Pin Unit
Single Conveyor Soft Backup Pin
Parts Eject Box Auto PCB Support
Nozzle Changer Nozzle Station
Feeder Pallet H01/H02 Head (M6-2) Nozzle Station
Waste Tape Processing Unit H01/H02 Head (Tray Unit-L) Nozzle Station
Operation Panel H01/H02 Head (Tray Unit-LT) Nozzle Station
Cover H04 Head Nozzle Station
H04 Head (Tray Unit-L) Nozzle Station

FUJI Intelligent Feeder
H04 Head (Tray Unit-LT) Nozzle Station
FUJI Single Stick Feeder
H08/H12(S)/H12HS Head Nozzle Station
Vibratory Stick Feeder
OF Head Nozzle Station
Tray unit-L Tray Feeder G04 Head Nozzle Station
Tray unit-LT Tray Feeder (M) F04 Head Nozzle Station
Tray unit-LTC Tray Feeder (L)

Tray unit-M
PCU
Waste Tape Processing Unit (Pallet Change Unit)
Reject Parts Conveyor (M) MCU

(Module Change Unit) NXTINT014Eh
Reject Parts Conveyor (L)

X-axis/Y-axis (M6)
X-axis/Y-axis (M3)
Parts camera
XS-axis
Nozzle station
X-axis/Y-axis (M6S)
Operation panel
CYCLE STOP READY ON GROUP START STOP POWER
MANUAL
OK
MONITOR
EMERGENCY
CANCEL
STAND BY
FUJI Servo box
Parts supply base
Module control box
Feeder pallet
Module CPU box

Waste tape processing unit
NXTBAS251E

2.15.3 Standard machine configuration, base
Base Module Clamper
2M Base Vacuum Pump (for parts pickup)
4M Base
Waste Tape Box
Vacuum Unit
(for vacuum backup pin unit)
NXTINT015E
2M Base
Hub
Remote I/O PCB
Extension base interface
XS interlock PCB
Panel transfer interface
Base control box (2M)
Extension base interface

Breaker box 2
Control Box
Main switch
Base control box

(power)
Base CPU box
Vacuum pump control box

Vacuum pump
Thermal fuse
NXTBAS253E

4M Independent Base
Base control box 1 Remote I/O PCB 1

Hub
Breaker Base control box 2
Base CPU box Remote I/O PCB 2
Noise filter Thermal fuse
XS interlock PCB 1
Vacuum pump
control box
Main switch XS interlock PCB 2

Breaker box 1
Breaker box 2 Panel transfer interface
4M Dependent Base
Remote I/O PCB 3
Base control box 3 Base control box 4

Remote I/O PCB 4
Hub
Thermal fuse (option)
XS interlock PCB 3
Vacuum pump
control box (option)
Breaker box 3
XS interlock PCB 4

Breaker box 4
NXTBAS252E

MEMO:

QD008-27 3. Functions of Each Component
3. Functions of Each Component

This section explains the functions of the major components.
3.1 Base
Bases are the foundations upon which the modules are mounted. Different types of bases
can have different amount of modules mounted upon them.
4M base 2M base
8M base
NXTBAS024Eb
3.1.1 8M
A maximum of eight M3(S) modules can be mounted on this base. If only M6(S) modules
are mounted, then the maximum is four.
3.1.2 4M
A maximum of four M3(S) modules can be mounted on this base. If only M6(S) modules
are mounted, then the maximum number is two.
3.1.3 2M
A maximum of two M3(S) modules can be mounted on this base. If only M6(S) modules
are mounted, then the maximum number is one.

3. Functions of Each Component QD008-27
3.2 Modules
Each module comprises an XY-robot, panel conveyor, panel clamper, feeder pallet, and
vision system cameras. The XY-robot has a holder in which to mount the placing head.
Two sizes of modules are available and a module change unit can be used to quickly
remove and replace modules.
M3 Module M6 Module
NXTBAS138E
3.2.1 M3(S)
This module is the thinnest of the two modules and takes up one "position" on the bases.
In addition to the X- and Y-axes, there is also a XS-axis on the XY-robot. The M3 module
and the M3S module are separate modules with different specifications. The M3S module
uses an improved control box and other design changes to achieve faster production.
However, the term M3(S) is used in this manual to refer to both module types.
3.2.2 M6
This module is the widest of the modules and occupies two "positions" on the bases. The
module uses servo motors and ball screws to move the X- and Y- axes. The design of the
M6 and M6S modules are different, however, the term M6(S) is used in this manual to refer
to both module types.
3.2.3 M6S
This module is the same width as the M6 module and occupies two "positions" on the base.
The module has an X-axis operated by a servo motor and a Y-axis operated by a linear
motor. The design of the M6 and M6S modules are different, however, the term M6(S) is
used in this manual to refer to both module types.

3.3 Placing Head

The placing head is responsible for carrying the parts from the feeder to the panel. There
are three type of heads. These heads can be easily exchanged between modules.
H01 Head H02 Head H04 Head
H08 Head H12(S) Head H12HS Head
01MEC-0314E
Note: For details on the OF head, refer to the "NXT/AIM OF Head Instruction Manual", for the G04
head, refer to the "NXT G04 Head Instruction Manual", and for the H08Q and H12SQ
heads, refer to the "Instruction Manual -Supplement for Heads with Part Side Recognition
-".

3.3.1 H01 head

This placing head has a position for a 1 nozzle and can handle a wide range of different
sized parts. When this head is used, a compatible nozzle station type must be used.
3.3.2 H02 head

This placing head has a position for up to two nozzles and can handle a wide range of
different sized parts. When this head is used, a compatible nozzle station type must be
used.
3.3.3 H04 head

This placing head has positions for up to four nozzles. This head is designed to mostly
place small to medium size components. When this head is mounted in a module, a
compatible nozzle station must be used.
3.3.4 H08 head

This placing head has positions for up to eight nozzles. This head is designed to mostly
place small components. When this head is mounted in a module, a compatible nozzle
station must be used.
3.3.5 H12(S) head

This placing head has positions for up to twelve nozzles. This head is designed to mostly
place small chips and can do so at even higher speed than the H08 head. When this head
is mounted in a module, a compatible nozzle station must be used. The nozzle station for
this head is the same nozzle station used for the eight nozzle head. The H12 head and the
H12S head are separate heads with different specifications. However, the term H12(S) is
used in this manual to refer to both head types.
3.3.6 H12HS head

This placing head has positions for up to twelve nozzles. This head is designed to mostly
place small chips and can do so at even higher speed than the H12S head. The nozzle
station for this head is the same nozzle station as that used for the eight nozzle head.

3.4 Nozzle Changer

These units hold the nozzle station which in turn holds the replacement nozzles for the head
mounted in the module. The nozzle station is attached to the top of the nozzle changer and
can be easily changed. The nozzle changer is the same regardless of the nozzle station
used.
The nozzle station types are different based on the following three factors.
・The module type
・The placing head type
・The device unit type being used (such as feeder pallet, tray unit)
Nozzle station
<H01/H02, M3(S) type>
Nozzle station
<H08/H12(S)/H12HS type>
Nozzle station
<H01/H02, M6(S) type>
Nozzle station
<H01/H02 type for tray unit-L/LT>
Nozzle changer
Nozzle station
<H04 type>
Nozzle station Nozzle station
<H01/H02 type for tray unit-LT> <H04 type for tray unit-L/LT>
Nozzle station
<H04 type for tray unit-LT>
NXTNZC011Ed

3.5 Parts Supply System

3.5.1 Feeder pallet
These units hold the intelligent feeders, single stick feeders, and tray unit-M and are
attached to the front of the module. The feeder pallet for the M3(S) module is capable of
holding 20 8 mm feeders (7-inch reel holders), while the feeder pallet for the M6(S) is
capable of holding 45 8 mm feeders (7-inch reel holders).
3.5.2 Tray unit-L

This unit supplies parts on trays and can be detached from the machine. The tray unit-L
can be mounted on a M6(S) module and is fitted with a reject parts conveyor
3.5.3 Tray unit-LT

The tray unit-LT is a unit that supplies tray parts. In addition to trays, up to 7 feeders (8 mm
feeders with 7-inch reel holders) can be set on this unit. It can be exchanged with a feeder
pallet for use on M6(S) modules.
3.5.4 Tray unit-LTC

The tray unit-LTC is a unit that supplies tray parts. In addition to trays, up to 19 feeders (8
mm feeders with 7-inch reel holders) can be set on this unit. It can be exchanged with a
feeder pallet for use on M6(S) modules.
3.5.5 Tray unit-M

This unit supplies parts on trays. The tray unit-M can be mounted on a feeder pallet in an
M6(S) module.
3.6 Vision System

3.6.1 Parts camera
The parts camera is used to identify the shape and direction of parts which have been
picked up by the nozzles. There are four types of part camera, such as standard type, high-
resolution type, sidelight type and P03 camera (medium resolution).
3.6.2 Mark camera

The mark camera is mounted on the XY-robot and is used to read the marks on the panel
required by the machine for positioning.

3.7 Panel Conveyance

3.7.1 Double conveyor
This unit is mounted in the module and loads the panel from the previous machine and
unloads it to the next machine when the panel is completed. This unit has two lanes with
separate panel clampers for each lane. The machine automatically adjusts the width of
these lanes to match the panel being produced.
3.7.2 Single conveyor

This unit is mounted in the module and loads the panel from the previous machine and
unloads it to the next machine when the panel is completed. This unit has one lane. The
machine automatically adjusts the width of this lane to match the panel being produced.
3.7.3 Single conveyor S

This conveyor is only supported by M6S modules. The single conveyor S is equipped with
a panel clamper by motor.
3.8 Electrical Control System

3.8.1 Operation panel
The operation panel is equipped with the buttons required for operating the module and is
used to display instructions, the machine condition, and vision processing images.
3.8.2 Module CPU box

The control circuitry for running the module is located in this box. This box is responsible
for communicating with the base CPU box.
3.8.3 Module servo box

This box is located near the rear bottom of the modules and contains the servo amplifiers
and control boards used for controlling the servo axes in that module.
3.8.4 Base CPU box

This box has the control circuitry for running the machine and is responsible for managing
and communicating with the modules mounted on that base.

MEMO:

QD008-27 4. Sensor Positions
4. Sensor Positions
This section displays the position of the various sensors in the NXT and the I/O listing.
4.1 How to check I/Os

The type of dedicated software used to monitor input and output signals is different
depending on the version of the machine software.
• NXT V5.08 or later: IOMonitor
• NXT V5.11 or later: Equipment Check
4.1.1 IOMonitor
The following screen is displayed after starting IOMonitor.
Note: Refer to the NXT System Reference or the NXT II System Reference manual for details on
IOMonitor.
NXTSEN020E

4. Sensor Positions QD008-27
4.1.2 EquipmentCheck
After starting Equipment Check, selecting the unit from IO Monitor displays the following
screen.
Note: Refer to the NXT System Reference or the NXT II System Reference manual for details on
Equipment Check.
01NST-0905E

4.2 Base Sensors

4.2.1 2M base
3 4
6
9 10
2
1
8
7 12
5
55 11
56
53
54
60
59
58
57
51
52
49
50
NXTSEN019

4.2.2 4M base
3 4
52
9 10
15 16
2 52
1
6 21 22
8
7 12
5
14
13
55 11 18
56 20
53
54 19 24
17
49
50 60 23
59
58
57
64
63 68
67
62 66
61 65
51
51
Add on vacuum pump NXTSEN002Ea

4.2.3
QD008-27
3 4
52
9 10
8M base
15 16
2 52
1
21 22

6
8
7 12
5 27 28
14 52
13
55 11 18 33 34
56 20
53
54 19 24
17 39 40
49 26 52
23 25
50 60 30 45 46
59
58 32
57 36
29 31
64 38
63 68 37
35 42
67
62 66 44
61 65 48
43
41
72
71
76 47
75
70 74
69 73
80
79
78
77
83
84 51
81
82
NXTSEN001
57
4. Sensor Positions
4.2.4 Base module related inputs for modules 1 to 4

Signal Name Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4
Clamp check 1 RX000 7 RX008 13 RX010 19 RX018
Unclamp check 2 RX001 8 RX009 14 RX011 20 RX019
Clamp position check 3 RX002 9 RX00A 15 RX012 21 RX01A
Docking check 4 RX003 10 RX00B 16 RX013 22 RX01B
Front unclamp check 5 RX004 11 RX00C 17 RX014 23 RX01C
Rear unclamp check 6 RX005 12 RX00D 18 RX015 24 RX01D
4.2.5 Base module related inputs for modules 5 to 8

Clamp check 25 RX020 31 RX028 37 RX030 43 RX038
Unclamp check 26 RX021 32 RX029 38 RX031 44 RX039
Clamp position check 27 RX022 33 RX02A 39 RX032 45 RX03A
Docking check 28 RX023 34 RX02B 40 RX033 46 RX03B
Front unclamp check 29 RX024 35 RX02C 41 RX034 47 RX03C
Rear unclamp check 30 RX025 36 RX02D 42 RX035 48 RX03D
4.2.6 Base inputs

No. Address Signal Name Sensor Name
49 X006 Air check Base air pressure
50 X007 Parts vacuum OK Base parts vacuum
51 X009 Parts thermal fuse OK -
52 X017 Base cooling fan OK Base cooling fan
4.2.7 Base module related outputs for modules 1 to 4

Clamp 53 RY000 57 RY008 61 RY010 65 RY018
Unclamp 54 RY001 58 RY009 62 RY011 66 RY019
Front, rear clamp 55 RY002 59 RY00A 63 RY012 67 RY01A
Front, rear unclamp 56 RY003 60 RY00B 64 RY013 68 RY01B
4.2.8 Base module related outputs for modules 5 to 8

Clamp 69 RY020 73 RY028 77 RY030 81 RY038
Unclamp 70 RY021 74 RY029 78 RY031 82 RY039
Front, rear clamp 71 RY022 75 RY02A 79 RY032 83 RY03A
Front, rear unclamp 72 RY023 76 RY02B 80 RY033 84 RY03B

4.3 Placing Head Sensors

4.3.1 H01 head
5 6 *
11 *
8
7
9
10 3 *
2 *
NXTSEN003c

Number
1 X100 Pressure check Pressure check sensor
2* X103 Pin unclamp check Pin unclamp check sensor
3* X104 Pin clamper upper Pin clamper upper limit check
limit check sensor
4 X110 Nozzle pickup check Nozzle pickup check sensor
5 X111 Vacuum break check Vacuum break check sensor
6* X112 Pin clamper lower Pin clamper lower limit check
limit check sensor
7 Y100 Part pickup on -
8 Y101 Vacuum break -
9 Y102 Nozzle pickup on -
10 Y103 Nozzle vacuum break -
11* Y108 Clamper down -
*: For the optional automatic back-up pin function

4.3.2 H02 head
*
22
17
3 *
18
15
20 9
21 8
1 *
16
14 2 *
19
13 5
12
11 4
10 01MEC-0188

Number
1* X100 Pin clamper upper limit check Pin clamper upper limit sensor
3* X102 Pin clamper lower limit check Pin clamper lower limit sensor
4 X103 Pressure check 2 Pressure check sensor 2
5 X104 Pressure check 1 Pressure check sensor 1
6 X110 Nozzle presence check 2 Nozzle Pick-up check sensor 2
7 X111 Nozzle presence check 1 Nozzle Pick-up check sensor 1
8 X112 Vacuum break check 2 Vacuum break check sensor 2
9 X113 Vacuum break check 2 Vacuum break check sensor 2
10 X128- Device presence check 2 Device presence check sensor
12F 2
11 X128- Device presence check 1 Device presence check sensor
137 1
12 Y100 Part pickup check 2 -
13 Y101 Nozzle cleaning 2 -
14 Y102 Nozzle cleaning 1 -
15 Y103 Vacuum break 1 -
16 Y104 Part pickup 1 -
17 Y108 Nozzle pickup 1 -


Number
18 Y109 Nozzle discard 1 -
19 Y10A Vacuum break 2 -
20 Y10C Nozzle discard 2 -
21 Y10D Nozzle pickup 2 -
22* Y10E Clamper down -

4.3.3 H04 head
8 *
9
4
10
2 *
1 *
3 *
6
**
5
NXTSEN016d

Number
1* X100 Pin clamper upper limit check Pin clamper upper limit check
sensor
2* X101 Pin clamper lower limit check Pin clamper lower limit check
sensor
4 X103 Nozzle lowering lever off check Nozzle lowering lever check
5** X104 Nozzle presence check/Parts Nozzle check sensor/Parts
presence check check sensor
6 X109 Lever returned check (origin) Lever origin position sensor
7 X111 Part pickup check (red) Part pickup check sensor
10 Y103 Nozzle cleaning -
**: For the optional parts presence check function, this sensor is used to check for the
presence of both nozzles and parts.

4.3.4 H08 head
8 *
7 9
10
4 2 *
1 *
3 *
6
5
NXTSEN004d

Number
sensor
sensor
5 X104 Nozzle presence check Nozzle check sensor
6 X109 Lever returned check (origin) Lever origin position
7 X111 Part pickup check (red) Part pickup check

4.3.5 H12(S) head
8 *
7 9
10
2 *
4
1 *
3 *
5
NXTSEN021c

Number
sensor
sensor

4.3.6 H12HS head
8 *
7 9
10
2 *
1 *
3 *
5
01MEC-0193

Number
sensor
sensor

4.4 Module Base Sensors
M6(S) Module
1
2 4
M3(S) Module
1
2
3
NXTSEN005E
N0. Address Signal Name Sensor Name

Number
1 RX000 Part vacuum pressure OK Part vacuum
2 RX002 Air OK Air pressure
3 RX01D Paired module unlock check (M3) Paired module unlock check
4 X01A Module base cooling fan OK Module cooling fan

4.5 XY-Robot Sensors

4.5.1 M3(S) module
1
2
3
NXTSEN006

Number
1 X005 XS-axis interlock 1 XS-axis interlock 1

4.5.2 M6S module
NXTSEN043

Number
1 RX00B Y-axis linear motor Y-axis linear motor temperature
temperature OK OK

4.6 Nozzle Changer Sensors
4
5
1
2
3
8
10
12
7
9
11
NXTSEN007

Number
1 RX003 Nozzle changer 1 upper limit 1 check Changer upper limit 1
2 RX004 Nozzle changer 1 upper limit 2 check Changer upper limit 2
3 RX005 Nozzle changer 1 lower limit check Changer lower limit
4 RX006 Nozzle changer 1 table shutter closed Nozzle station shutter
check closed
5 RX007 Nozzle changer 1 table shutter open Nozzle station shutter
check opened
6 RX009 Nozzle changer 1 docking check Nozzle station docked
7 RY000 Nozzle changer 1 up 1 -
8 RY001 Nozzle changer 1 down 1 -
9 RY002 Nozzle changer 1 up 2 -
10 RY003 Nozzle changer 1 down 2 -
11 RY004 Nozzle changer 1 table shutter open -
12 RY005 Nozzle changer 1 table shutter close -

4.7 Feeder Pallet Sensors
M3(S) Module
2
M6(S) Module
6
7 5
4 1
2 3
6
7
8
5
4 8
1
NXTSEN008E

Number
1 RX010 Side 1 - feeder pallet set check (R) Feeder pallet right set
2 RX011 Side 1 - feeder pallet set check (L) Feeder pallet left set
3 RX012 Side 1 - feeder pallet check Feeder pallet detection
4 RX015 Side 1 - feeder pallet clamp check Feeder pallet clamped
5 RX016 Side 1 - feeder pallet unclamp check Feeder pallet unclamped
6 RY010 Side 1 - feeder pallet clamp -
7 RY011 Side 1 - feeder pallet unclamp -
8 X01B Pallet base cooling fan OK Pallet cooling fan

4.8 Waste Tape Processing Sensors
M6(S) Module M3(S) Module
1
1
2
2
NXTSEN009E

Number
1 RX019 Side 1 - tape cutter stroke end Tape cutter advanced sensor
2 PX01A Side 1 - tape cutter origin position Tape cutter origin sensor
3 RY012 Side 1 - tape cutter tape cut -

4.9 Double Conveyor Sensors

4.9.1 M3(S) module
14
13
16
9 10
5
15
8
11
5 1
12
1
6
3 4
7 2 NXTSEN010

Number
1 CX000 Lane 1 conveyor panel pass check Lane 1 conveyor panel left
L
2 CX001 Lane 1 conveyor panel pass check Lane 1 conveyor panel right
R
3 CX004 Lane 1 conveyor panel unclamp Lane 1 panel unclamp
check
4 CX005 Lane 1 conveyor backup pin check Lane 1 backup pin detection
L
R
7 CX00C Lane 2 conveyor panel unclamp Lane 2 panel unclamp
check
8 CX00D Lane 2 conveyor backup pin check Lane 2 backup pin detection
9 - - Lane 1 conveyor in amplifier
10 - - Lane 1 conveyor out amplifier
13 CY000 Lane 1 conveyor clamp panel -
14 CY001 Lane 1 conveyor unclamp panel -


Number
This I/Os cannot be displayed in I/O Monitor.

4.9.2 M6(S) module
5
14
8 13
16
5 1 15
10
11 12 8
2
3 4
7
2
NXTSEN011

Number
1 CX000 Lane 1 conveyor panel pass check L Lane 1 conveyor panel left
2 CX001 Lane 1 conveyor panel pass check R Lane 1 conveyor panel right
3 CX004 Lane 1 conveyor panel unclamp check Lane 1 panel unclamp
5 CX008 Lane 2 conveyor panel pass check L Lane 2 conveyor panel left
6 CX009 Lane 2 conveyor panel pass check R Lane 2 conveyor panel right
7 CX00C Lane 2 conveyor panel unclamp check Lane 2 panel unclamp
8 CX00D Lane 2 conveyor backup pin check Lane 2 backup pin detection

4.10 Single Conveyor Sensors

4.10.1 M3(S) module
13
14
9
10
2
4
3
2 NXTSEN015

Number
L
R
check
These I/Os cannot be displayed in I/O Monitor.

4.10.2 M6(S) module
14
13
1 9
10
2
3
4
2
NXTSEN014

Number
L
R
check

4.11 Single Conveyor S Sensor

4.11.1 For M6S modules only
1
3
5
1 4
2
NXTSEN042a

Number
1 CX000 Conveyor panel pass check 1 Conveyor panel pass check 1
2 CX001 Conveyor panel pass check 2 Conveyor panel pass check 2
3 CX005 Conveyor backup pin check Conveyor backup pin check
4 - - Conveyor panel pass check 1
amplifier
5 - - Conveyor panel pass check 2
amplifier

4.12 Tray Unit-L

4.12.1 Safety components
1
4 2
NXTMTU018

Number
1 IN00 Upper door closed check -
2 IN01 Rear door closed check -
3 IN02 Lower door closed check -
4 IN04 Emergency stop -
5 IN1E Supply complete -

4.12.2 Tray tower components

8
1 9
2
6
13
11
14
7
12
10
3
8
5
4
15
NXTMTU019a

Number
1 IN1D Pallet clamp close check -
2 IN1C Pallet clamp open check -
3 IN15 Lower pallet clamp close check 1-2 -
4 IN14 Lower pallet clamp open check 1-2 -
5 IN27 Tray discharge check -
6 IN28 Tray height check 1 -
7 IN29 Tray height check 2 -
8 IN2B Pallet storage check -
9 IN2C Upper pallet check -
10 IN2D Lower pallet check -
11 OUT20 Pallet clamp -
12 OUT21 Pallet unclamp -
13 OUT25 Lower pallet clamp open/closed -
14 OUT1D Upper removal area LED -
15 OUT1E Lower removal area LED -

4.12.3 Shuttle components
5
6
7
NXTMTU020a

Number
1 IN20 Shuttle reverse check -
2 IN21 Shuttle clamp open check -
3 IN22 Shuttle clamp close check -
4 OUT22 Shuttle pallet clamp open/closed -
5 IN18 TY-axis tray height check sensor 3 -
6 IN19 TY-axis tray height check sensor 2 -
7 IN2A TY-axis tray height check sensor 1 -

4.12.4 Reject parts conveyor
4 3
NXTMTU021

Number
1 IN11 NG parts full check (center) Reject parts full check (center)
2 IN12 NG parts full check (side) Reject parts full check (side)
3 IN13 NG parts C/V count Reject parts conveyor count
4 OUT18 NG C/V on Reject conveyor on

4.12.5 Remover components

1
2
3
5
6
NXTMTU105

Number
1 IN10 Empty tray pickup check -
2 IN23 Remover lifter raised check -
3 IN24 Remover lifter lowered check -
4 IN26 Remover presence check -
5 OUT23 Raise/lower remover lifter -
6 OUT27 Remover vacuum on -

4.13 Tray Unit-LT

Tray unit-LT
01MEC-0222a

Number
1 IN00 Emergency stop -
2 IN06 Upper door closed check -
3 IN07 Lower door closed check -
No. Machine Signal Name Sensor Name

Address
Number
4 X206 Upper magazine complete switch -
5 X209 Lower magazine complete switch -


9
Tray unit-LT
5
6
2 7
8 9
4
9
10
1
01MEC-0223

Number
1 IN1F Lower magazine lock -
2 IN1E Upper magazine lock -
3 IN1C Upper magazine set -
4 IN1D Lower magazine set -
5 IN22 Upper magazine tray heiht (L) -
6 IN23 Upper magazine tray heiht (R) -
7 IN24 Lower magazine tray heiht (L) -
8 IN25 Lower magazine tray heiht (R) -
9 IN21 Pallet position check -
10 IN20 Magazine interference check -

Tray unit-LT 4
5
1
8
7
6
01MEC-0224a

Number
1 OUT20 Shuttle pallet clamp -
2 IN10 Shuttle retracted check -
3 IN12 Shuttle unclamp check -
4 IN11 Shuttle clamp check -
5 IN2E NG parts box set check -
6 IN13 Shuttle tray height check (H) -
7 IN15 Shuttle tray height check (M) -
8 IN15 Shuttle tray height check (L) -

4
Tray unit-LT
01MEC-0225

Number
1 IN02 Jog mode -
2 IN04 NG parts full check (side) -
3 IN03 NG parts full check (center) -
4 IN05 NG parts C/V count -

4.13.5 Remover components
Tray unit-LT
2
3
4
5
01MEC-0226

Number
1 IN2B Empty tray pickup check -
2 IN29 Remover presence check -
3 OUT21 Remover lifter up/down -
4 IN27 Remover lifter lower end -
5 IN26 Remover lifter upper end -

4.14 Tray Unit-LTC

Tray unit-LTC
1 2
4
5
01MEC-0501
No. Address Signal Name

Number
1 IN00 Emergency stop
2 IN06 Upper door closed check
3 IN07 Lower door closed check
No. Machine Signal Name

Address
Number
4 X206 Upper magazine complete switch
5 X209 Lower magazine complete switch


Tray unit-LTC 7
9
10
7
6
1 8
01MEC-0502

Number
1 IN1F Lower magazine lock
2 IN1E Upper magazine lock
3 IN1C Upper magazine set
4 IN1D Lower magazine set
5 IN22 Upper magazine tray heiht
6 IN24 Lower magazine tray heiht
7 IN21 Pallet position check
8 IN20 Magazine interference check
9 Shuttle tray height monitoring (middle) amplifier
10 Shuttle tray height monitoring (lower) amplifier

4
Tray unit-LTC
1
5
6
01MEC-0503

Number
1 OUT20 Shuttle pallet clamp
2 IN10 Shuttle retracted check
3 IN12 Shuttle unclamp check
4 IN11 Shuttle clamp check
5 IN14 Shuttle tray height check (M)
6 IN13 Shuttle tray height check (L)

4
Tray unit-LTC
1
01MEC-0504

Number
1 IN02 Jog mode
2 IN04 NG parts full check (side)
3 IN03 NG parts full check (center)
4 IN05 NG parts C/V count

4.15 Tray Unit-M
14
4
8
13
11
6
10
7
12
NXTMTU067a


Number
1 IN02 Tray presence check -
2 IN03 Clutch ON check -
3 IN04 Clutch OFF check -
4 IN05 Door closed check -
5 IN06 Magazine closed check -
6 IN07 SUPPLY PARTS button input -
7 IN10 COMPLETE button input -
8 IN11 TZ-axis collision check -
9 IN12 Tray stopper ON check -
10 IN13 CHANGE PARTS button input -
11 IN14 Tray forward/back deceleration check -
12 IN15 Tray stopped forward check -
13 IN16 Tray back check -
14 - Unit clamp check -

MEMO:

QD008-27 5. Basic Operation
5. Basic Operation
5.1 Pulling Out/Returning a Module
Modules can be pulled forward to allow access to the items within the module. This is
required when changing head or nozzle stations. This also allows cleaning and lubrication
of the module to be performed easier.
Note: When performing paired production, the paired modules are attached together. Pull both
modules forward because they are attached together.
CAUTION
A module should never be pulled out with an tray unit-L/LT/LTC

attached to it. It is possible that machine damage may occur under
such circumstances. First, remove the tray unit-L/LT/LTC and then
pull the module forward.
When pulling forward or pushing in modules with a tray unit-M, tray

type feeders, or a reject parts conveyor set in the module, do so
slowly and carefully. Also, check the state of the parts after
completing the action. There is a danger that parts may shift or
jump out of their trays if the module is moved too quickly.
5.1.1 Pulling out a module

1. With the module not operating, push MANUAL to display the manual commands.
2. When the module and waste tape processing unit are the type that support the tray unit-
LT air blow exhaust, remove the plugs from the sockets in the front cover and remove
the air tubes.
Caution: Store the air tubes in the base so that they do not get caught between the module and the
base when the module is pulled forward.
Cover
Soket
Plug
01MEC-0849E

5. Basic Operation QD008-27
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the cleaning pictogram.
Cleaning
01MEC-0001E
4. Ensure that when the module moves forward that nothing will be struck or pinched by
the module. When safe to unclamp the module, push OK and the module is
automatically unclamped. When the module is unclamped it moves a short distance
forward.
Note: If the module is not unclamped, check the cause based on the error message that displays.
M3(S) modules will not be unclamped if the XS-axis for that module or the neighboring
modules are in an unsafe position (i.e., protuding into another module).
5. Grip the handle for the module and squeezee to release the module brake and gently
pull the module forward until the module hits the stopper.
Note: When performing paired production, pull both modules forward at the same time.
WARNING

safely at the same time. (Maximum: Four M3(S) modules on an 8M
base, or two M3(S) modules on a 4M base.)
If the maximum is exceeded, the entire machine may fall over to the
front, possibly resulting in serious physical harm.
CAUTION
Do not insert fingers or other body parts into the gap between the
machine side cover and base, because they could be injured when
the module is pulled out.

gently and slowly so it will not strike the stopper. It is possible that
the machine position may move if the module strikes the stopper.

5.1.2 Returning a module

1. Ensure that the XS-axis or any other items are not protuding from the module before
returning the module. If the axis is protuding, move the axis to a safe position before
returning the module.
2. For the M3(S) module, grip the handle for the module and squeezee to release the
module brake and gently push the module back.
WARNING

other body parts in between modules. If caught between modules,
fingers or other body parts could be cut or severed
CAUTION

gently and slowly so it will not strike the stopper.
3. Stop pushing when the module reaches the end of the possible movement and it cannot
be pushed back more. At this point, the machine will automatically clamp the module.
If no error occurs and the module is not automatically clamped, gently pull the module
forward a short distance and then push back into position.
LT air blow exhaust, connect the air tube plugs that stick out from waste tape duct to the
sockets in the front cover of the module.
Cover
Socket
Plug
Waste tape duct inside base

01MEC-0850E

5.2 Removing/Inserting a Module

A MCU (module change unit) is used to remove and insert modules.
5.2.1 Preparing to remove a module

Perform the following procedures before removing a module.
Removing the front base cover

Remove the front base cover from the front of the module.
Cover
NXTOPE219E
Note: If the front base cover is left attached to the module and the procedures to remove the
module are performed, the cover and MCU will hit each other and be damaged.
Removing bucket type feeder pallets

If using bucket type feeder pallets, remove the feeder pallet. Refer to section 5.4
"Removing/Loading a Feeder Pallet" for details.
Feeder pallet
(bucket type)
NXTOPE220E
Note: If the MCU already has a M3(S) on it and the MCU is to be attached to a base that has a
module in line with an already mounted module on the MCU, remove the bucket type feeder
pallet from the module on the base.

M3(S) module
M3 (S) Module to
be removed
Feeder pallet of remaining module

(in the example, bucket type).
In order to prevent interference,
remove the feeder pallet from the
remaining module before
MCU (module change unit) attaching the MCU.
NXTOPE221Ea
Removing a tray unit-L/LT

If a tray unit-L/LT is set in the module, then remove this unit. Refer to section 5.5 "Inserting/
Removing a Tray Unit-L", section 5.6 "Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-LT" for details.
Caution: Remove any tray unit-L/LT units from the modules next to the module being removed. The
MCU and tray unit-L/LT will interfere with each other.
Clearing pair module production mode

If pair module production is being performed, then clear this mode. Refer to the "NXT
System Reference" manual for details.

5.2.2 Removing a Module from the Machine

LT air blow exhaust, remove the plugs from the sockets in the front cover and remove
the air tubes.
Caution: Store the air tubes in the base so that they do not get caught between the module and the
base when the module is pulled forward.
Cover
Soket
Plug
01MEC-0849E
2. Attach the MCU (Module Changeover Unit) to the machine base.
a. Turn the handle on the MCU to align the height of the guides with the holes on the
machine base.
b. Ensure that the lock knob is set to "LOCK".
c. Gently slide the MCU guides forward into the holes on the base.
WARNING
When mounting the MCU, ensure that no one is between the MCU
and machine base. A person could be crushed to death if caught
between the MCU and base.
CAUTION
When handling the MCU, watch out for corners and protrusions.

Base
MCU (Module Changeover Unit)
Alignment hole
Guide
Lower Raise
Handle NXTOPE001Ea
3. Level the MCU if necessary.
a. Turn the handle as shown in the diagram below to lift the front casters off the floor.
Handle NXTOPE120E
b. Turn the handle to lower the lifter and secure the MCU as shown below. Adjust the
lifter height while watching the spirit level until the upper surface of the MCU is level.
Lifter Handle
NXTOPE002E

Spirit level
Lifter
Handle NXTOPE114Ea
4. Pull out the module halfway from the machine base.
a. Turn the MCU knob to "UNLOCK".
Knob
NXTOPE027E
b. With the module not operating, push MANUAL to display the manual commands.
c. Use the arrow keys to highlight the cleaning pictogram.
Cleaning
01MEC-0001E
d. Ensure that when the module moves forward that nothing will be struck or pinched
by the module. When safe to unclamp the module, push OK and the module is
forward.
modules are in an unsafe position (i.e., protruding into another module).

e. Grip the handle for the module and squeeze to release the module brake and gently
pull the module forward until the module hits the stopper. This position should match
up with the line on the MCU.
NXTOPE003
WARNING
Do not modify the module stopper mechanism on the base or

remove the module without mounting the MCU first, because the
module could fall from the base causing severe injury or death.
CAUTION

Note: If removing the neighboring M3(S) module at the sametime onto the MCU, repeat the steps
above.

5. Disconnect the air and power supply from the module.
a. Push and hold the POWER button on the module pulled forward to put it asleep.
b. Open the door at the bottom of the module.

Note: This door is aligned with the cut out section of the MCU when the module is stopped at the
correct position.
c. Disconnect all of the connectors for the air and electrical items and disconnect the
cable bear from the module.
d. There is a lever in the connector area. Pull this lever forward and down in order to
allow the module to move past the line on the MCU.
e. Close the module door. Ensure that cable bear is down and out of the way so it will
not interfere with any items when the module is pulled forward.
Note: M6(S) modules must have the steps above performed for both sides.
6. Pull the module fully onto the MCU.
a. Grip the handle for the module and squeeze to release the module brake and gently
pull the module until it is fully on the MCU.
Note: If removing the neighboring M3(S) module at the same time onto the MCU, repeat the steps
above.
M6(S)
M3(S)
NXTOPE005
CAUTION
Do not push on the shield plate guide in the module. The plate
shape may change if it is pushed on.
Shield plate guide
01MEC-0439E

b. Turn the knob to "LOCK" after removing the module in order to secure the module on
the MCU.
Knob
NXTOPE006Eb
c. From the base side, gently pull the cable bears so they are no longer in the MCU.
CAUTION
When working in front of the base, ensure that clothing or arms are
not caught on the guide pins on the top of the base to prevent the
risk of injury.
7. Lower the MCU wheels to the floor (when the MCU was leveled in step 3).
a. Turn the handle to raise the lifter and lower the rear casters to the floor.
Handle NXTOPE019Ea
b. Rotate the other handle to lower the front casters to the floor.
Handle NXTOPE020Ea

8. Dettach the MCU with module from the machine base.
a. Grip the MCU handles and squeeze the release lever to release the MCU from the
base.
Note: This operation cannot be done if the lever on the side of the MCU is still at UNLOCK.
WARNING
Do not rotate the module lock knob to UNLOCK when a module is

loaded on the MCU. If the module moves on the MCU, it could
pinch and sever fingers, and if it falls from the MCU it could cause
severe injury or death.
Release handle
NXTOPE007Eb
b. Gently pull the MCU away from the base.
CAUTION
Always be ready to apply the caster brake when handling the MCU.
Always use the caster brake when stopping an MCU loaded with a
module.

5.2.3 Inserting a module into the machine

If the module currently has a end side cover and the module is not going onto the end that
requires the cover, the cover should be removed before attempting these procedures. If
the module is to be mounted on the end of a base that requires a side cover, then the side
cover should be mounted before fully inserting the module into the machine.
1. Attach the MCU with module to the machine base.
a. Turn the handle on the MCU to align the height of the guides with the holes on the
machine base.
b. Gently slide the MCU guides forward into the holes on the base until the MCU locks
in the base.
WARNING
When mounting the MCU, ensure that no one is between the MCU
and machine base. A person could be crushed to death if caught
between the MCU and base.
CAUTION
When handing athe MCU, watch out for corners and protrusions.
2. Level the MCU if necessary.
a. Turn the handle to lift the front casters off the floor.
b. Turn the handle to lower the lifter and secure the MCU. Adjust the lifter height while
watching the spirit level until the upper surface of the MCU is level.
3. Push the module halfway onto the machine base.
a. From the base side, gently insert the cable bears between the module and the MCU
in the correct place and push the bear under the module until the end of the cable
bear is in the cut out section on the MCU.
b. Change the lever on the side of the MCU from LOCK to UNLOCK.
c. Grip the handle for the module and squeeze to release the module brake and gently
push the module toward the base until the line position marked on the MCU is
reached.
WARNING
• When pushing a module onto the base, check that no one is

behind the module, to prevent injuries.

WARNING
• When pulling out or pushing in a module, do not insert hands or

fingers or other body parts could be cut or severed.
d. Stop the module at the marked line position on the MCU (the module can be moved
past this position so be careful).
CAUTION
Do not push on the shield plate guide in the module. The plate
shape may change if it is pushed on.
Shield plate guide
01MEC-0439E

4. Connect the air and power supply to the machine.
a. Open the door at the bottom of the module.

Note: This door is aligned with the cut out section of the MCU when the module is stopped at the
correct position.
b. There is a lever in the connector area. Push this lever back and up in order to allow
the module to move back past the line on the MCU.
c. Connect the cable bear to the module and then connect all of the connectors for the
air and electrical items.
d. Close the module door. Ensure that cable bear and wires are safely positioned so
when the module is pushed back, there will be no interference.
M3(S) Module M6(S) Module

(1 cable bear) (2 cable bears)
Cable bear
Cable bear
Air hoses
Communication
cable (6-pin) Lock ring
Sensor cable Small

(50-pin) Power cable
(4-pin)
Medium Large
Knob
Cable bear bracket
NXTBAS070Eb

5. Push the module fully onto the machine base.
a. Push POWER on the operation panel to turn on the power for the module.
b. For the M3(S) module, ensure that the XS-axis or any other items are not protruding
from the module before returning the module. If the axis is protruding, move the axis
to a safe position before returning the module.
c. Grip the handle for the module and squeeze to release the module brake and gently
push the module toward the base.
WARNING


CAUTION

d. When the limit of the movement is reached, release the handle and the module will
be automatically locked into position.
6. Lower the MCU wheels to the floor (when the MCU was leveled in step 2).
a. Turn the handle to raise the lifter and lower the rear casters to the floor.
b. Rotate the other handle to lower the front casters to the floor.
7. Detach the MCU from the machine base.
a. Change the lever on the side of the MCU from UNLOCK to LOCK.
b. Grip the MCU handles and squeeze the brake to release the MCU from the base.
Note: This operation cannot be done if the lever on the side of the MCU is still at UNLOCK.
c. Gently pull the MCU away from the base.

LT air blow exhaust, connect the air tube plugs that stick out from waste tape duct to the
sockets in the front cover of the module.
Cover
Socket
Plug

01MEC-0850E

5.3 Removing/Attaching Side Covers

Modules that are mounted on the ends of the base need side safety covers. These covers
are actually mounted on the modules itself. This means that if the module is to be moved
to another position on the base, the cover must be removed before attempting to insert the
module back in the machine at the new position.
5.3.1 Removing
1. Pull out the module to disconnect the safety connect and allow access to the screws
near the bottom of the cover. (See section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module" for
details.)
2. Using a plus screwdriver, remove the three screws near the bottom of the cover.
Note: Do not remove the safety connector from the cover.
3. While holding the cover to ensure that it does not drop, remove the four allen bolts with
an allen wrench.
4. Remove the side cover from the module.
5.3.2 Attaching
1. Pull out the module to allow access to the screws that go next to the safety connector.
(See section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module" for details.)
2. Hold the side cover against the module and secure the cover with the four allen bolts
with an allen wrench.
3. Using a plus screwdriver, secure the bottom of the cover with the three screws.
4. Return the module, and ensure that the safety connector is properly connected.

5.4 Removing/Loading a Feeder Pallet

A PCU (pallet change unit) is used in order to perform the following procedures.
It is possible to change from a feeder pallet to another type of device.

Note: The instructions provided here are for an M6(S) module but the procedure for M3(S)
modules is the same.
5.4.1 Removing a feeder pallet

1. Ensure that the module is displaying the main screen on the operation panel.
2. Prepare the PCU by adjusting the height of the PCU to match that of the machine.
Rotate the handle on the PCU until the indicator on the PCU matches the conveyance
height of the machine.
<For standard feeder pallets> <For bucket type feeder pallets>
Handle
Handle
Match the panel conveyance

height.
NXTOPE013Ef
3. Gently move the PCU forward so the PCU guides are inserted into the holes on the NXT
base. The guides are automatically locked into position.
Slide
NXT base
Guide
Alignment hole
NXTOPE190Ea
Note: Due to conditions such as the flooring, there are cases in which the guides do not align with
the alignment holes in the base. Before pushing the PCU into the base, ensure that the
guides height match that of the base alignment holes and if needed, rotate the handle to
adjust the height until they match.

4. Squeeze the slide lock release lever and move the PCU body forward toward the NXT
base.
Note: The lock is only released when the slide lock release lever is squeezed.
Slide lock
release lever
NXTOPE191E
5. Push MANUAL to display the manual commands.
6. Use the arrow keys to select the unit exchange pictogram and then push OK.
7. Select the pallet exchange pictogram and then push OK.
Pallet exchange
01SYS-0151E
8. Push OK to unclamp the feeder pallet.
01SYS-0152

9. Raise the pallet lock release lever and then gently pull the feeder pallet onto the PCU.
Feeder pallet
Pallet lock
release lever
NXTOPE192E
Note: When the feeder pallet is fully pulled onto the PCU, it is automatically locked.
10.Squeeze the slide lock release lever and gently pull the PCU body with the feeder pallet
away from the NXT.
Slide lock
release lever
NXTOPE193E

11.Squeeze the guide lock release lever and gently pull the PCU away from the NXT.
Guide lock release lever

NXTOPE194E
12.After the feeder pallet has been removed, guidance to attach the feeder pallet is
displayed.

5.4.2 Loading a feeder pallet

1. Ensure that the operation panel is displaying the main screen.
2. Prepare the PCU with the feeder pallet by adjusting the height of the PCU to match that
of the machine. Rotate the handle on the PCU until the indicator on the PCU matches
the conveyance height of the machine.
PCU
Match the panel conveyance

Handle height.
NXTOPE016Eb
3. Gently move the PCU forward so the PCU guides are inserted into the holes on the NXT
base. The guides are automatically locked into position.
Slide
NXT base
Guide
Alignment hole
NXTOPE190Ea
Note: Due to conditions such as the flooring, there are cases in which the guides do not align with
the alignment holes in the base. Before pushing the PCU into the base, ensure that the
guides height match that of the base alignment holes and if needed, rotate the handle to
adjust the height until they match.

4. Squeeze the slide lock release lever and gently move the PCU body with the feeder
pallet forward into the NXT.
Note: The lock is only released when the slide lock release lever is squeezed.
Slide lock
release lever
NXTOPE0195E
5. Raise the pallet lock release lever and then gently push the feeder pallet fully onto the
feeder pallet base.
Pallet lock
release lever
NXTOPE0196E
Note: When the feeder pallet is fully pushed into the module, it is automatically locked.

6. Squeeze the slide lock release lever and gently pull the PCU body away from the NXT.
Slide lock
release lever
NXTOPE197E
7. Squeeze the guide lock release lever and gently pull the PCU away from the NXT.
NXTOPE198E
8. Push MANUAL and the main screen is displayed on the operation panel.

5.5 Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-L
CAUTION
• Do not move the tray unit-L or attach/remove it from a module

when tray parts are set in the drawers inside the unit. It is possible
that the parts will shift or be jarred from their tray cavities.
• Be gentle when attaching or removing the tray unit-L so as to not
shock the mechanical components. It is possible that machine
damage may occur under such circumstances.
5.5.1 Preparation
Before inserting the tray unit-L into a module, ensure that the waste tape duct, waste tape
box, and reject parts box are not present and the parts camera is located in the side camera
position. The nozzle station also should be replaced with the one for the tray unit-L.
1. Take out the waste tape box.
Waste tape box
NXTMTU007E
2. Remove the feeder pallet. Refer to section 5.4 "Removing/Loading a Feeder Pallet" for
details.

NXTOPE194E

3. Pull out the module. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module" for details.)
4. Remove the cover for the feeder setting area.
Cover
NXTMTU050E
5. Remove the screws securing the waste tape duct and remove the duct.
Duct
Screw
NXTMTU002E
6. Remove the reject parts box from the module.
7. Shift the position of the parts camera to the right side in the module. (Refer to section
8.1 "Replacing the Parts Camera" for details.)

8. Replace the nozzle station to the one for tray unit-L.
Reject parts box
Nozzle station for tray unit L
Parts camera
NXTMTU003Eb
9. Return the module in the base. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module"
for details.)
NXTMTU004

5.5.2 Inserting a tray unit-L into the module

1. Position the tray unit in front of the machine.
2. Use the handle to adjust the height of the tray unit until the rollers on the unit are
approximately the same height as the grooves on the part supply base.
Tray unit rollers Part supply base groove

Handle NXTMTU014E
3. Gently push the tray unit fully into the machine. Once the tray unit is fully inserted into
the module, it is automatically clamped by the module.
WARNING
When pushing the tray unit into the machine, ensure that no one is
between the tray unit and machine base. A person could be
seriously injured or crushed to death if caught between the tray
unit and machine.
CAUTION
For tray unit-L units with a tray remover, hook the removal
prevention chain in the base alignment hole and then push the tray
unit-L fully into the machine. If the chain is left unhooked, then the
chain may become jammed between the tray unit and the base and
thus preventing the unit from fitting properly or being clamped.
NXTMTU006a

5.5.3 Removing a tray unit-L from the module

3. Use the arrow keys to select the unit exchange pictogram and push OK. The screen
changes to display the exchange options.
Unit exchange 01SYS-0080E
4. Ensure that the pallet exchange pictogram is already selected and push OK to unclamp
the tray unit-L.
Pallet exchange
01SYS-0151E
5. For tray unit-L units with a tray remover, unhook the removal prevention chain from the
alignment hole in the base.
6. Release the caster brakes and gently pull the tray unit-L away from the machine.
NXTMTU035
7. Lock the casters to prevent the tray unit-L from moving accidentally.

5.5.4 Preparation for loading a feeder pallet

If inserting a feeder pallet after removing the tray unit-L, follow the steps below.
2. Change the position of the parts camera as necessary. (Refer to section 8.1 "Replacing
the Parts Camera" for details.)
Note: If the parts camera position is changed, the machine automatically performs auto-
calibration measurements. (Set nozzle jig(s) in the nozzle station because the machine
requires them for auto-calibration.)
3. Set the reject parts box in the position next to the parts camera.
4. Set the waste tape duct in position and secure it with bolts.
Duct
Screw
NXTMTU002E
5. Attach the cover for the feeder setting area.
Cover
NXTMTU050E
6. Push the module back into its original position and it will be clamped. From this point,
the feeder pallet can be loaded in the module.

5.6 Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-LT
CAUTION
• Do not move the tray unit-LT or attach/remove it from a module

• Be gentle when attaching or removing the tray unit-LT so as to not
5.6.1 Preparation
nstalling the main switch ON/OFF unit
With a tray unit-LT attached to the main switch side of a 4M base, the main switch cannot
be reached to be turned ON or OFF. For this reason, the main switch ON/OFF unit must be
attached.
Caution: The main switch ON/OFF unit covers the positioning holes for the PCU and MCU. Remove
the unit before exchanging feeder pallets or modules.
Waste tape box
NXTMTU007E
details.

NXTOPE194E

3. Remove the cover from the underside of the main switch on the base.
Main switch
Cover
01MEC-0565E
4. Using the same holes as the cover, attach the main switch on/off unit with the new
screws and washers attached.
Main switch
the main switch

ON/OFF unit
01MEC-0557E
5. Turn on and off the main switch on/off unit to confirm that the main switch on the base
turns on and off.
OFF
ON
01MEC-0558

Preparing the module

Before inserting the tray unit-LT into a module, ensure that the waste tape duct and reject
parts box are not present and the parts camera is located in the side camera position. The
nozzle station also should be replaced with the one for the tray unit-LT.
Cover
NXTMTU050E
3. Remove the screws securing the upper waste tape duct and then remove it.
Duct
Screw
NXTMTU002E
4. Remove the waste tape processing unit. (Refer to section 8.4 "Replacing the Waste
Tape Processing Unit" for details.)
5. Remove the screws securing the lower waste tape duct and then remove it.
Duct Screw
01MEC-0562E

6. Attach the lower waste tape duct for use with the tray unit-LT.
Duct
Screw
01MEC-0563E
7. Attach the waste tape processing unit. (Refer to section 8.4 "Replacing the Waste Tape
Processing Unit" for details.)
8. Attach the upper waste tape duct for use with the tray unit-LT.
Duct
Screw
01MEC-0561E
9. Remove the reject parts box from the module.
10.Shift the position of the parts camera to the right side in the module. (Refer to section

11.Replace the nozzle station to the one for tray unit-LT.
Reject parts box
Nozzle station
for tray unit-LT
Parts camera
01MEC-0154E
12.Return the module in the base. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module"
for details.)
NXTMTU004
13.Attach the waste tape duct for use with the tray unit-LT in the base, and insert the waste
tape box into the base.
Note: There is a sensor in the waste tape box area that detects the presence of the waste tape
box. If the waste tape box is not fully inserted back into position, the waste tape processing
unit does not operate.
Waste tape duct (base)
Waste tape box
01MEC-0779E

Preparation when the module and waste tape processing unit support
the air blow exhaust type
1. Complete steps 1 to 12 from the previous section.
2. Remove the four screws and remove the module front cover.
Cover
01MEC-0847E
3. There are two valves inside the cover. Turn the handles of the valves to adjust them to
the appropriate position. Turn the valves so they are in the same position and then
attach the cover.
When using a tray unit-LT When not using a tray unit-LT 01MEC-0846E
4. Set the waste tape duct inside the base.

(fixed base part)
Waste tape duct

inside base
01MEC-0844E

5. Connect the air tube plugs that stick out from waste tape duct to the sockets in the front
cover of the module.
Cover
Socket
Plug
Waste tape duct

inside base 01MEC-0848E
6. Insert the waste tape box into the base. Attach the external waste tape box after
attaching the tray unit-LT.
Waste tape box
External waste tape box
01MEC-0845E

5.6.2 Inserting a tray unit-LT into the module

1. Position the tray unit-LT in front of the machine.
2. Use the handle to adjust the height of the tray unit-LT until the rollers on the unit are
Handle

01MEC-0152E
3. Gently push the tray unit-LT fully into the machine. Once the tray unit-LT is fully inserted
into the module, it is automatically clamped by the module.
WARNING
When pushing the tray unit-LT into the machine, ensure that no one
is between the tray unit-LT and machine base. A person could be
seriously injured or crushed to death if caught between the ttray
unit-LT and machine.
01MEC-0575
LT air blow exhaust, attach the external waste tape box.

5.6.3 Removing a tray unit-LT from the module

the tray unit-LT.
Pallet exchange
01SYS-0151E
5. Release the caster brakes and gently pull the tray unit-LT away from the machine.
01MEC-0576
6. Lock the casters to prevent the tray unit-LT from moving accidentally.


If inserting a feeder pallet after removing the tray unit-LT, follow the steps below.
4. Remove the screws securing the upper waste tape duct for use with the tray unit-LT and
then remove it.
Duct
Screw
01MEC-0561E
6. Remove the screws securing the lower waste tape duct for use with the tray unit-LT and
then remove it.
Duct
Screw
01MEC-0563E

7. Attach the lower waste tape duct.
Duct Screw
01MEC-0562E
9. Attach the upper waste tape duct.
Duct
Screw
NXTMTU002E
10.Attach the cover for the feeder setting area.
Cover
NXTMTU050E
11.Push the module back into its original position and it will be clamped. From this point,
12.Remove the waste tape duct and insert the waste tape box.

5.7 Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-LTC
CAUTION
• Do not move the tray unit-LTC or attach/remove it from a module

• Be gentle when attaching or removing the tray unit-LTC so as to
not shock the mechanical components. It is possible that machine
5.7.1 Preparation
Before inserting the tray unit-LTC into a module, ensure that the waste tape duct, waste
tape box, and reject parts box are not present and the parts camera is located in the side
camera position. The nozzle station also should be replaced with the one for the tray unit-
LTC.
Waste tape box
NXTMTU007E
details.

NXTOPE194E

Cover
NXTMTU050E
5. Remove the screws securing the upper waste tape duct and then remove it.
Duct
Screw
NXTMTU002E
7. Remove the screws securing the lower waste tape duct and then remove it.
Duct Screw
01MEC-0562E

8. Attach the lower waste tape duct for use with the tray unit-LTC.
Duct
Screw
01MEC-0881E
10.Attach the upper waste tape duct for use with the tray unit-LTC.
Duct
Screw
01MEC-0882E
11.Remove the parts reject box from its stand.
12.Shift the position of the parts camera to the right side in the module. (Refer to section
13.Replace the nozzle station to a tray unit-LTC type.
Stand
Reject parts box
Nozzle station for tray unit LTC
Parts camera
01MEC-0884E

14.Attach the tray unit-LTC cover to the left of the parts camera.
15.Attach the reject parts box stand onto the cover and then set the box onto the stand.
Stand
Cover
Reject parts box
01MEC-0885E
16.Return the module in the base. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module"
for details.)
17.Attach the waste tape duct into the base.

Note: A sensor is installed at the area where the waste tape box is attached to the base. The
waste tape processing unit will not operate if the tray unit-LTC is not attached to the module
and the waste tape box is not set in position.

(fixed base part)
01MEC-0883E

5.7.2 Inserting a tray unit-LTC into the module

1. Position the tray unit-LTC in front of the machine.
2. Use the handle to adjust the height of the tray unit-LTC until the rollers on the unit are
Handle

01MEC-0505E
3. Gently push the tray unit-LTC fully into the machine. Once the tray unit-LTC is fully
inserted into the module, it is automatically clamped by the module.
WARNING
When pushing the tray unit-LTC into the machine, ensure that no
one is between the tray unit-LTC and machine base. A person
could be seriously injured or crushed to death if caught between
the ttray unit-LTC and machine.
01MEC-0575

5.7.3 Removing a tray unit-LTC from the module

the tray unit-LTC.
Pallet exchange
01SYS-0151E
5. Release the caster brakes and gently pull the tray unit-LTC away from the machine.
01MEC-0507
6. Lock the casters to prevent the tray unit-LTC from moving accidentally.


If inserting a feeder pallet after removing the tray unit-LTC, follow the steps below.
4. Remove the screws securing the upper waste tape duct for use with the tray unit-LTC
and then remove it.
Duct
Screw
01MEC-0882E
6. Remove the screws securing the lower waste tape duct for use with the tray unit-LTC
and then remove it.
Duct
Screw
01MEC-0881E

7. Attach the lower waste tape duct.
Duct Screw
01MEC-0562E
9. Attach the upper waste tape duct.
Duct
Screw
NXTMTU002E
10.Attach the cover for the feeder setting area.
Cover
NXTMTU050E
11.Push the module back into its original position and it will be clamped. From this point,
12.Remove the waste tape duct and insert the waste tape box.

5.8 Removing/Attaching a Placing Head

5.8.1 Important points when removing and attaching heads
Take account of the following points when removing or attaching heads.
WARNING
Only remove and attach heads using the head exchange command,
or after turning off the main switch on the machine. Also, do not
contact the head with the linear motor. The head becomes
unusable if these instructions are not followed.
a. When removing or attaching heads, do so only following the procedures in this

manual. When the head is removed or attached under the following conditions, if the
power to the machine is on during the procedure, a 3A1F error will occur.
Caution: If this error occurs, this head can no longer be used. In this case, contact your Fuji
representative.
• CYCLE STOP was pushed to stop operation.
• The head was moved using the head positioning command.
• EMERGENCY STOP was pushed to cut the 200V power.
• The side door was opened.
b. Because the Y-axis motors in M6S modules generate a strong magnetic field, be
sure to prevent heads from being pulled to the motor.
Caution: If the head contacts the shaft, stop using the head and contact your Fuji representative.
Linear motor coil section
Linear motor shaft
Linear scale
M6S module NXTBAS267Eb

5.8.2 Removing a placing head

Placing heads can be easily removed from the machine. This makes it easier to perform
maintenance on the head and to change the head type when required.
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the unit exchange pictogram and push OK.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the head exchange pictogram.
Head exchange
01MEC-0002E
4. Push START and the head moves to the removal position and power to the head is
turned off.
Note: If a tray unit-L/LT is attached to the module, the guidance screen changes to display
guidance for removing the tray unit-L/LT at this point. Follow the directions provided to
remove the tray unit-L/LT and then continue on to the next step.
forward.

pull the module forward until the module hits the stopper..
WARNING

CAUTION


7. If the head is not in a good position, manually move the head by pulling the XY-slide until
the head is in a good position for removal. Do not move the head by pushing or pulling
the head or handle on the head.
8. Disconnect the connectors from the head.
Connectors
NXTPHD002Eb

9. Raise the lever and push to the left. Holding the handle, gently remove the head as
shown in the illustration below.
Lever
Placing head
NXTPHD003b
Note: Set the removed head in the optional head maintenance stand in order to prevent damage
when working on the head.
CAUTION
The head or shaft could be damaged by the magnetic field
generated by the linear motor in the Y-axis. Keep the head away
from the shaft of the Y-axis when using the M6S module. Also, the
head should always be in the exchange position (away from the
linear motor) when attaching or removing the head.
Do not hit the linear scale of a M6S module when exchanging the
head and performing maintenance. If the linear scale is damaged
then errors will occur and production may not be possible. In this
case it will be necessary to replace the linear scale.
Linear motor shaft
Linear scale

5.8.3 Attaching a placing head

2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the exchange pictogram.
3. Push OK and the selection screen is displayed.
4. With the head exchange pictogram selected, push START. The head is moved to the
removal location and the power to it is cut. When this is completed, the screen
automatically changes.
Note: If a tray unit-L is attached to the module, the guidance screen changes to display guidance
for removing the tray unit-L at this point. Follow the directions provided to remove the tray
unit-L and then continue on to the next step.
the module. When safe to unclamp the module, push OK and the module is unclamped.
When the module is unclamped it moves a short distance forward.
CAUTION
the module is pulled out or unclamped.
CAUTION



7. Ensure that there is no objects or dust on the attaching surfaces of the placing head and
the holder. Use a dry cloth to remove any foreign objects.
Placing head Head holder
01MEC-0158Ea
8. While holding the head handle, insert the clamp joints into the grooves on the head
holder, and while holding the lever down to the left, push the head into position and
release the lever.
Lever
Placing head
Press the head down firmly

against the head holder.
Head
Head
holder
01MEC-0186E

CAUTION
The head or shaft could be damaged by the magnetic field

generated by the linear motor in the Y-axis. Keep the head away
from the shaft of the Y-axis when using the M6S module. Also, the
head should always be in the exchange position (away from the
linear motor) when attaching or removing the head.
Linear motor shaft
Linear scale
9. Connect the connectors.
Connectors
NXTPHD005Eb

Note:
1. If a placing head with a different serial number from the previous head is attached, set
nozzle jigs in the nozzle station. Refer to section 5.8.4 "Setting nozzle jigs" for more
details.
2. If the handle for the head is a strap-type, ensure that the strap is flat against the head.
Interference or damage to the machine will occur if the strap is not flat against the head
when the head is attached.
Strap-type
handle
01SYS-0187E
10.Ensure that the XS-axis or any other items are not protuding from the module before
11.Grip the handle for the module and squeezee to release the module brake and gently
push the module back.
WARNIG

CAUTION


12.Stop pushing when the module reaches the end of the possible movement and it cannot
be pushed back more. At this point, the machine will automatically clamp the module.
If no error occurs and the module is not automatically clamped, gently pull the module

5.8.4 Setting nozzle jigs

Prepare a nozzle station that is compatible with the placing head to be attached. Set the
same number of nozzle jigs in the nozzle station as there are holders on the head. Follow
the procedures below to set the nozzle jigs in the nozzle station.
1. Remove the nozzle station from the module.
2. Slide the plate on the prepared nozzle station and insert the same number of nozzle jigs
as there are holders on the head into the nozzle station. The actual position for the
nozzle jigs is not important as long as the quantity is correct.
Socket Nozzle jig
Plate
For H08/H12(S) For H04 heads For H01/H02 heads

/H12HS heads
Nozzle jig ID J01 J02 J03

NXTNZC023Ee
CAUTION
When setting nozzles in the nozzle station, align the cutout on the
nozzle with the alignment pin in the nozzle station and make sure
that the pin goes into the cutout. If they are not aligned, nozzle
exchange errors occur.
Socket
Pin
Cutout
NXTNZC024E

3. Move the lever on the left side of the nozzle changer towards the front of the module and
then insert the rear part of the nozzle station first and then push down on the front end
of the station.
Nozzle station
(1)
Lever (3)
(2)
NXTNZC003Eb
CAUTION
Be careful to not put your hands underneath the nozzle station

when setting it in the machine.
4. Return the lever back to its original position.
5. Confirm that the nozzle station is fully seated on the nozzle changer.

5.9 Removing/Attaching a Nozzle Station

Nozzle stations are easy to remove and switch between the different types. If a different
type of placing head is attached to a module, the old nozzle station must be replaced with
a nozzle station that is compatible with the new head type
5.9.1 Removing
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the unit exchange pictogram and then push OK.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the nozzle exchange command.
Nozzle exchange
01MEC-0003E
4. Push START and nozzles on the head are automatically ejected to the nozzle station.
Note: If a tray unit-L/LT is attached to the module, the guidance screen changes to display
guidance for removing the tray unit-L/LT at this point. Follow the directions provided to
remove the tray unit-L/LT and then continue on to the next step.

forward.
CAUTION
The module moves forward several centimeters when the OK

button is pushed. Be careful of this so to avoid personal injury and
mechanical damage.
WARNING

CAUTION



7. Move the red lever on the left side of the nozzle station towards the front of the module
and pull upwards on the front half of the station to remove it.
Nozzle station
(2)
(1)
Lever
NXTNZC002Eb

5.9.2 Attaching
1. With the module pulled out, move the red lever on the left side of the nozzle station
towards the front of the module and insert the rear part of the station first and then push
down on the front end of the station.
Nozzle station
(1)
Lever (3)
(2)
NXTNZC003Eb
CAUTION
Be careful to not put your hands underneath the nozzle station

when setting it in the machine.
2. Return the lever back to its original position.
3. Confirm that the nozzle station is fully seated on the nozzle changer base.
6. Stop pushing when the module reaches the end of the possible movement and it cannot
be push back more. At this point, the machine will automatically clamp the module. If
no error occurs and the module is not automatically clamped, gently pull the module

5.10 Exchanging Backup Plates

Backup plates or frames can be exchanged manually when needed. There are four
methods for exchanging these items.
• Exchanging both lanes at the same time
• Bringing lane 2 forward and exchanging one lane at a time
• Changing from single lane production to dual lane production
• Changing from dual lane production to single lane production
In addition, the procedures when a tray unit-L/LT is attached are different.
For M6S modules, wait until the shaft for the linear motor cools to room temperature and
then set the protective covers on the shaft.
Linear motor coil

Linear motor shaft
Linear scale
M6S module
Protective covers
NXTBAS275Eb
WARNING
• Contact with the shaft or coil section of the Y-axis linear motor in a
M6S module could cause burns. Do not contact the shaft or coil
section immediately after production is stopped.

M6S modules. People with a heart pacemaker should stay clear of
the shaft and coil sections of the linear motor (maintain a distance
of 400 mm or more). Pacemakers may malfunction because of the
magnetic field.
CAUTION
• Do not push or pull on the head body or use the handle on the
head to move the XY robot position.
• Do not push on the X-axis gear cover. Otherwise the gear cover
may be deformed.

CAUTION
• Be careful of the magnetic attraction when using metal items near
the linear motor of a M6S module.
• Damage to items may occur due to the magnetic field generated

by a linear motor. Keep magnetic cards, wristwatches and other
precision machines away from the linear motor of a M6S module
(do not bring within 55 mm).
• Do not hit the linear scale of a M6S module when exchanging the
5.10.1 Procedure (when no tray unit-L/LT is attached)

Exchanging both lanes at the same time
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the unit exchange pictogram, and push OK.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the backup plate exchange command, and push OK.
Backup plate exchange 01SYS-0081E

4. Push START and the conveyor is prepared and the head moves to the rear of the
module. The operation panel then displays the guidance for pulling forward the module.
NXTBAS178
5. Push OK and the module is automatically unclamped. When the module is unclamped
it moves a short distance forward.
CAUTION
When OK is pushed the module moves forward several

centimeters. Be cautious to ensure that it does not strike any body
parts or foreign items.
WARNING

CAUTION

7. The operation panel changes to display the guidance for removing the backup plates.
With the module pulled forward, remove the items securing the backup plate for lane 1
and lane 2 and then remove the backup plates for both lanes.
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS152E
8. Mount and secure the new backup plates for both lanes and then push OK.
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS205E

WARNING

other body parts in between the modules. If caught between
modules, fingers or other body parts could be cut or severed.

Bringing lane 2 forward and exchanging one lane at a time

This is used when the backup plate for lane 2 cannot be reached easily. This will bring
forward lane 2 and allow the backup plate to be exchanged and then the new backup plate
for lane 1 can be set.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the lane 2 backup plate exchange command, and push
OK.
Lane 2 backup plate exchange 01SYS-0082E
NXTBAS178
forward.
CAUTION


WARNING

CAUTION
7. The operation panel changes to display the guidance for removing the backup plate for
lane 1. With the module pulled forward, remove the items securing the backup plate for
lane 1 and then remove the backup plate for lane 1.
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS149E
Note: Do not perform the following command with the backup plate for lane 1 still mounted.

8. Push OK and then START and lane 2 is moved closer to the front of the module.
NXTBAS150
lane 2. Remove the items securing the backup plate for lane 2 and remove the backup
plate for lane 2.
NXTBAS151
10.Mount and secure the new backup plate for lane 2, then push OK.
NXTBAS204

11.Use the arrow keys to select the backup plate exchange command, and push OK.
12.Ensure that it is safe for the rails to move and that no one is near them. When it is safe,
push START and lane 2 is moved back to the rear of the module.
NXTBAS206
13.Mount and secure the new backup plate for lane 1 and then push OK.
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS176

WARNING


Changing from single lane production to dual lane production

NXTBAS209
forward.
CAUTION


WARNING

CAUTION
7. The operation panel changes to display the guidance for removing the backup plate.
and then remove the backup plate.
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS210
8. When the backup plate removal is completed, push OK.

WARNING

12.Push MANUAL to leave manual mode.
13.Use Accessory Software to specify the new maximum panel width.
a. Start Accessory Software at a computer.
b. Select the name of the machine to change the maximum panel width for in [Floor
Monitor]. The machine accessories log on page is displayed.
c. Select a user ID from the drop-down list.
d. Enter the password for the user and click [Log on]. If the password is correct, the
machine accessories page is displayed.
e. Click [Machine Configuration] from the [Menu]. The machine configuration settings
page is displayed.
f. Select [Loader setting] from the drop-down menu and the loader settings are
displayed.
g. Specify the new maximum width for the panels in the [Max Panel Width] setting.
h. Click [Send to Machine].
i. Once the new changes have been sent to the machine, click [Close].
j. When these changes are sent to the machine, the existing job is deleted. Due to this,
an error displays that the machine, push READY ON to clear the error.
14.Transmit the job for dual lane production to the machine from Fuji Flexa. Refer to the
NXT Programming Manual for details on transmitting jobs.
15.Push MANUAL to display the manual commands.
16.Use the arrow keys to highlight the unit exchange pictogram and then push OK.

17.Use the arrow keys to highlight the lane 2 backup plate exchange command, and push
OK.
18.Push START and the conveyor is prepared and the head moves to the rear of the
NXTBAS207
19.Ensure that when the module moves forward that nothing will be struck or pinched by
forward.
CAUTION


WARNING

CAUTION
push OK and then START and lane 2 is moved closer to the front of the module.
NXTBAS211
22.Mount and secure the backup plate for lane 2, then push OK.
NXTBAS204

23.Use the arrow keys to select the backup plate exchange command, and push OK.
NXTBAS206
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS176

WARNING

30.Push START. Guidance for pulling forward the module displays.
forward.
CAUTION

WARNING


CAUTION
33.Guidance for exchanging the backup plates is displayed. Push OK because the backup
plate exchange has already been performed.
WARNING

37.Push START and the conveyors change to the correct width for the job.

Changing from dual lane production to single lane production

2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the unit exchange command, and push OK.
OK.
NXTBAS
forward.
CAUTION


WARNING

CAUTION
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS149E
Note: Do not perform the following command with the backup plate for lane 1 still mounted.

8. Push OK then START and lane 2 is moved closer to the front of the module.
NXTBAS150
plate for lane 2.
NXTBAS151
10.Push OK.
WARNING


page is displayed.
displayed.
g. Specify the new maximum width for the panel in the [Max Panel Width] setting.
16.Transmit the job for single lane production to the machine from Fuji Flexa. Refer to the
17.Push START. The conveyor is changed to the maximum width and the guidance for
pulling forward the module displays.
NXTBAS207

forward.
CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION
20.Guidance for exchanging the backup plates is displayed. Attach the new backup plate
for lane 1. Push OK.
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS208

Caution: Depending on the panel size (conveyor width), the adjustable rail may not completely clamp
on the M3/M6 single or M6 double conveyors. Remove any backup plates on the rear side
of the adjustable rail.
Backup plates
M3/M6 single Remove plates Less than 200 mm

conveyor
Adjustable rail
01MEC-0026E
M6 double
Remove plates
conveyor Less than 100 mm
(optional 360
mm plate)
Adjustable rail
01MEC-0024E
21.Ensure that the XS-axis is not protuding from the module before returning the module.
If the axis is protuding, move the axis to a safe position before returning the module.
WARNING

24.Push START and the conveyor changes to the correct width for the job.

5.10.2 Procedure (when a tray unit-L/LT is present)

It is necessary to remove the tray unit-L/LT when removing modules. Furthermore, it is not
possible to change the conveyor width if the tray unit (feeder pallet) is not connected. All
operation procedures should be performed with the module clamped and no panels in the
machine.
Exchanging both lanes at the same time

module. The operation panel then displays the guidance for removing the tray unit-L/LT.
NXTBAS178
5. Push OK and the tray unit-L/LT is unclamped.

6. Gently pull the tray unit-L/LT from the module and move to a safe location and then lock
the caster brakes. The operation panel then displays the guidance for pulling forward
the module.
NXTMTU035
forward.
CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION

9. The operation panel changes to display the guidance for removing the backup plates.
and lane 2 and then remove the backup plates for both lanes.
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS152E
10.Mount and secure the new backup plates for both lanes and then push OK.
11.Ensure that no items are protuding from the module before returning the module. If the
axis is protuding, move the axis to a safe position before returning the module.
WARNING


14.Release the tray unit-L/LT caster brakes and gently reinsert the unit back in the module.
When the unit is fully inserted, the tray unit-L/LT is automatically clamped.
NXTMTU006a

Bringing lane 2 forward and exchanging one lane at a time

This is used when the backup plate for lane 2 cannot be reached easily. This will bring
forward lane 2 and allow the backup plate to be exchanged and then the new backup plate
for lane 1 can be set.
OK.
NXTBAS178

the module.
NXTMTU035
forward.
CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION

Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS149E
10.When the lane 1 backup plate has been removed, push OK .
11.Push CANCEL to cancel the command and then use the arrow keys to select the device
exchange pictogram.
12.Release the tray unit-L/LT caster brakes and gently insert into the pulled forward module
until the tray unit is clamped.
13.Use the arrow keys to highlight the lane 2 backup plate exchange command again.
Push OK.
push START and lane widths are adjusted to the maximum width and guidance for
removing the backup plate for lane 1 is displayed.

15.First ensure that the backup plate has actually been removed and that it is safe for the
rails to move and that no one is near them. When it is safe and there is no backup plate
for lane 1, push START and lane 2 is moved closer to the front of the module.
NXTBAS150
16.The operation panel changes to display the guidance for removing the backup plate for
plate for lane 2.
NXTBAS151
17.Mount and secure the new backup plate for lane 2.
NXTBAS204
18.Push OK.

19.With the module pulled forward, use the arrow keys to select the backup plate exchange
command, and push OK.
NXTBAS206
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS176

WARNING

NXTMTU006a

Changing from single lane production to dual lane production

3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the backup plate exchange command and then push OK.
NXTBAS209
the module.
NXTMTU035

forward.
CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION
9. The operation panel changes to display the guidance for removing the backup plate.
and then remove the backup plate.
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS210

10.When the backup plate removal is completed, push OK.
WARNING

NXTMTU006a
page is displayed.
displayed.
g. Specify the new maximum width for the panels in the [Max Panel Width] setting.

17.Transmit the job for dual lane production to the machine from Fuji Flexa. Refer to the
19.Use the arrow keys to highlight the unit exchange pictogram and then push OK.
OK.
NXTBAS207
22.Push OK and the tray unit-L/LT is unclamped.

23.Gently pull the tray unit-L/LT from the module and move to a safe location and then lock
the module.
NXTMTU035
forward.
CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION
26.The operation panel changes to display the guidance for removing the backup plate.
Ensure that the backup plate is not present and push OK.

27.Push CANCEL to cancel the next action.
WARNING

NXTMTU006a
OK.

33.Push START and the lane 2 on the conveyor is moved forward and the head moves to
the rear of the module. The operation panel then displays the guidance for removing
the tray unit-L/LT.
NXTBAS211
the module.
NXTMTU035
forward.
CAUTION


WARNING

CAUTION
38.Mount and secure the backup plate for lane 2.
NXTBAS204
39.Push OK.
WARNING


NXTMTU006a
45.Push START. The conveyor width is adjusted and guidance for removing the tray unit-
L/LT displays.
NXTBAS206

the module.
NXTMTU035
forward.
CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION

50.Mount and secure the backup plate for lane 1.
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS176
51.Push OK.
WARNING

NXTMTU006a

56.Push OK to leave manual mode.
57.Push START and the conveyors change to the correct width for the job.
Changing from dual lane production to single lane production

3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the lane 2 backup plate exchange command and then
push OK.
NXTBAS178

the module.
NXTMTU035
forward.
CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION

Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS149E
10.Push OK.
WARNING


NXTMTU006a
16.Use the arrow keys to highlight the lane 2 backup plate exchange command.
17.Push START.
19.Push START and lane 2 is moved closer to the front of the module and the head moves
to the rear of the module. The operation panel then displays the guidance for removing
the tray unit-L/LT.
NXTBAS150

the module.
NXTMTU035
forward.
CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION

24.The operation panel changes to display the guidance for removing the backup plate for
plate for lane 2.
NXTBAS151
25.Push OK.
WARNING

NXTMTU006a

page is displayed.
displayed.
g. Specify the new maximum width for the panel in the [Max Panel Width] setting.
32.Transmit the job for single lane production to the machine from Fuji Flexa. Refer to the
34.Use the arrow keys to highlight the unit exchange pictogram and push OK.
35.Use the arrow keys to highlight the backup plate exchange command, and push OK.

the module.
NXTMTU035
forward.
CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION

41.Guidance for exchanging the backup plates is displayed. Attach the new backup plate
for lane 1.
Backup plate
Bottom plate
NXTBAS208
42.Push OK.
WARNING


NXTMTU006a
47.Push OK to leave manual mode.
48.Push START and the conveyor changes to the correct width for the job.

5.11 Attaching/Removing a Tray Unit-M

The tray unit-M can be used on M6(S) modules on one side or two sides. The positions for
these on the feeder pallet are called position A and B. The tray unit-M is set in slot 10 for
position A and slot 35 for position B.
Mounted on one side Mounted on both sides
Position A Position B
Position B
NXTMTU096Ea
It is possible to attach and remove the tray unit-M more efficiently by using the optional tray
unit-M change unit.
Handles
Lock knob
Height adjusting handle
Leveling plate
01NST-0395E
WARNING
Use two or more people to lift, carry, and position the tray unit-M.
Be sure to firmly grip the right and left handles. Injury and machine
damage can occur if the tray unit is dropped.

Handle NXTMTU065E
CAUTION
• Do not move the tray unit-M or attach/remove it from a module

• Be gentle when attaching or removing the tray unit-M so as to not
• Stop the machine before attaching or removing a tray unit-M.
There is a possibility that the machine can be damaged if the tray
unit-M is removed or attached while the machine is producing.
• When a tray unit-M is loaded on a change unit, the center of
balance is high so it is not stable. When loading a tray unit-M on a
change unit for some reason, be careful to not tip it over. Injury and
machine damage can occur in such a case.
5.11.1 Preparation
• Shift the part camera position in the middle of the module when using the tray
unit-M. (Refer to section 8.1 "Replacing the Parts Camera".)
• Set a tray unit-M tape duct. (Refer to section 5.11.6 "Setting a tray unit-M tape
duct or cover".)
• Remove all trays from the tray unit-M magazine.

5.11.2 Attaching procedure

1. Pull out the module halfway. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module".)
2. While performing the following operation by using two or more people, firmly grip the
right and left handles and pick up the unit in a level manner and position close to the
feeder pallet on the module.
WARNING
3. Use the labels for the slot numbers on the feeder pallet as a reference to position the
tray unit-M. (Position A: Slot 10, Position B: Slot 35)
Guides
PosA PosB
10 35
Feeder pallet
01NST-0396E
4. In this condition, horizontality push the tray unit-M forward on the feeder pallet. Firmly
push in the unit until the connectors between the tray unit-M and the feeder pallet are
together.
NXTMTU058a

5. Lower the clamp lever in the middle section of the shuttle unit to secure the tray unit-M
to the feeder pallet.
Clamp lever
01NST-0390E
6. Push the module fully back onto the base to return it. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/
Returning a Module".)
5.11.3 Attaching procedure (with an optional change unit)

(1) Setting a tray unit-M on a change unit
1. Lock the casters on the wheels for safety.
2. On the empty change unit, pull and the turn the red lock knob until it is touching the
hanger like that shown in the picture below. (In this state, the lock pin for the upper
surface of the change unit is free.)
Lock knob (red)

Lock pin
Hanger
01NST-0392E

3. Load the tray unit-M on the left and right rails on the change unit.
Tray unit-M rails
Unit rails
01NST-0391E
4. Slide the tray unit-M all the way towards the handles on the change unit. The tray unit-
M is automatically locked. The red lock knob automatically moves to the lock position.
Handles
Lock knob (red)
UNLOCK
LOCK
01NST-0383E
(2) Attaching a tray unit-M to a module from the change unit

2. Position the change unit with the tray unit-M loaded on it close to the front of the feeder
pallet.
3. Adjust the height of the change unit by turning the height adjusting handle until the front
connectors on the shuttle are higher than the connectors on the feeder pallet. (You can
refer to the scale label as a reference. The scale used is based on the panel
conveyance height.)
Shuttle front end
Scale label
980
960
940
920 Feeder pallet

900 connector area
880
01NST-0385E

4. Use the labels for the slot numbers on the feeder pallet as a reference to position the
tray unit-M. (Position A: Slot 10, Position B: Slot 35)
Guides
PosA PosB
10 35
Feeder pallet
01NST-0396E
5. Use the height adjusting handle to adjust the height of the unit until the lower surface of
the shuttle (A) on the tray unit-M is level with the upper surface of the feeder pallet (B).
At this height, the connectors on the tray unit-M and feeder pallet can connect.
Shuttle area on tray unit-M
Adjust the height of (A)

the unit so that both
surfaces are level to (B)
connect together.
Feeder pallet in a module
01NST-0386E
(At this time, set the enclosed leveling plate in a slot in the magazine (any slot is fine) and
check the levelness of the unit.)
Mirror
Leveling plate
Level
01NST-0387E

6. Push the tray unit-M fully onto the feeder pallet in the module from the change unit.
WARNING
Correctly insert the guide on the bottom of the tray unit-M into the
slot on the feeder pallet.
If the guide is not in the slot, the tray unit-M is not clamped to the
feeder pallet and can drop causing injury and machine damage.
01MEC-0305
7. In this condition, horizontality push the tray unit-M forward on the feeder pallet. Firmly
push in the unit until the connectors between the tray unit-M and the feeder pallet are
together.
8. Lower the clamp lever in the middle section of the shuttle unit to secure the tray unit to
the feeder pallet.
Clamp lever
01NST-0390E

9. Pull and then turn the red lock knob until it is in the position against the hanger like that
shown in the picture below. Then lift up the lock lever (2) and then gently pull the change
unit away from the tray unit.
(1)
(2)
01NST-0389
10.Push the module fully back onto the base to return it.
5.11.4 Removal procedure

2. Open the door and then remove all trays set in the tray unit.
Tray
NXTMTU068E

3. Raise the clamp lever in the middle section of the shuttle unit to unclamp the tray unit.
Clamp lever
01NST-0394E
4. While performing the following operation by using two or more people, firmly grip the
right and left handles and horizontality pull the tray unit away from the feeder pallet. Set
the removed tray unit-M in a stable, safe location where it will not fall or be knocked over.
WARNING
5. Push the module fully back onto the base to return it.
5.11.5 Removing procedure (with an optional change unit)

2. On the empty change unit, pull and the turn the red lock knob until it is touching the
hanger like that shown in the picture below. (In this state, the lock pin for the upper
surface of the change unit is free.)
Lock knob (red)

Lock pin
Hanger
01NST-0392E

3. Set the change unit under the front half of the tray unit-M.
4. Turn the height adjusting handle until the rails on the change unit contact the rails on the
bottom of the tray unit-M.
Tray unit-M rails
Unit rails
01NST-0391E
5. Push the change unit towards the tray unit-M until the two units are fully connected. The
red lock knob automatically moves to the lock position.
Lock knob (red)
UNLOCK
LOCK
01NST-0393E
6. Raise the clamp lever in the middle section of the shuttle unit to unclamp the tray unit.
Clamp lever
01NST-0394E

7. Gently pull the change unit with the tray unit-M loaded away from the module.
8. When finished moving the unit, lock the casters on the wheels for safety.
CAUTION
When a tray unit-M is loaded on a change unit, the center of balance

is high so it is not stable. When loading a tray unit-M on a change
unit for some reason, be careful to not tip it over. Injury and
machine damage can occur in such a case.

5.11.6 Setting a tray unit-M tape duct or cover

The dedicated waste tape duct or cover must be used when tray unit-M(s) are mounted in
the module. Use the tray unit-M waste tape duct when mounting a unit on one side, and use
the waste tape cover when mounting units on both sides.
Duct and cover
Name Shape Usage
Tray unit-M waste tape Mounting on one side

duct (position B)
01MEC-0218
Waste tape cover Mounting on both sides

(positions A and B)
01MEC-0219
Procedure
CAUTION
The duct or shaft could be damaged by the magnetic field
generated by the linear motor in the Y-axis. Keep the duct away
from the shaft of the Y-axis when using a M6S module.
Linear motor shaft
Linear scale

1. Remove the bolts securing the standard type duct and then remove the duct.
Duct
Screw
NXTMTU002E
2. Set the tray unit-M compatible waste tape duct or the waste tape cover and use the bolts
from the previous tape duct to fix the item.
Duct
(When mounting a unit on one side)
Screw
Cover
(When mounting units on both sides)
Screw
NXTMTU056E

QD008-27 6. Preventive Maintenance
6. Preventive Maintenance
6.1 About Preventative Maintenance
Preventative maintenance involves such tasks as regular inspections, cleaning and
lubrication, and is indispensable for the purpose of avoiding machine errors, and ensuring
that the machine performs according to the design specifications. Please ensure to adhere
strictly to the following guidelines when performing preventative maintenance procedures.
• The preventive maintenance items noted here are mainly directed towards
maintenance staff. However, there are certain tasks whose responsibility lies
with the operators.
• This section lists only those maintenance items related to the machine itself.
Please refer to the "FUJI Intelligent Feeder Manual" for details on feeder
maintenance.
• A maintenance manual related only to head maintenance “Placing Head

Maintenance Manual” is available. Contact your Fuji representative for details.
When pulling forward modules, use the manual mode cleaning command to unclamp
modules.
6.1.1 Maintenance frequency

Fuji recommends that preventative maintenance tasks be performed at 1 day (24 hrs), 1
week (160 hrs), 1 month (700 hrs), 3 month (2,000 hrs), 6 month (4,000 hrs), 1 year (8,000
hrs) and 12,000 hour intervals. Furthermore, it is also recommended that maintenance be
performed periodically after long periods of continuous operation, and at those times when
experiencing production related problems on the machine. (Refer to section 6.2
"Maintenance Checklist".)

6. Preventive Maintenance QD008-27
6.1.2 Points of caution

• Follow the prescribed procedures for performing preventative maintenance only
after stopping the machine. At all other times, perform maintenance after
turning OFF the machine power, disconnecting the air supply and releasing
existing air from the air-hose.
• Do not direct compressed air inside the machine/modules when performing

maintenance, as scattered small chips or foreign objects may result in damage
to the machine during operation.
• Use a cloth to wipe off any excess grease.
• Do not use an air gun or similar tool to blow pressurized air into the vacuum
pressure supply opening on the rear side of the placement head. Doing so can
damage the internal section of the head and cause it to malfunction.
Air pressure supply opening
Vacuum pressure supply opening

01MEC-0886E

6.1.3 Required equipment
Jig Nozzle cleaning drill AWPJ8100 Used to clean the inside of

nozzles
Jig 0603 Nozzle cleaning jig AA4XY01 Used to clean the inside of
nozzles
Jig Fuji grease gun kit AWPJ8201 Used to apply lubricant to

grease fittings
Jig Parts camera cleaning kit Used to clean the parts

camera glass
Cleaning paper (A4565T)
Vacuum pickup tool (A21010)
Wiper (AA14X00)
Cleaner (K3018H)
NXTPCA012Eb

Jig Head maintenance stand AA0AM** Used to clean and lub the
placing head
NXTPHD027a
Jig Filter cleaning basket K1325C Used to clean the head filters.
NXTPHD028
Jig H01 Q-axis gear fixing jig PM28083 Used when removing the H01
head sleeve assembly.
NXTPHD104
Jig Nozzle changer lubirication jig AA4CM** Used when lubricating the
nozzle changer without holes.
Jig Syringe O-ring lubrication jig AA40R** Used to lubricate the O-ring in
the syringe of the H12HS,
H12(S), H08, and H04 heads.
NXTPHD122Ea

Jig Head Cleaner QK00C** Used for cleaning the syringes

on the H12HS, H12(S), H08,
and H04 head.
01MEC-0523
Jig Mechanical valve sliding resistance Used for inspecting the

measuring head AA6KN** mechanical valve O-rings on
the H12HS, H12(S), H08, and
H04 head.
01MEC-0567
Jig Mechanical valve O-ring exchange tool Used for exchanging the
PM072M* mechanical valve O-rings on
H04 head.
01MEC-0566
Tools Metric spanner set -
Metric Allen wrench set -
Flat head screwdriver -
Phillips screwdriver -
Torque wrench -
Lubri Daphne Eponex No.2 (Idemitsu) -

cants
MDV235-ZB (Kuroda) Manufacture type number:
K3032K (30 g)
Mobilith SHC100 (Mobil) -
Mobilith SHC460WT (Mobil) -
NS7(NSK) or Multemp SRL (Kyodo Yushi) -
Biral T&D (Biral Lubricants Norway A/S) -
VG-EP No. 1 (Wako Chemical) Manufacturer type number:

K60192
G501 (Shinetsu) Manufacturer type number:

K30315

Other Vacuum cleaner -
Cloth Ensure to use a soft, clean

cloth.
Cotton swab -
Soft brush -
Vacuum pickup tool For removing rejected parts
Neutral detergent Used to clean the conveyor

belt
Industrial ethanol Used to clean nozzles
Ultrasonic cleaner Used to clean nozzle filters
Tension meter For checking belts.
Safety goggles Used for cleaning the syringes

on the H12HS, H12(S), H08,
and H04 head.
Push-pull gauge Used for inspecting the

mechanical valve O-rings on
H04 head.

6.1.4 Applying grease

There are several methods for applying grease such as applying grease to grease fittings,
using a brush, spraying from a can. The procedures to be used to apply grease depending
on the location are explained step-by-step later in this chapter. This section explains the
two typical grease application methods that are used.
Note: A Fuji grease gun is used for calculating the amount of grease to be applied. One shot from
the grease gun (1 pump) is approximately 0.6 cc. Use the number of shots as the target
when applying grease. The number of shots specified is a little more than the required
amount of grease. Clean off any extra grease that comes out.
Typical lubrication methods

Applying grease to grease fittings
1. Wipe off any filth from the ball screws and LM guides with a clean cloth.
2. Use the grease gun from the Fuji grease gun kit (AWPJ8201) to apply the required
number of shots to the grease fitting on the ball screws/LM guides.
3. Wipe off any excess grease off from the ball screw/LM guide with a clean cloth.
4. Manually move the unit to work in the grease on the ball screws/LM guides. (Move one
full stroke)
5. Wipe off any excess grease with a clean cloth again.
Applying grease with a brush (or spray can)

1. Wipe off any filth from the ball screws and LM guides with a clean cloth.
2. Use the grease gun from the Fuji grease gun kit (AWPJ8201) to apply the required
number of shots directly to a brush and then apply the grease to the applicable area on
the unit. Spread the grease evenly with the brush.
3. When spraying, directly spray the grease on the unit.
4. Wipe off any excess grease off from the unit with a clean cloth.
5. Manually move the unit to work in the grease on the ball screws/LM guides. (Move one
full stroke)
6. Wipe off any excess grease with a clean cloth again.

6.2 Maintenance Checklist

CLN: indicates cleaning LUB: indicates lubrication CHK: indicates check EXG: indicates
exchange.
Note that the times listed in this chart are only recommendations. Actual work time may
differ. The time required for personnel to pull modules forward or load and unload units may
add to the total work time required.
6.2.1 Maintenance performed by operators when the machine is

waiting to produce
Every 3 months
Every 6 months
Time Required
(2000 hrs)
(4000 hrs)
(8000 hrs)
(160 hrs)
(700 hrs)
irregular
Monthly
(24 hrs)
Weekly
Yearly
(min.)
Daily
Maintenance Locations
Reject parts box Remove parts CLN 1

Waste tape box Clean waste tepe box CLN 1
Reject parts CLN
Remove rejected parts 0.1
conveyor (*1)
Tray unit-L Remove rejected parts CLN 0.1
(*1)
Remove empty trays CLN 2
(*2)
Tray unit-LT Remove rejected - - - - - - CLN 0.1
parts , *1
Remove empty trays - - - - - - CLN 2
, *2
Tray unit-LTC Remove rejected - - - - - - CLN 0.1
parts , *1
Module top Clean top cover - - - - - - CLN 1
cover
*1: Performed when the box is full of parts

*2: Performed when the box is full of trays

6.2.2 Maintenance performed by maintenance personnel
Every 3 months
Every 6 months
Time Required
12,000 hrs
(2000 hrs)
(4000 hrs)
(8000 hrs)
(160 hrs)
(700 hrs)
irregular
Monthly
Weekly
Yearly
(min.)
Nozzle CLN 10
(*3)
Nozzle changer Nozzle station holders CLN 5
Up/down shafts LUB 5
Part supply Feeder pallet CLN 1
Connector between pallet CLN
10
and part supply base (*4)
H01 head Q-axis gear LUB 10
Z-axis ballscrew LUB 10
Z-axis LM guide LUB 10
Nozzle vacuum filter CHK
or
CLN 10
EXG
(*5)
Exchanging nozzle clamp EXG, 5
pins, cleaning nozzle CLN
pickup surface
Flange filter CLN 10
Sleeve assembly CLN 10
Arm rotation axis LUB 5
H02 head Q-axis gears - - - - - LUB - 10
Z1, Z2-axes ball screws - - - - - LUB - 10
Z1, Z2-axes LM guides - - - - - LUB - 10
Nozzle vacuum filter - CLN - - - - CHK,
10
*5
Exchanging nozzle clamp - EXG, - - - - - 5
pins, cleaning nozzle CLN
pickup surface
Flange filter - CLN - - - - - 10
H04 head Z-axis ballscrew LUB 10
Z-axis guide shaft LUB 10
Cam follower of the LUB 10
stepping motor
Q-axis gear (upper, motor LUB 5
side)
Q-axis gear (lower, LUB 5
syringe side)
R-axis gear LUB 5
Mechanical valve - CHK - - EXG, - 20,
O-ring LUB 10
Syringes, O-rings inside CLN, 15,

syringe - LUB - - - - - 10
Nozzle vacuum filter CLN EXG 20

Every 3 months
Every 6 months
Time Required
12,000 hrs
(2000 hrs)
(4000 hrs)
(8000 hrs)
(160 hrs)
(700 hrs)
irregular
Monthly
Weekly
Yearly
(min.)
H08 head Z-axis ballscrew LUB 10

stepping motor
side)
syringe side)
R-axis gear LUB 5
Mechanical valve CHK EXG, 40,
- - - - -
O-ring LUB 10
syringe - LUB - - - - - 10
H12(S) head Z-axis ballscrew LUB 10
stepping motor
side)
syringe side)
R-axis gear LUB 5
O-ring - - - - LUB - 10
syringe - LUB - - - - - 10
H12HS head Z-axis ball screw - - - - - LUB - 10
Z-axis guide shaft - - - - - LUB - 10
Cam follower of the
stepping motor - - - - - LUB - 10
Q-axis gear (upper, motor

side) - - - - - LUB - 5
Q-axis gear (lower,

syringe side) - LUB - - - - - 5
R-axis gear - - - - - LUB - 5

- - - - -
O-ring LUB 10
syringe - LUB - - - - - 10
Nozzle vacuum filter - CLN - - EXG - - 20
Arm rotation axis - - - LUB - - - 5

Every 3 months
Every 6 months
Time Required
12,000 hrs
(2000 hrs)
(4000 hrs)
(8000 hrs)
(160 hrs)
(700 hrs)
irregular
Monthly
Weekly
Yearly
(min.)
Double conveyor Panel clamp (clamp rails, LUB 15

clamp pins and O-rings)
Belt tension CHK
CHK 30
(*6)
Conveyor belt CLN
(*6)
Soft backup pin CLN
(*9)
LM rail guide for width LUB 10
change
Ballscrews for width LUB 10
change
Single conveyor Panel clamp (clamp rails, LUB 15
clamp pins and O-rings)
Belt tension CHK
CHK 30
(*6)
Conveyor belt CLN
(*6)
Soft backup pin CLN
(*9)
LM rail guide for width LUB 10
change
change
Single conveyor CZ-axis ballscrew LUB 15
S LM rail guide for width LUB 10
change
change
Belt tension CHK
CHK 10
(*6)
Conveyor belt CLN
(*6)
Soft backup pin CLN
(*9)
CZ-axis belt tension CHK 10
Belt tension for panel CHK 10
loading
Belt tension for width CHK 10
change
XY-robot X-axis gear LUB 2
<M3(S)> X-axis ballscrew LUB 5
X-axis LM guide LUB 5
Y-axis ballscrew LUB 5
Y-axis LM guide LUB 5
XS-axis gear LUB 2
XS-axis ballscrew LUB 5
XS-axis LM guide LUB 5
XY-axis flat cable LUB 10

Every 3 months
Every 6 months
Time Required
12,000 hrs
(2000 hrs)
(4000 hrs)
(8000 hrs)
(160 hrs)
(700 hrs)
irregular
Monthly
Weekly
Yearly
(min.)
XY-robot X-axis gear LUB 2

<M6S> X-axis ballscrew LUB 5
XY-robot <M6> X-axis gear LUB 2
X-axis ballscrew LUB 5
Y-axis ballscrew LUB 5
Mark camera Half mirror inside light unit CLN 3
Parts camera Glass cover CLN - - - - - - 2
Glass inside light unit CLN - - - - - - 2
Lens - - - - CLN - - 15
Waste tape Cutter CLN 20
processing unit (*7)
Duct CLN 15
(*8)
LM guide LUB 20
Machine body Inside module CLN 2
Base/module support LUB 5
surfaces
Air regulator CLN 15
Mist separator CLN 15
Vacuum pump filter CLN 15
Reject parts Conveyor belt CLN 5
conveyor
Tray unit-L Reject parts conveyor belt CLN 5
Shuttle belt CLN 5
Fan filter CLN 5
TZ-axis ballscrew LUB 10
Lifter gear LUB 10
TZ-axis belt tension CHK 10
TY-axis belts (for shuttle) CHK 10
tension
TY-axis belt (for motor CHK 10
gear) tension

Every 3 months
Every 6 months
Time Required
12,000 hrs
(2000 hrs)
(4000 hrs)
(8000 hrs)
(160 hrs)
(700 hrs)
irregular
Monthly
Weekly
Yearly
(min.)
Tray unit-LT Slots, connectors CLN - - - - - - 1

Reject parts conveyor belt - CLN - - - - - 5
Shuttle belt - CLN - - - - - 5
TZ1/TZ2-axis ballscrew - - - - - LUB - 10
Lifter gear - - - - - LUB - 10
TZ1/TZ2-axis belt tension - - - - - CHK - 10
TY-axis belts (for shuttle)
tension - - - - - CHK - 10
TY-axis belt (for motor

gear) tension - - - - - CHK - 10
Tray unit-LTC Slots, connectors CLN - - - - - - 1

Reject parts conveyor belt - CLN - - - - - 5
Shuttle belt - CLN - - - - - 5
TZ1/TZ2-axis ballscrew - - - - - LUB - 10
Lifter gear - - - - - LUB - 10
TZ1/TZ2-axis belt tension - - - - - CHK - 10
TY-axis belts (for shuttle)
tension - - - - - CHK - 10
TY-axis belt (for motor

gear) tension - - - - - CHK - 10
Tray unit-M Shuttle belts CLN 5

Magazine belts CLN 10
TY-axis clutch LUB 10
Tray stopper pins LUB -
Tray stopper pin drive LUB -
shaft
TZ-axis belt tension (belt CHK 10
on the magazine side)
TZ-axis belt tension CHK 10
(motor side)
TY-axis belt tension (for CHK 10
the clutch)
TY-axis belt tension CHK 10
(motor side)
PCU Movable parts on the PCU - - - - - - LUB
10
*10
*3: Every 150,000 pickups or when a pickup error occurs

*4: When a pallet clamp error occurs
*5: When a nozzle vacuum pressure error occurs or filters are extremely dirty
*6: When a conveyor error occurs
*7: When a cutter operation problem occurs
*8: When a tape feeder error occurs
*9: When backup pins require cleaning
*10: When problems occur with operation

6.3 Daily Maintenance (Every 24 Hrs)

Perform cleaning in the following areas.
6.3.1 Cleaning the reject parts box

1. Pull out the module. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module".)
2. Pull up and remove the reject parts box.
3. Empty the reject parts box.

Caution: Be sure that the reject parts box is fully seated (placed completely back in position so it does
not stick up) when putting it back. If the reject parts box is not fully seated, it is possible that
items such as the head may strike and be damaged and/or damage the reject parts box.
Reject parts box
NXTBAS005E
6.3.2 Cleaning the waste tape box

1. Pull out the waste tape box.
2. Empty the waste tape box.
Waste tape box
NXTBAS004E
3. Return the waste tape box to the base.

6.4 Weekly Maintenance (Every 160 Hrs)

6.4.1 Cleaning the nozzle station holders

2. Remove the nozzle station. (Refer to section 5.9 "Removing/Attaching a Nozzle Station"
for details.)
3. Slide the plate over and remove all nozzles.
4. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dirt or foreign objects from inside the nozzle
sockets.
Plate
Nozzle sockets NXTNZC005E

6.4.2 Cleaning the glass cover on the parts camera

2. Set the wiper with a paper of the parts camera cleaning kit. Use it to remove any dirt or
foreign objects from the glass cover.
Note: Do not apply too much pressure when cleaning the glass surface in order to avoid breaking
the glass.
Wiper
Cover glass surface
NXTPCA008Ea
Note: Refer to the illustration below for setting the cleaning paper on the wiper.
Cleaning paper 3
NXTPCA009E

6.4.3 Cleaning the glass cover inside parts camera lighting unit
2. Use the cleaner of the parts camera cleaning kit to remove any dirt or foreign objects
from the glass cover inside the unit. Use the vacuum pickup tool for large objects that
the cleaner could not remove.
3. Use the wiper with a cleaning paper to wipe off any dirt or stain on the glass cover.
Note: Refer to section 6.4.2 "Cleaning the glass cover on the parts camera" for setting the
cleaning paper on the wiper.
Note: Do not apply too much pressure when cleaning the glass surface in order to avoid breaking
the glass.
Cleaner
Wiper
Vacuum pickup tool Glass surface

NXTPCA010Ea
Note: Use the brush nozzle with the cleaner. Do not use other types of the nozzle, as it could
damage the glass.
Cleaner (K3018H)
Nozzle with brush
Small size nozzle

Standard size nozzle
(not used)
(not used)
NXTPCA0011E

6.4.4 Cleaning the feeder pallet

1. Remove the feeder pallet. (Refer to section 5.4 "Removing/Loading a Feeder Pallet" for
details.)
2. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove foreign objects and dust from the feeder slots and
pallet connectors. If necessary, use a soft brush to carefully remove any remaining
items.
3. Ensure to clean any foreign objects or dust from the part supply base roller grooves prior
to returning the feeder pallet to the machine.
Feeder pallet
Feeder connectors
Slots
Part supply base

Roller groove
Roller groove
NXTDPL013Ed

6.4.5 Cleaning inside the module
WARNING

magnetic field.
CAUTION
may be deformed.
• When working close to the linear motor of a M6S module (within

55 mm) do not use ordinary metal tools. Use only nonmagnetic
tools.

Linear motor shaft
Linear scale

2. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any foreign objects or dirt scattered inside the module.
NXTBAS006
3. Use a dry cloth to carefully remove grease from areas other than those specified.

6.4.6 Cleaning the tray unit-LT feeder slots and connectors

Use a vacuum cleaner to remove foreign objects and dust from the feeder slots and
connectors. If necessary, use a soft brush to carefully remove any remaining items.
Connectors
Feeder slots
01MEC-0441E
6.4.7 Cleaning the tray unit-LTC feeder slots and connectors

Use a vacuum cleaner to remove foreign objects and dust from the feeder slots and
connectors. If necessary, use a soft brush to carefully remove any remaining items.
Connectors
Feeder slots
01MEC-0508E

6.5 Monthly Maintenance (Every 700 Hrs)

Perform cleaning and lubrication in the following areas.
6.5.1 Cleaning the reject parts conveyor belt

1. Remove the reject parts conveyor. (Refer to section 8.3 "Replacing the Reject Parts
Unit" for details.)
2. Clean the surface of the conveyor belt with a clean, dry cloth.
Reject parts conveyor belt
NXTRPC006Eb
6.5.2 Cleaning the tray unit-L shuttle belts (reject parts, tray drawer)
1. Remove the tray unit. (Refer to section 5.5 "Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-L" for
details.)
2. Clean the surfaces of the conveyor and shuttle belts with a dry, clean cloth.
Tray drawer
shuttle belts
Reject parts
conveyor belt
NXTMTU026E

6.5.3 Cleaning the tray unit-LT shuttle belts (reject parts, tray
drawer)
1. Remove the tray unit-LT. (Refer to section 5.6 "Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-LT" for
details.)
Reject parts conveyor belt Tray drawer shuttle belts
01MEC-0442E
6.5.4 Cleaning the tray unit-LTC shuttle belts (reject parts, tray
drawer)
1. Remove the tray unit-LTC. (Refer to section 5.7 "Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-LTC"
for details.)
Tray drawer shuttle belts

Reject parts conveyor belt
01MEC-0509E

6.5.5 Cleaning the placing head vacuum filters

<About the filter cleaning basket>
Cleaning the filters is easier when using the special filter cleaning basket. When using this
basket, put in the filters along with any cases and put the basket in an ultrasonic cleaning
machine to clean them. The quantities of filters that can be put in the basket are provided
below.
• H04, H08, H12(S), H12HS head: Maximum 40 filters
• H01, H02 head: Maximum 20 filters
NXTPHD028
<H01 head>
1. Remove the placing head. (Refer to section 5.8 "Removing/Attaching a Placing Head"
for details.)
2. Using the small-type blade screw driver, loosen and remove the filter cases and filters.
Filter case
Filter
Drawing number : XH0056*(Rev.2, 3)
: XH0094*(Rev.4)
Filter case
Filter NXTPHD013Ec
3. Wash the filter cases and filters in neutral detergent solvent, or replace if excessively
dirty.
Note: Put the filter while still in the case in the optional filter cleaning basket (K1325C). Clean
them by soaking them in neutral detergent in an ultrasonic cleaning machine for 5 minutes.

<H02 head>
for details.)
2. Using the small-type blade screw driver, loosen and remove the filter cases and filters.
Holder A Nozzle pick-up
Filter case
Filter
(Drawing number:
XH0094*)
Holder B Nozzle pick-up
Holder A Parts pick-up
Filter
Filter case (Drawing number: XH0094*)
Filter Filter case
(Drawing number:
XH0094*)
Holder B Parts pick-up
Filter
(Drawing number: XH0094*)
Filter case
01MEC-0462E
dirty.
<H04 head>
for details.)
2. Slide the aluminum lock-ring to the right and remove the filter cases (with filter inside).
Lock-ring
Filter case AA0AL**
(filter inside) NXTPHD018Ea
dirty.
Note: Put the filter while still in the case in the optional filter cleaning basket (K1325B). Clean

<H08 head>
for details.)
Filter
DWG No.:AA0AL**
Filter case
Lock-ring NXTPHD006Ec
dirty.
Note: Put the filter while still in the case in the optional filter cleaning basket (K1325B). Clean
<H12(S)/H12HS head>
for details.)
Filter cover
Filter
(AA19H**)
Filter case
01MEC-0194Ea
dirty.

6.5.6 Exchanging nozzle clamp pins and cleaning the nozzle pickup
surface
<H01/H02 head only>
for details.)
2. Pinch the nozzle clamp pin fixing tabs with needle nose pliers to make removal easy.
Nozzle clamp pin

Nozzle pickup
surface
Mark
NXTPHD038Ea
Caution: Do not touch the 4 marks on the nozzle pickup surface.
3. Remove the nozzle clamp pin.
Nozzle pickup surface
NXTPHD039E
Caution: Be careful to not damage the nozzle pickup surface.
4. There are two pins used to clamp the nozzle. Repeat these procedures to remove the
second pin.

5. Clean the nozzle pickup surface. Gently wipe with cleaning paper to remove items from
the surface.
Nozzle pickup surface
Mark
NXTPHD041Ea
Caution: Do not touch the 4 marks on the nozzle pickup surface.
6. Attach the new nozzle clamp pins. Use an item that matches the inside diameter of the
pin in order to be able to securely push in the pin into place.
Nozzle clamp pin

Drawing number: PH0027*
NXTPHD040E
Caution: Be careful to not damage the clamp items on the clamp pins.

6.5.7 Cleaning the head flange filter

<H01/H02 head only>
For the H01 head without flange filter, it is necessary to clean the sleeve assembly. (Refer
to section 6.7.6 "Cleaning the H01 sleeve assembly <for heads without flange filter>" for
details.)
Flange
Filter
NXTPHD105E
for details.)
2. Remove the filter lock and then gently pull out the filter from the head.
Filter Flange
(AA1FZ0*)
NXTPHD116E
Hook
3. Use an air gun to clean the filter.

6.5.8 Cleaning the placing head syringes

<H04/H08/H12(S)/H12HS head>
CAUTION
Head Cleaner is designed to clean H04, H08, and H12 series heads.
Do not use this unit to clean other types of heads. Using it to clean
heads other than H04, H08, and H12 series heads may result in
damage to them.
It is necessary to use the head cleaner (QK00C**) when cleaning syringes.

Caution: If syringes are not periodically cleaned, there are cases in which good production results
cannot be obtained due a large accumulation of dust.
1. Connect an air hose to the head cleaner to supply air.
01MEC-0523
for details.)
3. Remove the side cover from the head.
Cover Cover
H04 head H08 head
Cover
Cover
H12(S) head H12HS head

01MEC-0589E

4. Ensure that there no objects or dust on the attaching surfaces of the placing head and
the holder. Use a clean dry cloth to remove any foreign objects.
Placing head clamp parts Parts where attached on holder
01MEC-0526E
5. While holding the head handle, insert the clamp joints into the grooves on the holder.
Pull the lever on the syringe cleaning unit forward and down to secure the placing head.
Placing head
Press the head down

firmly against the holder.
Placing head
Holder
01MEC-0527E

6. Place a cloth under the head. Alternatively, set a box covered with a cloth under the
head.
Caution: Use a box size that does not interfere with the head. Remove the box when attaching or
removing a head.
01MEC-0545a
7. Set the filters cases without filters in the head. Refer to section 6.5.5 "Cleaning the
placing head vacuum filters" for details.
8. Check the following items.
• The air pressure is between 0.4 MPa to 0.5 MPa.
• All of the filter cases are locked in place.
• All of the vacuum valves are in the upper position.

Note: The illustration below shows a H08 head, but perform the same work for the H04, H12(S),
and H12HS heads.
Filter locked Filter unlocked
01MEC-0548E

9. Open the air valve to supply air to the head.
Valve closed Valve opened

01MEC-0528E
10.Lower only one of the vacuum valves to supply air to the syringe. While supplying air to
the syringe, move the syringe up and down until foreign matter stops coming out.
Caution: Clean only one syringe at a time because the effectiveness of the cleaning is reduced due
to the air pressure dropping when air is supplied to multiple syringes at the same time.
and H12HS heads.
CAUTION
Wear protective goggles when performing this work. It is possible

that items can be blown into the eyes from the syringe when the
vacuum valve is lowered.
01MEC-0549
11.Replace filter cases with ones that have filters. Refer to section section 6.5.5 "Cleaning
the placing head vacuum filters" for details.
12.Wipe off any foreign objects clinging to the side of the syringe with a clean dry cloth.
Lubricate the syringes at the same time as cleaning them. Refer to section 6.5.9
"Syringes and O-rings inside syringe lubrication" for details on lubricating the syringes.
13.When all the syringes have been cleaned, while holding the head handle, lift the lever
on the syringe cleaning unit and then remove the head from the unit. Reattach the side
cover back on the head.

6.5.9 Syringes and O-rings inside syringe lubrication

<H04 head>
Required grease Application location Amount(cc)
VG-EP No. 1 (Wako (1) Syringes 0.02

Chemical)
Biral T&D (2) Q-axis gear (lower, syringe side) 0.124

(Biral Lubricants Norway A/S)
MDV235-ZB (Kuroda) (3) O-rings inside syringe -
for details.)
3. Wipe off any dirt or other foreign objects clinging to the side of the syringe (1) with a
clean dry cloth (or cotton swab).
4. Use a cotton swab or brush to apply 0.01 cc of VG-EP No. 1 to the upper part of syringe
(1).
5. Lower the syringe and apply 0.01 cc of VG-EP No. 1 to the lower part of syringe (1).
6. Move the syringe (1) up and down to lubricate.
7. Wipe off any excess grease with a clean cloth (or cotton swab).
8. Lubricate all of the syringes.
9. Apply a thin coat of the Biral T&D to the Q-axis gear teeth (2) with a clean cloth.
10.Rotate the Q-axis gear (2) by hand to lubricate the gear teeth.
(2) Cover
(1)
(1)
NXTPHD022Eb

11.Lubricate the O-ring in the syringes with MDV235-ZB grease by following the substeps
below.
a. Put the specified grease in the jar and then put the lid with the rods in it back on the
jar.
b. Remove the rod for lubricating the O-ring on the H04 head from the jig.
Syringe O-ring lubrication jig

(AA40R**)
Rod (for H04)
Case
NXTPHD118b
c. Wipe the excess grease off end of the rod with a clean cloth.
Wipe here Grease
Excess grease Rod
01MEC-0011Ea
d. Insert the rod into the syringe. Use the groove as a guide for the depth. Once the rod
is correctly inserted, lightly rotate it to apply the grease to the O-ring.
Note: Use a clean cloth to remove any grease from the top of the syringe.
Rod
Excess grease
Wipe here
(3) O-ring
Syringe
Groove
NXTPHD119Ea
e. Put the rod back in the jig to apply more grease and then continue to lubricate the
other syringes on the head.

<H08 / H12(S) / H12HS head>

H08 head
VG-EP No. 1 (Wako Chemical) (1) Syringes 0.02
Biral T&D (2) Q-axis gear (lower, syringe 0.272

(Biral Lubricants Norway A/S) side)
H12(S) / H12HS head
VG-EP No. 1 (Wako Chemical) (1) Syringes 0.02
Biral T&D (2) Q-axis gear 0.336,

(Biral Lubricants Norway A/S) syringe gear<H12HS> 0.02<H12HS>
for details.)
3. Wipe off any dirt or other foreign objects clinging to the side of the syringe (1) with a
clean dry cloth (or cotton swab).
4. Use a cotton swab or brush to apply 0.01 cc of VG-EP No. 1 to the upper part of syringe
(1).
5. Lower the syringe and apply 0.01 cc of VG-EP No. 1 to the lower part of syringe (1).
6. Move the syringe (1) up and down to lubricate.
7. Wipe off any excess grease with a clean cloth (or cotton swab).
8. Lubricate all of the syringes.
(1)
(1)
NXTPHD016Eb

9. Apply a thin coat of the Biral T&D to the Q-axis gear teeth (2) with a clean cloth.
10.For H12HS heads, apply Biral T&D to the syringe gear teeth (2).
11.Rotate the Q-axis gear (2) by hand to lubricate the gear teeth.
H08 H12(S)/H12HS
(2)
(2)
(2)
<H12HS>
01MEC-0440
12.Lubricate the O-ring in the syringes with MDV235-ZB grease by following the substeps
below.
a. Put the specified grease in the jar and then put the lid with the rods in it back on the
jar.
b. Remove the rod for lubricating the O-ring on the H12(S)/H08 head from the jig.
Syringe O-ring lubrication jig

(AA40R**)
Rod
(for H8/H12(S)/H12HS)
Case
NXTPHD120Eb

c. Wipe the excess grease off end of the rod with a clean cloth.
Wipe here Grease

Rod
Excess grease
01MEC-0013Ja
d. Insert the rod into the syringe. Use the groove as a guide for the depth. Once the rod
is inserted, lightly rotate it to apply the grease to the O-ring.
Note: Use a clean cloth to remove any grease from the top of the syringe.
Rod
Excess grease
Wipe here
Syringe
Groove
(3) O-ring
NXTPHD121Eb
e. Put the rod back in the jig to apply more grease and then continue to lubricate the
other syringes on the head.
Cautions regarding the Syringe O-ring lubrication jig

1. Use a clean cloth to wipe off any excess grease around the holes where the rods are
inserted.
Wipe here
dia.
dia.
㧦for H04
㧦for H08/H12
01MEC-0012Eb
2. Make sure that the sizes of rod and hole match before inserting the rod.
3. When there is grease inside the jig (jar), keep it away from direct sunlight and store it in
a cool place.

6.5.10 Checking and replacing mechanical valve O-rings

Measure the up and down sliding resistance of the mechanical valve and decide whether
the O-rings are good or need to be replaced.
1. Attach the mechanical valve sliding resistance measuring head (AA6KN**) to a push-
pull gauge.
Note: Use a push-pull gauge that has a maximum load value of 10 N.
for details.)
3. Set the measuring head on the mechanical valve and read the measurement values on
the push-pull gauge as the you move the valve up and down.
4. Measure all of the mechanical valves. If any measurements fall out of the permissible
range of 0.4 N to 2.0 N, then exchange the O-rings for that mechanical valve. Refer to
section 6.9.4 "Replacing and lubricating the placing head mechanical valve O-rings" for
procedures on exchanging these items.
and H12HS heads.
0.4 N㨪2.0 N
Resistance measuring head
Push-pull gauge
Mechanical valve
01MEC-0573E

6.6 3 Monthly Maintenance (Every 2000 Hrs)

Perform lubrication in the following areas.
6.6.1 Machine lubrication (base, module support surfaces)
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) (1) Base support blocks 0.6
(2) Module support blocks 0.4
Note: 1 shot from the grease gun from the Fuji grease gun kit is approximately 0.6 cc. Use
approximate amounts when supplying grease.
2. Wipe off any filth from the base support blocks (1) and the module support blocks (2).
3. Apply 0.6 cc of Daphne Eponex No. 2 to a brush.
4. Spread the grease on the base support blocks (1).
6. Spread the grease on the module support blocks (2).
7. Wipe the excess grease off with a clean cloth.

Note: Applying grease as outlined above will result in both the upper and lower surfaces of the
support blocks (8) being lubricated.
(1)
(2) NXTBAS008b
Note: The example used above is of an M6(S) module, however, the same lubrication process
also applies to the M3(S) module.
8. Return the module to the machine. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a
Module".)

6.7 6 Monthly Maintenance (Every 4000 Hrs)

6.7.1 XY-robot lubrication
WARNING
• Contact with the shaft or coil section of the Y-axis linear motor in a M6S
module could cause burns. Do not contact the shaft or coil section
immediately after production is stopped.
• A strong magnetic field is generated by the Y-axis linear motor in M6S

modules. People with a heart pacemaker should stay clear of the shaft and
coil sections of the linear motor (maintain a distance of 400 mm or more).
Pacemakers may malfunction because of the magnetic field.
CAUTION
• Do not push or pull on the head body or use the handle on the head to
move the XY robot position.
• Do not push on the X-axis gear cover. Otherwise the gear cover may be
deformed.
• When working close to the linear motor of a M6S module (within 55 mm)
do not use ordinary metal tools. Use only nonmagnetic tools.
• Damage to items may occur due to the magnetic field generated by a linear
motor. Keep magnetic cards, wristwatches and other precision machines
away from the linear motor of a M6S module (do not bring within 55 mm).
• Do not hit the linear scale of a M6S module when exchanging the head
and performing maintenance. If the linear scale is damaged then errors will
occur and production may not be possible. In this case it will be necessary
to replace the linear scale.
Wait until the shaft for the linear motor cools to room temperature and then set the
protective covers on the shaft.
Linear motor coil

Linear motor shaft
Linear scale
M6S module
Protective covers
NXTBAS275Eb

<M6S modules>
Mobilith SHC100 (Mobil) (1) X-axis gear 1.76
NS7 (NSK) or Multemp SRL (Kyodo Yushi) (2) X-axis ballscrew 0.24
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) (3) X-axis LM guides 0.26
(4) Y-axis LM guides 0.26
1. Pull the module forward. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module".)
2. Turn off the main switch of the machine.
3. Wait until the shaft for the linear motor cools to room temperature and then set the
Lubricating the X-axis
4. Remove the X-axis gear cover.
Linear motor coil
4
X-axis LM
guide rails 4
Linear motor shaft 4
4
3
1
X-axis ball 3 1
screw
X-axis gear cover
To grease fittings
Use brush
NXTBAS264Ec
5. Wipe off any filth from the X-axis gears (1) with a clean cloth.
6. Apply 1.76 cc of Mobilith SHC100 to a brush.
7. Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the X-axis gear teeth (1).

8. Wipe off any filth from the X-axis ballscrew with a clean cloth.
9. Wipe off any filth from the X-axis LM guide rails with a clean cloth.
10.Use the grease gun to apply 0.24 cc of NS7 or Multemp SRL to the grease fitting of the
X-axis ballscrew (2).
11.Wipe off any excess grease with a clean cloth.
12.Use the grease gun to apply 0.26 cc of Daphne Eponex No. 2 to the grease fitting of the
X-axis LM guides (3).
14.Move the head holder right and left in the X-axis direction (one full stroke) to lubricate
the ballscrew and LM guides evenly.
CAUTION
Do not push or pull on the head body or use the handle on the head
to move the XY robot position.
Do not push on the X-axis gear cover. Otherwise the gear cover
may be deformed.
15.Wipe off any excess grease from the ballscrew and the LM guides with a clean cloth.
Lubricating the Y-axis
16.Wipe off any filth from the Y-axis LM guides with a clean cloth.
Y-axis LM guides (4).
19.Move the Y-axis unit up and down in the Y-axis direction (one full stroke) to lubricate the
ballscrew and LM guides evenly.
CAUTION
may be deformed.
20.Wipe off any excess grease from the LM guides with a clean cloth.
21.Reattach the X-axis gear cover.

22.After lubricating, check that no grease has spilled onto the top of the parts camera,
nozzle station, conveyor, Y-axis linear scale, the top of the coplanarity sensor (option)
or the coplanarity sensor linear scale. If grease has spilled onto any of these areas, wipe
it off using a lint free clean dry cloth.
Caution: Do not apply too much pressure when cleaning the units to avoid causing any damage.
Coplanarity sensor linear scale
Linear motor shaft
Linear scale
Protective covers M6S Module

01MEC-0971E
23.Remove the protective cover from the linear motor shaft.
24.Return the module to the machine. (Refer to " 5.1 Pulling Out/Returning a Module ".)

<M6 modules>
NS7 (NSK) or Multemp SRL (Kyodo Yushi) (2) X-axis ballscrew 0.24
(4) Y-axis ballscrew 0.81
Y-axis LM guide rails
X-axis LM 5
guide rails 5
5
4
Y-axis 5
ball screw
3
1
X-axis 3 1
ball screw
2
X-axis gear cover
To grease fittings
Use brush
NXTBAS017Ec
3. Remove the X-axis gear cover.

9. Use the grease gun to apply 0.24 cc of NS7 or Multemp SRL to the grease fitting of the
CAUTION
may be deformed.
15.Wipe off any filth from the Y-axis ballscrew with a clean cloth.
Y-axis ballscrew (4).
CAUTION
may be deformed.
23.Reattach the X-axis gear cover.

nozzle station, conveyor, Y-axis linear scale, the top of the coplanarity sensor (option)
or the coplanarity sensor linear scale. If grease has spilled onto any of these areas, wipe
it off using a lint free clean dry cloth.

<M3(S) modules>
(6) XS-axis gear 1.4
NS7 (NSK) or Multemp SRL (Kyodo (2) X-axis ballscrew 0.24

Yushi)
(4) Y-axis ballscrew 0.81
(7) XS-axis ballscrew 0.09
(8) XS-axis LM guides 0.9
3. Remove the X-axis gear cover and the XS-axis gear cover.
9. Use the grease gun to apply 0.24 cc of NS7 or Multemp SRL to the grease fitting of the
CAUTION
may be deformed.

<X-axis/Y-axis>
1 5
4
1
5
5
3
2
3
X-axis gear cover
<XS-axis>
8
7
8 6
8
To grease fittings
Use brush XS-axis gear cover NXTBAS020d
Lubricating the XS-axis
15.Wipe off any filth from the XS-axis gears (6) with a clean cloth.
16.Apply 1.4 cc of Mobilith SHC100 to a brush.
17.Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the XS-axis gear teeth (6).
18.Wipe off any filth from the XS-axis ballscrew (7) with a clean cloth.
19.Wipe off any filth from the XS-axis LM guide rails with a clean cloth.
20.Apply 0.09 cc of NS7 or Multemp SRL to a brush.
21.Spread the grease on the XS-axis ballscrew (7).
XS-axis LM guides (8).

24.Move the XS-axis unit right and left in the XS-axis direction (one full stroke) to lubricate
CAUTION
may be deformed.
26.Wipe off any filth from the Y-axis ballscrew with a clean cloth.
Y-axis ballscrew (4).
CAUTION
may be deformed.
34.Reattach the X-axis gear cover and the XS-axis gear cover.
nozzle station, or the conveyor. If grease has spilled onto any of these areas, wipe it
off using a lint free clean dry cloth.
37.Return the module to the machine. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a
Module".)

6.7.2 Lubricating the flat cable for the X-axis and Y-axis
WARNING
magnetic field.
CAUTION
may be deformed.
tools.
Linear motor shaft
Linear scale

G501 (Shinetsu) (K30315) M3(S) (1) X-axis flat cable 0.8
(2) Y-axis flat cable (LH) 1
(3) Y-axis flat cable (RH) 0.6
M6(S) (4) X-axis flat cable 0.8
(5) Y-axis flat cable 2
3. When performing lubrication for the M6S module, wait until the shaft for the linear motor
cools to room temperature and then set the protective covers on the shaft.
Linear motor coil

Linear motor shaft
Linear scale
M6S module
Protective covers
NXTBAS275Eb
4. Open the front cover.
5. Remove the connector for the signal tower.
Connector
01MEC-0015E

6. Remove the bolts (4) which are securing the top cover.
Top cover
01MEC-0016E
7. Remove the top cover. The top cover is held in place by a hook located in the rear of the
module. To remove the top cover, slide the cover forward and then lift up.
Top cover
Hook
01MEC-0017E
8. Wipe the flat cables with a clean cloth.

9. Apply the specified grease to the flat cables with a brush. (For the amount of grease,
refer to the table shown in this section.)
M3(S)
(2) (3)
Y-axis
(1)
(1) (1)
X-axis
01MEC-0428E
M6(S)
Y-axis (5)
(5)
(4)
(4)
X-axis
01MEC-0429E

nozzle station, conveyor, Y-axis linear scale (M6(S) only), the top of the coplanarity
sensor (option) or the coplanarity sensor linear scale. If grease has spilled onto any of
these areas, wipe it off using a lint free clean dry cloth.
Coplanarity sensor linear scale
Linear motor shaft
Linear scale
Protective covers M6S Module

01MEC-0971E
11.After performing lubrication, attach the top cover by reversing the procedures used
when removing the top cover.

6.7.3 Lubricating H04/H08/H12(S)/H12HS head (arm rotation axis)
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) Arm rotation axis 0.002
1. Remove the placing head and place it on the head maintenance stand. (Refer to section
5.8 "Removing/Attaching a Placing Head" for details.)
1. Wipe off any foreign matter from the arm rotation axis and other moving parts using an
item such as a cotton swab.
2. Use an item such as a cotton swab to apply 0.002 cc of Daphne Eponex No. 2 grease
to the arm rotation axis of the stepping motor and the other moving parts around it.
Arm
NXTPHD042E
3. Turn the arm rotation axis several times to spread the lubricant.
4. Wipe off any excess grease with a clean cotton swab.

6.7.4 Lubricating the Q-axis gear and R-axis gear on the H12HS
head
Mobilith SHC460WT (Mobil) (1) Q-axis gear (upper, 0.138

motor side)
(2) R-axis gear 0.224
1. Remove the placing head and set it on the head maintenance stand. (Refer to section
2. Remove the cover.
3. Wipe off any excess grease with a clean cotton swab.
4. Wipe off from the Q-axis gear (1) and the R-axis gear (2) with a clean cloth.
5. Apply 0.138 cc of Mobilith SHC460WT to a brush.
6. Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the Q-axis gear teeth (1) .
8. Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the R-axis gear teeth (2).
9. Rotate the Q-axis gear (1) and the R-axis gear (2) by hand to lubricate the gear teeth
evenly.
Cover
1
01MEC-0904E

6.7.5 Lubricating the conveyor panel clamp parts
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) (1) Clamp rails 3.75
Biral T&D (Sugai Chemical Industry) (2) Clamp pins 0.37
MDV235-ZB (Kuroda) (K3032K) (3) O-rings (on the vacuum 0.01

backup connector)
2. Remove the backup plates.
3. Wipe off any filth the clamp rails (1) with a clean cloth.
5. Use the brush to evenly spread the grease on the clamp rail (1).
6. Wipe and clean the clamp pin (2) with a clean cloth.
7. Apply one spray shot of the Biral T&D to each clamp pin (2).
8. Wipe off any excess grease with a clean cloth.
9. Apply 0.01 cc of MDV235-ZB to a brush.
10.Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the O-ring (3).
11.Reattach the backup plates.
Module".)

<Double conveyor>
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(2)
(2) (2)
(2)
(14 positions)
(2 positions) (2)
01MEC-0163Ea
<Single conveyor>
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(2)
(2) (2)
(2)
(7 positions)
(2)
01MEC-0164Ea

6.7.6 Cleaning the H01 sleeve assembly <for heads without flange
filter>
If there is no flange filter, clean the head sleeve assembly.
Flange
Filter
01MEC-0663E
When preparing to clean the head sleeve assembly, it is highly recommended to have 2
spares of each of spare part shown below.
1. Vacuum pad (H1339A)

2. O-ring (A5202W)
3. Spring (PZ0933*)
NXTPHD112E
for details.)
2. Put a 2.5 mm Allen wrench in the hole at the top of the head and use it to turn the
ballscrew until the Z-axis has been fully lowered.
Wrench
NXTPHD106E

3. Remove the head side cover.
Cover
NXTPHD107E
4. Remove the bolts shown in the diagram and then move the bracket.
Bolts
Bracket
Bolts
NXTPHD108E
Note: A short ended 2.5 mm Allen wrench is required to remove these bolts.
5. Set the Q-axis gear fixing jig in the holes in the Q-axis gear.
Q-axis gear
Q-axis gear fixing jig
NXTPHD109E
Gear holes (the jig pins fit in here)

6. Lock the Q-axis in place and using an 8 mm spanner, loosen the sleeve assembly.
Sleeve assembly
Spanner (8 mm)
NXTPHD110E
7. Remove the sleeve assembly from the placing head.
Sleeve assembly
NXTPHD111E
Note: There are cases when the vacuum pad comes off. Be careful to not lose it.
8. Take apart the sleeve assembly.
Vacuum pad
Sleeve assembly
O-ring
Spring
Cap
NXTPHD113E

9. Use an air gun to remove any grime from the spring and internal section of the sleeve
assembly. Use a cloth to clean and wipe off any grime that was not removed.
Sleeve assembly Spring
NXTPHD114E
10.After cleaning the parts, lubricate the sleeve assembly O-ring and spring. Then put back
together the sleeve assembly. Ensure that the up and down movement of the shaft with
the attached vacuum pad is smooth.
Used grease: MDV235-ZB (Kuroda)

(Manufacture type: K3032K)
Vacuum pad
Sleeve assembly
O-ring
Spring
Cap
Shaft
NXTPHD115Eb
11.Follow the removal steps in reverse order to reattach the sleeve assembly back into the
H01 head.

6.7.7 Cleaning the tray unit-M

1. Remove the tray unit-M from the machine. (Refer to section 5.11 "Attaching/Removing
a Tray Unit-M" for details.)
2. Clean the surfaces of the shuttle and magazine belts with a dry, clean cloth.
Magazine belt Shuttle belt
NXTMTU073E

6.8 Yearly Maintenance (Every 8000 Hrs)

6.8.1 Cleaning the air regulator

2. Remove the cover from the base.
3. Turn OFF the air supply at the air inlet valve, and allow the air pressure in the air piping
to decompress.
4. Push down on the lock knob, turn the filter case and remove.
5. Clean the filter case using a neutral detergent.
6. Clean the filter element using a high-pressure air-gun, or replace if excessively dirty.
Cover
Filter regulator
Mist separator
O-ring
Fiter element
Maker: SMC
Model: AF30P-060S
Lock knob
Filter case
NXTBAS021E

6.8.2 Lubricating the nozzle changer up/down shafts
Biral T&D (Sugai Chemical Industry) Up/down shafts (with 0.9

lubrication holes)
Up/down shafts (without 1.8

lubrication holes)
There are nozzle changers that have lubrication holes for the shafts and there are nozzle
changers without these lubrication holes. The procedures for lubricating the shafts are
different depending on this condition. Use the procedure that is applicable for the type of
nozzle changer present.
Lubrication hole Lubrication points label
Lubrication hole
NXTNZC029E
Nozzle changer with lubrication holes Nozzle changer without lubrication holes
For a nozzle changer with lubrication holes
1. Pull forward the module. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module".)
2. Remove the nozzle station.
Nozzle station
(2)
(1)
Lever
NXTNZC002Eb

3. Apply 0.9 cc of lubricant (Biral T&D) to each of the lubrication holes.
NXTNCZ030
For a nozzle changer without lubrication holes

For nozzle changers without the lubrication holes, use a jig to apply lubricant to the up/down
shafts.
Jig (AA4CM0*)
Lubricate shafts
AIMNZC009E
1. Use the nozzle station exchange command in manual mode to remove the nozzle
station. Refer to section 5.9 "Removing/Attaching a Nozzle Station" for details on
performing this action.
Note: When the nozzle station exchange command is used, the nozzle changer is raised and
exposes the locations on the shafts to be lubricated.
2. In order to not get any grease on the parts camera, cover the parts camera with some
type of cover such as cloth.
3. Push the jig firmly against the top of the nozzle changer while pushing in the direction of
the arrows shown below depending on the shaft being lubricated. With the jig in place,
insert the nozzle of the Biral T&D lubricant into the jig and apply a small amount of
lubricant (approximately 0.5 seconds).
Caution: It is necessary to use the tube supplied with the Biral T&D (2.2 mm in diameter). If a
different diameter tube is used, then the proper amount of lubricate cannot be applied or
the lubricant will not go to the correct place.
Note: If the jig strap is placed around the hand when using the jig, then the jig cannot be dropped
while using it.

Lubricate the back side nozzle
Tube attached Back side

to Biral T&D Shaft Jig
Nozzle
changer
Jig
Front side
AIMNZC006E
Lubricate the front side nozzle
Tube attached
Back side
to Biral T&D
Nozzle
changer
Shaft Jig
Jig
Front side
AIMNZC007E
4. Reattach the nozzle station. Refer to section 5.9 "Removing/Attaching a Nozzle Station"
for details.
5. Return the module to the machine and when production is started, the nozzle changer
is automatically lowered.

6.8.3 Cleaning the half mirror of the mark camera light source
2. Place cleaning paper (A4565T) or a lens-cleaning cloth over a cotton swab and wipe the
half mirror of the mark camera light source.
Half mirror Mark camera
Cleaning paper (A4565T)
01MEC-0025Ea

6.8.4 Cleaning the parts camera lens

1. Pull out the module. (Refer to " 5.1 Pulling Out/Returning a Module ".)
2. Turn off the NXT machine by turning the main switch off.
WARNING
• Always turn the machine main switch OFF before performing this
work.
3. Wait until the shaft for the linear motor cools to room temperature and then set the
WARNING
module could cause burns. Do not contact the shaft or coil section
immediately after production is stopped.

modules. People with a heart pacemaker should stay clear of the
shaft and coil sections of the linear motor (maintain a distance of
400 mm or more). Pacemakers may malfunction because of the
magnetic field.
CAUTION
may be deformed.
• When working close to the linear motor (within 55 mm) do not use
ordinary metal tools. Use only nonmagnetic tools.

precision machines away from the linear motor (do not bring within
55 mm).
• Do not hit the linear scale when exchanging the head and
performing maintenance. If the linear scale is damaged then errors
will occur and production may not be possible. In this case it will
be necessary to replace the linear scale.

Linear motor shaft
Linear scale
X-axis gear cover
Protective cover 01MEC-0326Ea
4. Loosen and remove the four (4) screws securing the cover using a driver.
Screws (M3 x 4)
Cover
NXTPCA003E
5. Gently remove the cover and then disconnect the two electrical connectors.
Connectors
NXTPCA005E

6. Use an Allen wrench to loosen and remove the four stud bolts. Gently remove the
lighting unit.
Stud bolt
(4 mm Allen wrench required)
Stud bolt identification
No groove One groove Two grooves

(Standard and (High reso- (Sidelight
P03 camera) lution camera) type camera)
Lighting unit
Lens 01MEC-0201Ea
7. Use cleaning paper (A4565T) to remove any foreign items and to clean the lens.
Lens
01MEC-0967E
Caution: Do not apply too much pressure when cleaning the lens in order to avoid damaging it.
8. Follow the removal steps in reverse order to reassemble the parts camera unit.
Caution: When attaching the lighting unit in the machine, be careful to not pinch wires under the
lighting stand legs or bolts. A pinched wire may cause a short.
9. Remove the protective cover from the linear motor shaft.
10.Turn on the main switch and turn on the module.
11.Push the module back to its original position. (Refer to " 5.1 Pulling Out/Returning a
Module ".)
6.8.5 Replacing the placing head vacuum filters <H04, H08, H12(S) and
H12HS heads>
Replace the placing head vacuum filters with new ones. (Refer to section 6.5.5 "Cleaning
the placing head vacuum filters".)

6.9 12000 Hr Maintenance

6.9.1 Cleaning the mist separator filter

3. Turn OFF the air supply at the air inlet valve, and allow the air pressure in the air piping
to decompress.
4. Rotate the filter element assembly and remove.
Cover
Filter regulator
Mist separator
Element assembly
Maker: SMC
Model: AM-EL350
NXTBAS022Eb

6.9.2 Cleaning the vacuum pump filter

2. Turn off the main switch.
4. Allow the pressure in the vacuum supply piping to decompress.
5. Loosen the bolt and remove the filter case.
6. Clean the filter case using a neutral detergent.
Cover
Vacuum pump
Filter element
Filter case
Bolt
NXTBAS003Ea

6.9.3 Cleaning the tray unit-L fan filter
CAUTION
Do not perform this work while the fan is operating. It is possible

that hands or other body parts can be injured by the fan.
Do not perform this work during production. Because the brake

cover is removed, it is possible for hands or other body parts to
become caught and injured in the TZ-axis items.
1. Remove the two M5 bolts from the brake cover and then remove the cover.
2. Remove the fan filter holder.
3. Remove the filter for the fan.
4. Use compressed air to clean the filter. If the filter is very dirty, replace it with a new filter.
Brake cover
Fan filter cover
Filter
M5 bolts
NXTMTU047E
5. Return the filter and the filter cover and reattach the brake cover using the M5 bolts.

6.9.4 Replacing and lubricating the placing head mechanical valve

O-rings
Replacing the O-rings
for details.)
3. Remove the bolts from the mechanical valve retainers for the valves to exchange, and
then remove the retainers.
4. Gently pull up on the mechanical valves and take them out.

and H12HS heads.
Mechanical valve
Cover
Bolt tightening torque:

0.35 Nm
Mechanical valve retainer
NXTPHD009Ed
5. By using something such as fingernails, pull up on the O-ring for the mechanical valve.
Then insert the pointed end of the mechanical valve O-ring exchange tool (PM072M*)
in the created gap and then remove the O-ring. Remove all six O-rings in the same
manner.
O-ring exchange tool
Mechanical valve 01MEC-0569E

6. Slide the new O-rings on the mechanical valve O-ring exchange tool from the pointed
end. Insert the mechanical valve into the O-ring exchange tool. Align a position on the
mechanical valve that has an O-ring groove with the end of the tool and then slide an O-
ring into the groove. Repeat for all 6 O-rings.
O-ring exchange tool
Mechanical valve
O-ring
Groove
01MEC-0571E
Lubricating the O-rings

7. Apply 0.003 cc of MDV235-ZB to a brush.
8. Use the brush to lightly grease the surface of the O-rings on the mechanical valve.
MDV235-ZB (Kuroda) (K3032K) Mechanical valve O-rings 0.003
9. Return the mechanical valve back to its position, set the valve retainer and then secure
with the bolt by tightening it to a torque of 0.35 Nm.
Caution: Do not overtighten. If overtightened the threads for the bolt on the head will be damaged
and the head will need to be replaced.

6.9.5 Lubricating the H01 head
Mobilith SHC460WT (Mobil) (1) Q-axis gear 0.1
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) (2) Z-axis ballscrew 0.117
(3) Z-axis LM guide 0.292
2. Wipe off filth from the Q-axis gear (1) with a clean cloth.
4. Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the Q-axis gear teeth (1).
5. Rotate the Q-axis (1) by hand to lubricate the gear teeth evenly.
6. Wipe off filth from the Z-axis ballscrew (2) with a clean cloth.
8. Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the Z-axis ball screw (2).
9. Wipe off filth from the Z-axis LM guide rail (3) with a clean cloth.
10.Apply 0.292 cc of Daphne Eponex No. 2 to a brush.
11.Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the surface of the rail of the Z-axis LM guide
(3).
12.Move the Z-axis up and down by hand to lubricate the ballscrew and LM guide evenly.
1
3
NXTPHD011b

Mobilith SHC460WT (Mobil) (1) Q-axis gears 0.1
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (2) Z1-axes ball screws 0.117

(Idemitsu)
(2) Z2-axes ball screws 0.117
(3) Z1-axes LM guides 0.292
(3) Z2-axes LM guides 0.292
There is a brake on top of the placing head to prevent the Z-axes from dropping. When
moving the Z-axes during these procedures, squeeze the Z-axes brake using your fingers
to release the brake (refer to the diagram).
2. Remove the cover that is covering the Z-axes brake area.
3. While holding the ball nuts for the Z-axes ball screws, squeeze both sides of the Z-axes
brake using your fingers to release the brake and gently move the axes to their lowest
positions (fully extended).
4. Wipe off any filth from the Q-axes gears (1) with a clean cloth.
6. Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the Q-axis gear teeth (1).
7. Rotate the Q-axes gears (1) by hand to work in the grease evenly.
8. Wipe off any filth from the Z1- and Z2-axis ball screws (2) with a clean cloth.
10.Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to Z1 and Z2-axis ball screws (2). Apply 0.117
cc of grease to each of the Z1 and Z2-axis ball screws.
11.While holding the ball nuts for the Z-axes ball screws, squeeze both sides of the Z-axes
brake using your fingers to release the brake and gently move the axes to their highest
positions (fully retracted).
12.Wipe off any filth from the Z1- and Z2-axis LM guides (3) with a clean cloth.
13.Apply 0.292 cc of Daphne Eponex No. 2 to a brush.
14.Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the surface of the rails of the Z1 and Z2-axis
LM guides. Apply 0.292 cc of grease to each of the Z1 and Z2-axis LM guides.
Caution: If grease gets on the flange, remove it with a clean cloth.
15.Manually move the Z-axes up and down several times to work in the grease.

17.Attach the cover for the Z-axes brake back on the placing head.
Cover
Z1-axis Z2-axis
Z-axes drop
prevention brake
2
2
1
1
1
Z1- and Z2-axes ball nuts

Flange
3
3
3
Apply to the entire 3
surface of the rail sides
Z1- and Z2-axes LM guides 01MEC-0461Ea


<gears, z-axis>
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (1) Z-axis ballscrew 0.082

(Idemitsu)
(2) Z-axis guide shaft 0.078
(3) Cam followers of the stepping motor 0.005
Mobilith SHC460WT (4) Q-axis gear (upper, motor side) 0.18

(Mobil)
2. Remove the side cover.
3. Wipe off filth from the Z-axis ballscrew (1) and the Z-axis guide shaft (2) with a clean
cloth.
5. Use the brush to apply grease evenly to the Z-axis ballscrew (1).
7. Use the brush to apply grease evenly to the Z-axis guide shafts (2).
8. Move the Z-axis up and down by hand to lubricate the ballscrew and the guide shaft
evenly.
10.Use an item such as a cotton swab to wipe off any foreign matter from the stepping
motor cam followers (3).
11.Use an item such as a cotton swab to apply 0.005 cc of Daphne Eponex No.2 to the
interior and circumference of the stepping motor cam followers (3).
12.Wipe off any excess grease with a clean cotton swab.
13.Wipe off from the Q-axis gear (4) and the R-axis gear (5) with a clean cloth.
14.Apply 0.18 cc of Mobilith SHC460WT to a brush.
15.Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the Q-axis gear teeth (4) .
17.Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the R-axis gear teeth (5).
18.Rotate the Q-axis gear (4) and the R-axis gear (5) by hand to lubricate the gear teeth
evenly.

Cover
3
3
NXTPHD020Eb

6.9.8 Lubricating the H08/H12(S) head

<gears, z-axis>
Required grease Application location Amount (cc)
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (1) Z-axis ballscrew 0.07

(Idemitsu)
(2) Z-axis guide shaft 0.063 <H08>,
0.059 <H12(S)>
(3) Cam follower of the stepping motor 0.004
Mobilith SHC460WT (4) Q-axis gear (upper, motor side) 0.138

(Mobil)
cloth.
6. Apply Daphne Eponex No.2 to a brush. Use 0.063 cc for H08 heads, and 0.059 cc for
H12(S) heads.
evenly.
13.Wipe off from the Q-axis gear (4) and the R-axis gear (5) with a clean cloth.
15.Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the Q-axis gear teeth (4) .
17.Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the R-axis gear teeth (5).
18.Rotate the Q-axis gear (4) and the R-axis gear (5) by hand to lubricate the gear teeth
evenly.

5
4
1
Cover
3
3
NXTPHD010Ef

6.9.9 Lubricating the H12HS head

<Gears, Z-axis>
NS7 (NSK) or Multemp SRL (Kyodo Yushi) (1) Z-axis ballscrew 0.058
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) (2) Z-axis guide shaft 0.064
(3) Cam follower of the 0.004

stepping motor
cloth.
4. Apply 0.058 cc of NS7 or Multemp SRL to a brush.
evenly.

Cover
3
3
01MEC-0195Eb

6.9.10 Lubricating the waste tape processing unit
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) LM guides 0.19
WARNING
Do not insert fingers or any other body parts in the waste tape
processing duct. There could be injury from the sharp cutter
(blade).
2. Wipe off filth from the LM guides with a clean cloth.
3. Use the grease gun to apply 0.19 cc of Daphne Eponex No.2 to the grease fittings of
each of the LM guide blocks.
5. Move the slider unit up and down (one full stroke) by hand to lubricate the LM guides.
LM guide blocks
Duct
01MEC-0410E
7. Attach the waste tape processing unit to the module. (Refer to section 8.4 "Replacing
the Waste Tape Processing Unit" for details.)

6.9.11 Lubricating the double conveyor
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) (1) LM guides for width change 0.24
(2) Ballscrews for width change 3.75
The lubrication amount given in the table is for one entire ball screw.
3. Remove the backup plates. (Refer to section 5.10 "Exchanging Backup Plates".)
4. Wipe off any filth from the LM guides and the ballscrews with a clean cloth.
5. Use the grease gun to apply 0.24 cc of Daphne Eponex No. 2 to each of the grease
fittings for the LM guides (1).
7. Use the brush to evenly spread the grease on the width change ballscrew shafts (2).
Apply lubricant to all of the width change ballscrews.
8. Move the rails (lane1 adjustable, lane2 reference and lane2 adjustable rails) up and
down (one full stroke) by hand to lubricate the LM guides and the ballscrews.
9. Wipe off any excess grease from the ballscrews and the LM guides with a clean cloth.
Lane2 adjustable rail
Lane2 reference rail (2)
Lane1 adjustable rail
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
Use brush
Use grease gun

(1)
NXTBAS212Ea
Module".)

6.9.12 Lubricating the single conveyor
4. Wipe off any filth from the LM guides and the ballscrews with a clean cloth.
8. Move the adjustable rail up and down (one full stroke) by hand to lubricate the LM guides
and the ballscrews.
Adjustable rail (2)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Use brush
Use grease gun (1) NXTBAS213Ea
Module".)

6.9.13 Lubricating the single conveyor S
NS7 (NSK) or Multemp SRL (3) CZ 軸 ballscrews 0.9

(Kyodo Yushi)
Lubricating the LM guides and ballscrews
4. Wipe off any filth from the LM guides (1) and the ballscrews (2) with a clean cloth.
8. Move the adjustable rail up and down (one full stroke) by hand to lubricate the LM guides
and the ballscrews.
Lubricating the CZ-axis ballscrews
10.Pull on the drive belt to rotate and raise the CZ-axis.
11.Wipe off any filth from the CZ-axis ballscrews (3) with a clean cloth.
12.Apply 0.9 cc of NS7 or Multemp SRL to a brush.
13.Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the CZ-axis ballscrews (3). Apply grease
to each of the ball screws.
14.Pull on the drive belt to rotate and move the CZ-axes up and down (one full stroke) by
hand to lubricate the axes.
15.Wipe off any excess grease from the CZ-axes with a clean cloth.

Adjustable rail
(2)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Use brush
(1)
Use grease gun
4 places
NXTBAS265Eb
16.Attach the backup plates. (Refer to section 5.10 "Exchanging Backup Plates".)
Module".)

6.9.14 Checking the conveyor belt tension

1. Prepare the tension meter.
2. Pull the module forward.
3. When measuring the tension of the belt for the M3 conveyor, remove the screw securing
the belt cleaner and remove the cleaner. This is only necessary for the M3 conveyor.
(Refer to section 7.2 "Replacing the Conveyor Belt Cleaner".)
Belt cleaner
㧨M3(S) module㧪
01MEC-0592E
4. Measure the belt tension using the tension meter positioned at the locations below. If
the tension is outside the range, use the tension pulley to adjust the tension until it is
within range.
M3(S) and M6(S) Tension when Permissible tension

modules adjusting (Hz) (Hz)
Lane 1 233.1 ~ 284.9 65 ~ 284.9
Lane 2 171 ~ 209 48 ~ 209
Note: Stretching of the conveyor belt occurs during operation. If the tension exceeds the
permissible range, then adjust the tension to be within the range of the “Tension when
adjusting” column.
㧨M3(S) module㧪
Measuring Measuring position

position Tension pulley
Lane 2 Lane 1 NXTBAS137E

㧨M6(S) module㧪 Tension pulley
Measuring Measuring position

position
Lane 2 Lane 1 NXTBAS136Ea
㧨M6S single conveyor S㧪

Tension pulley
Measuring position
NXTBAS270Ea
In addition, clean the belt cleaner.
㧨M3(S) module㧪
Belt cleaner
NXTBAS219Ea
㧨M6(S) module㧪㧨M6S single conveyor S㧪
Belt cleaner Belt cleaner
NXTBAS220Ea

6.9.15 Checking the single conveyor S belt tension

Obtain the tension meter necessary to measure the tensions of the various belts before
starting these procedures.
<CZ-axis belt tension>

1. Measure the tension of the belt in the places indicated below. Ensure that the tension
at the middle of the front section of the belt is 60.0 ± 10.0 Hz, and the tension at the
middle of the right side of the belt is 55.0 ± 10.0 Hz.
60.0 5.0 Hz 55.0 5.0 Hz
NXTBAS266a
2. If the tension is outside of the ranges listed above, adjust the tension belt until it is within
the correct range. Adjust the tension by loosening the fixing bolts for the motor and
turning the adjustment bolt, as shown in the picture below.
Fixing bolts
Adjustment bolt
NXTBAS274aE

<Loading belt tension>

1. Measure the tension of the belt in the place indicated below. Ensure that the tension in
the middle of the belt is 175.0 ± 10.0 Hz.
175.0 10.0 Hz
NXTBAS268a
2. If the tension is outside of the range listed above, adjust the tension belt until it is within
the correct range. Adjust the tension by loosening the fixing bolts for the motor.
Fixing bolts
NXTBAS272E
Note: A special jig is required to adjust the tension of the belt.

<Width change belt tension>

1. Measure the tension of the belt in the place indicated below. Ensure that the tension in
the middle of the belt is 175.0 ± 10.0 Hz.
175.0 10.0 Hz
NXTBAS269a
2. If the tension is outside of the range listed above, adjust the tension belt until it is within
the correct range. Adjust the tension by loosening the fixing bolts for the motor.
Fixing bolts
NXTBAS273E
Note: A special jig is required to adjust the tension of the belt.

6.9.16 Lubricating the tray unit-L moving parts

<TZ-axis ballscrews>
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) TZ-axis ballscrews 0.54
1. Remove the tray unit-L from the machine. (Refer to section 5.5 "Inserting/Removing a
Tray Unit-L".)
2. Remove the tray unit-L covers. (Refer to section 8.18 "Detaching and Attaching the Tray
Unit-L Cover".)
3. Wipe off any filth from the TZ-axis ballscrews with a clean cloth.
4. Use the grease gun to apply 0.54 cc of Daphne Eponex No.2 to the grease fittings of
each of the TZ-axis ball screws.
5. Rotate the TZ-axis by hand (move the magazine rack up and down, one full stroke) to
lubricate the ballscrews.
Note that the TZ-axis is locked when power is off, therefore for this operation it is
necessary to loosen the coupling of the brake unit. (Refer to section 8.18 "Detaching and
Attaching the Tray Unit-L Cover" for details.)
NXTMTU037
7. Attach the tray unit-L covers. (Refer to section 8.18 "Detaching and Attaching the Tray
Unit-L Cover".)
8. Insert the tray unit-L to the machine. (Refer to section 5.5 "Inserting/Removing a Tray
Unit-L".)

<Lifting gears>
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) Lifting gears 0.92
1. Remove the tray unit-L from the machine. (Refer to section 5.5 "Inserting/Removing a
Tray Unit-L".)
2. Remove the tray unit-L covers. (Refer to section 8.18 "Detaching and Attaching the Tray
Unit-L Cover".)
3. Wipe off any filth from the lifting gears with a clean cloth.
5. Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to gears of the lifter.
Handle
NXTMTU040Ea
6. Turn the handle several turns by hand to lubricate the gears.
8. Attach the tray unit-L covers. (Refer to section 8.18 "Detaching and Attaching the Tray
Unit-L Cover".)
9. Insert the tray unit-L to the machine. (Refer to section 5.5 "Inserting/Removing a Tray
Unit-L".)

6.9.17 Checking the tray unit-L belt tension

Obtain the tension meter necessary to measure the tension of the various belts before
starting these procedures. In addition, remove the tray unit-L from the machine. (Refer to
section 5.5 "Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-L" for details.)
<TZ-axis belt tension>

1. Measure the belt tension in the middle of the longest span of the belt as indicated below.
Ensure that the tension is 46.1 ± 2.3 Hz.
46.1 2.3 Hz
NXTMTU038
2. If the tension is outside of this range, adjust the belt tension until it is within the correct
range. Lightly loosen the pulley fixing bolts and then use the adjusting bolt to adjust the
tension. Ensure that the tension is still within range after retightening the pulley fixing
bolts.
Adjusting bolt
Pulley fixing bolts

NXTMTU039E

<TY-axis belt tension>

38.8 1.9 Hz
NXTMTU041
range. Lightly loosen the tension pulley fixing bolts. Loosen the lock nut on the
adjusting bolt and then use the adjusting bolt to adjust the tension. Ensure that the
tension is still within range after retightening the tension pulley fixing bolts.
Adjusting bolt
Lock nut
Tension pulley
fixing bolts
NXTMTU042E

<TY-axis motor gear belt tension>

Ensure that the tension is 380 ± 19 Hz.
380 1.9 Hz
NXTMTU043
range. Lightly loosen the motor bracket fixing bolts. Loosen the lock nut on the
tension is still within range after retightening the motor bracket fixing bolts.
Adjusting bolt
Lock nut
Motor bracket fixing bolts NXTMTU044E

6.9.18 Lubricating the tray unit-LT moving parts

<TZ1/TZ2-axis ballscrews>
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) TZ1/TZ2-axis ballscrews 0.5
1. Remove the tray unit-LT from the machine. (Refer to section 5.6 "Inserting/Removing a
Tray Unit-LT".)
2. Remove the tray unit-LT covers. (Refer to section 8.20 "Removing Tray Unit-LT
Covers".)
4. Use the grease gun to apply 0.5 cc of Daphne Eponex No.2 to the grease fittings of each
of the TZ-axis ball screws.
Tray unit-LT
01MEC-0227
6. Attach the tray unit-LT covers. (Refer to section 8.20 "Removing Tray Unit-LT Covers".)
7. Insert the tray unit-LT to the machine. (Refer to section 5.6 "Inserting/Removing a Tray
Unit-LT".)

<Lifting gears>
1. Remove the tray unit-LT from the machine. (Refer to section 5.6 "Inserting/Removing a
Tray Unit-LT".)
2. Remove the tray unit-LT covers. (Refer to section 8.20 "Removing Tray Unit-LT
Covers".)
Handle
01MEC-0228E
8. Attach the tray unit-LT covers. (Refer to section 8.20 "Removing Tray Unit-LT Covers".)
9. Insert the tray unit-LT to the machine. (Refer to section 5.6 "Inserting/Removing a Tray
Unit-LT".)

6.9.19 Checking and adjusting the tray unit-LT belt tension

starting these procedures. In addition, remove the tray unit-LT from the machine. (Refer to
section 5.6 "Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-LT" for details.)
<TZ1/TZ2-axis belt tension>

Ensure that the tension is within the specified value.
Belt tension Specified value (Hz)
TZ1-axis 58 - 63
TZ2-axis 58 - 63
Tray unit-LT
TZ1
TZ2
01MEC-0229b

bolts.
Tray unit-LT
Fixing bolts
(TZ2)
Fixing bolts
(TZ1)
Tension pulley
Adjusting bolt
01MEC-0230E

<TY-axis belt tension (shuttle)>

TY-axis (shuttle) 37 - 40
Tray unit-LT
01MEC-0231a
Tray unit-LT
Tension pulley
Adjusting bolt
Lock nut
Fixing bolts
01MEC-0232E


TY-axis motor gear 344 - 379
Tray unit-LT
01MEC-0233b
Tray unit-LT
Adjusting bolt
Lock nut
Motor bracket fixing bolts 01MEC-0234E

6.9.20 Lubricating the tray unit-LTC moving parts

<TZ1/TZ2-axis ballscrews>
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) TZ1/TZ2-axis ballscrews 0.5
1. Remove the tray unit-LTC from the machine. (Refer to section 5.7 "Inserting/Removing
a Tray Unit-LTC".)
2. Remove the tray unit-LTC covers. (Refer to " 8.22 Removing Tray Unit-LTC Covers ".)
4. Use the grease gun to apply 0.5 cc of Daphne Eponex No.2 to the grease fittings of each
of the TZ-axis ball screws.
Tray unit-LTC
01MEC-0510
6. Attach the tray unit-LTC covers. (Refer to " 8.22 Removing Tray Unit-LTC Covers ".)
7. Insert the tray unit-LTC to the machine. (Refer to section 5.7 "Inserting/Removing a Tray
Unit-LTC".)

<Lifting gears>
1. Remove the tray unit-LTC from the machine. (Refer to section 5.7 "Inserting/Removing
a Tray Unit-LTC".)
2. Remove the tray unit-LTC covers. (Refer to " 8.22 Removing Tray Unit-LTC Covers ".)
Handle
01MEC-0511E
8. Attach the tray unit-LTC covers. (Refer to " 8.22 Removing Tray Unit-LTC Covers ".)
9. Insert the tray unit-LTC to the machine. (Refer to section 5.7 "Inserting/Removing a Tray
Unit-LTC".)

6.9.21 Checking and adjusting the tray unit-LTC belt tension

starting these procedures. In addition, remove the tray unit-LTC from the machine. (Refer
to " 5.7 Inserting/Removing a Tray Unit-LTC " for details.)
<TZ1/TZ2-axis belt tension>

TZ1-axis 95 - 104
TZ2-axis 95 - 104
Tray unit-LTC
TZ2
TZ1
01MEC-0512

bolts.
Tray unit-LTC
Fixing bolts
(TZ2)
Fixing bolts
(TZ1)
Adjusting bolt
Tension pulley
01MEC-0513E

<TY-axis belt tension (shuttle)>

TY-axis (shuttle) 37 - 40
Tray unit-LTC
01MEC-0514
Tray unit-LTC Tension pulley
Adjusting bolt
Lock nut
Fixing bolts
01MEC-0515E


TY-axis motor gear 344 - 379
Tray unit-LTC
01MEC-0516
Tray unit-LTC
⺞ᢛࡏ࡞࠻
ࡠ࠶ࠢ࠽࠶࠻
࿕ቯࡏ࡞࠻
01MEC-0517J

6.9.22 Lubricating the tray unit-M TY-axis clutches
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) TY-axis clutches 0.06
2. Remove the covers of the tray unit-M.
Covers
01MEC-0425Ea
3. Wipe off any filth from the TY-axis clutch with a clean cloth.

5. Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the area where the TY-axis clutches come
together.
Clutches
Lubricate the area where

the clutches come together.
NXTMTU076E
7. Attach the covers of the tray unit-M.

6.9.23 Lubricating the tray stoppers of the tray unit-M
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (Idemitsu) Tray stopper pins 0.115
Tray stopper pin drive shaft 0.375
2. Remove the covers of the tray unit-M.
Covers
01MEC-0425Ea
Lubricating the stopper pins (10)
3. Wipe off any filth from the stopper pins with a clean cloth.
5. Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the areas indicated below.
Apply a thin layer to the side

that does not contact the tray.
Tray stopper
Tray
Magazin belt
01MEC-0426E

Lubricating the drive shaft
7. Wipe off any filth from the stopper pin drive shaft with a clean cloth.
9. Use the brush to apply the grease evenly to the drive shaft.
10.Manually move the drive shaft right and left to lubricate the shaft.
Stopper pin
push shaft
01MEC-0430E
12.Attach the covers of the tray unit-M.

6.9.24 Checking the tray unit-M belt tension

starting these procedures. In addition, remove the tray unit-M from the machine. (Refer to
section 5.11 "Attaching/Removing a Tray Unit-M" for details.)
<TZ-axis belt tension (motor side)>

TZ-axis belt
245.0 10.0 Hz
NXTMTU077E
range. Lightly loosen the motor fixing bolts and then use the adjusting bolt to adjust the
tension. Ensure that the tension is still within range after retightening the motor fixing
bolts.
Adjusting bolt
Motor fixing bolts NXTMTU078E

<TZ-axis belt tension (belt on the magazine side)>

TZ-axis belt
60.0 3.0 Hz
NXTMTU079E
bolts.
Adjusting bolt
Pulley fixing bolts

NXTMTU080E

<TY-axis belt tension (for the clutch)>

TY-axis belt
225.0 20.0 Hz
NXTMTU081E
Tension pulleys
NXTMTU082E

<TY-axis belt tension (motor side)>

363.0 20.0 Hz
TY-axis belt
NXTMTU083E
range. Lightly loosen the motor fixing bolts and then use the adjusting bolt to adjust the
tension. Ensure that the tension is still within range after retightening the motor fixing
bolts.
Adjusting bolt
NXTMTU084E
Motor fixing bolts

6.10 Irregular Maintenance

6.10.1 Maintenance to remedy a pallet clamp error
Clean the following areas if a warning message displays at the machine.
Cleaning the connector between feeder pallet and part supply base
1. Remove the feeder pallet. (Refer to section 5.4 "Removing/Loading a Feeder Pallet" for
details.)
2. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any filth or foreign objects clogging both sides of the
connector.
Connector
Feeder pallet
Part supply base
NXTDPL014Eb

6.10.2 Maintenance to remedy a processing error

Clean the following areas if a warning message displays at the machine.
Cleaning the waste tape cutter
WARNING
Avoid injury by keeping fingers clear of the entrance to the waste

tape processing unit duct.
2. Use an air-gun to clear the duct of any waste tape and parts.
Cutter
NXTWTC010Ea
6.10.3 Maintenance to remedy a tape feed error

Cleaning the waste tape processing unit duct
WARNING
Avoid injury by keeping fingers clear of the entrance to the waste

tape processing unit duct.
2. Use an air-gun to clear the duct of any waste tape and parts.
Duct
NXTWTC008Ea

6.10.4 Removing rejected parts (reject parts conveyor, tray unit-L,

tray unit-LT/LTC)
Perform when required
It is possible to remove rejected parts during production. If the module stops because the
reject parts conveyor becomes full, remove the parts from the conveyor and restart
production.
1. Use the vacuum pickup tool to remove the parts from the reject parts conveyor.
NXTMTU048

6.10.5 Removing empty trays (tray unit-L, tray unit-LT)

1. Remove the empty trays.
Empty tray Stopper Empty tray Empty tray box NXTMTU049Ea
Empty tray Stopper

Empty tray Empty tray box 01MEC-0443E
Note:
1. Empty trays should be removed by hand, regardless of whether they are removed from t
tray box or a stopper. It is possible to remove the empty trays while the machine is
producing.
2. If the bolts on the bottom of the stopper are loosened, it is possible to slide the stopper
forwards and backwards. Adjust the stopper position as desired.
Bolts
Stopper
NXTMTU115E

6.10.6 Cleaning the Module Top Cover

If the top cover on the module becomes dirty then it should be cleaned.
1. A dry cloth or paper towel should be used to clean the top cover. They should be wiped
lightly to remove dirt .
CAUTION
There is the danger of the windows on the top cover losing their
anti-static effectiveness if they are cleaned with a wet cloth or
chemicals, or if they are wiped too hard.
top cover top cover
windows windows
M3(S) Module M6(S) Module 01MEC-0593E

6.10.7 Cleaning the nozzles

Clean the nozzles after 150,000 pickups have been performed. The cleaning method for
standard nozzles (without rubber) and nozzles with rubber tips is different.
<Standard nozzles>
Selecting the correct drill bit for the nozzle size
The internal diameter of the nozzle tip is sometimes different than the back of the nozzle.
Refer to the chart below and select the appropriate drill for the area to be cleaned. Nozzle
damage can occur if an incorrect drill size is used.
Cleaning the tip of the nozzle Cleaning the back of the nozzle
Nozzle Drill Nozzle Drill
NXTNZC047E
H08 H04
Nozzle Drill diameter Nozzle Drill diameter

diameter diameter
(etched Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle

on the top Tip Back Tip Back
of the
nozzle)
dia. 0.3 (Ultrasonic cleaning) dia. 1.0 dia. 0.6 dia. 0.35
dia. 0.4 (Ultrasonic cleaning) dia. 1.3 dia. 0.9 dia. 0.6
dia. 0.7 dia. 0.35 dia. 1.8 dia. 0.9 dia. 0.6
dia. 1.0 dia. 0.6 dia. 0.35 dia. 2.5 dia. 1.9 dia. 0.6
dia. 1.3 dia. 0.9 dia. 0.35 H01/H02
dia. 1.8 dia. 0.9 dia. 0.35 dia. 1.0 dia. 0.6 dia. 0.35
dia. 2.5 dia. 1.9 dia. 0.35 dia. 1.3 dia. 0.9
dia. 1.3A dia. 0.9 dia. 0.6 dia. 1.8 dia. 0.9
dia. 1.8A dia. 0.9 dia. 0.6 dia. 2.5 dia. 1.9 dia. 1.35
dia. 2.5A dia. 1.9 dia. 0.6 - - -

Cleaning procedure
1. Remove the nozzles from the nozzle station.
2. While holding the nozzle correctly, use the correct size of drill on the nozzle cleaning jig
for the nozzle in question to clean the nozzle tip area and back area. Refer to the chart
in the " Selecting the correct drill bit for the nozzle size " on the previous page. In
addition, disassemble the H01 1.0 mm nozzle and clean the nozzle end.
Note: Hold the nozzle at the ceramic part of the tip as shown below when cleaning nozzles with
the drill jig. If the sleeve of the nozzle is held (as shown below) to clean the nozzle, the
connection to the ceramic part of the nozzle may become loose or damaged.
Nozzle held correctly

<1.0 mm nozzle for the H01/H02 head>
Remove the o-ring and then remove the pin.
Flange
Spring
Jig (AWPJ8100)
Nozzle held incorrectly Pipe
Pin
O-ring
NXTNZC045Ea
3. Use a cotton swab or clean cloth soaked in cleaning solution (ethyl alcohol or isopropyl
alcohol) to gently rub away any dirt from the 2D codes on the nozzle. Use an air-gun to
blow away any remaining cleaning solution.
4. Confirm that the nozzle pipe moves up and down smoothly. Check by pushing the end
of the nozzle with a push-pull gauge and confirm that movement occurs with a force of
20 gf or less. In addition, check the flange surface of H01 head nozzles for indentations,
bulges, or burrs.
Caution: Do not use the nozzle if the nozzle pipe does not move smoothly or requires more than 20
gf to move, because this may negatively affect production.

5. Set the nozzles back in the nozzle station. Ensure that the pipes for the nozzles are
lowered. In addition, wipe any oil off the flanges for H01 head nozzles.
Pipe sticking out

Pipe lowered
Nozzle station
Incorrect Correct NXTNZC046E
Note: Because the needles are extremely thin for the 0603 nozzle cleaning jig, it is possible to
exchange just the needle if it becomes damaged. Refer to the table below for ordering the
special needle needed to replace any damaged ones.
Nozzle diameter Drawing number Part name

(target parts mm
(inch))
0.4 mm (0603 (0201)) PB75690 Needle
0.7 mm (1005 (0402)) PB75700 Needle
<Nozzles with rubber tips>

Applicable nozzles
Head type Ring type Pad type
H01 and H02 heads dia. 2.5 dia. 3.7G - dia. 20.0G
H04 head dia. 2.5 dia. 3.7G - dia. 15.0G
H08, H12(S) and H12HS heads dia. 2.5 dia. 3.7G, dia. 5.0G
Note: The OF head uses the same size as H01 and H02 heads. The G04 head uses only ring type
nozzles that are between 2.5G and 10.0G diameter.
Cleaning procedure
1. Remove the nozzles from the nozzle station.
2. Use an air gun to remove any dust on the exterior and interior of each nozzle.
3. Use a cotton swab or clean cloth soaked in cleaning solution (ethyl alcohol or isopropyl
alcohol) to gently wipe away any dirt from the rubber section of the nozzle.
Pad type Ring type

Rubber section Rubber section
01MEC-0933E

Cleaning with an ultrasonic cleaner

Follow the conditions below when using an ultrasonic cleaning unit to clean nozzles.
• Cleaning equipment: 60W or more for eyewear use or precious metal cleaning
• Cleaning fluid: Ethanol or isopropyl alcohol based cleaning fluids
• Cleaning time: 15 minutes
• Do not use an ultrasonic cleaner to clean nozzles with 2D code labels (stickers). It is only
possible to use the ultrasonic cleaner for nozzles which have laser etched 2D codes.
• To ensure that the cleaning fluid used does not damage the coating of the nozzles, it is
recommended to test 1 or 2 nozzles before cleaning all of the nozzles.
• Immediately after cleaning, use an air gun to remove any excess cleaning fluid from the
nozzles. Furthermore, carefully maintain the cleanliness of the cleaning fluids to ensure
that the nozzles do not become dirty from the cleaning fluid itself.
• When cleaning nozzles with rubber tips, do not immerse the rubber section in cleaning
solution (this includes water). The rubber will degrade and may cause problems during
production. If using the ultrasonic cleaner to clean nozzles with rubber tips, set the nozzles
so that the rubber section protrudes above the level of the cleaning solution and ensure they
don't fall over when the cleaner vibrates.
Example of how to set nozzles for cleaning

Rubber section
Cleaning fluid
Wire mesh (or other material with holes) 01MEC-0934E
6.10.8 Checking and replacing the placing head vacuum filters <H01/
H02 heads>
When nozzle vacuum errors occur, check to Refer to if the head vacuum filters are dirty. If
it is extremely dirty, replace them with new ones. (Refer to section 6.5.5 "Cleaning the
placing head vacuum filters".)
6.10.9 Checking the conveyor belt tension

Check the conveyor belt tension when the panel stopping position is not stable or when
panel conveyance errors occur. (Refer to section 6.9.14 "Checking the conveyor belt
tension".)

6.10.10 Cleaning the conveyor belt and belt cleaner

Cleaning the conveyor belt
The conveyor belt should be cleaned when a problem like one of the following occurs.
• Flux remains on the surface of the conveyor belt and sticks to panels during
conveyance.
• The panel stopping position is unstable and panel conveyance errors occur.
1. Pull the module forward. (Refer to " 5.1 Pulling Out/Returning a Module ".)
2. Turn the main machine OFF.
3. Soak a soft cloth with industrial ethanol and wipe away any dirt or foreign objects off the
belt. Clean the entire length of the belt by turning the hexagonal shaft.
Hexagonal shaft
01MEC-0010E
4. Soak another cloth with a lubricant (Biral T&D) and apply a small amount of the lubricant
to the entire length of the belt by turning the hexagonal shaft.
Note: A small amount of lubricant should be applied to the belt to prevent friction. Do not over-
apply lubricant.
5. Finally, lightly wipe the lubricant with a dry cloth.
Cleaning the belt cleaner

The conveyor belt should be cleaned when a problem like one of the following occurs.
• The panel stopping position is unstable and panel conveyance errors occur.
1. Pull the module forward. (Refer to " 5.1 Pulling Out/Returning a Module ".)
2. Turn the main machine OFF.
3. Remove the belt cleaner. (Refer to " 7.2 Replacing the Conveyor Belt Cleaner ".)
4. Remove any foreign matter from the brush and block of the belt cleaner.
M3 M6
Brush
Brush
Block 01MEC-0972E

6.10.11 Cleaning the soft backup pins

The soft backup pins should be cleaned in cases such as when flux remains on the tips of
the soft backup pins and sticks to the panel during conveyance.
Procedure
Use a soft dry cloth to wipe any dirt or foreign items from the backup pins.
Replace the soft backup pins when it is no longer possible to clean them thoroughly.
Note: Do not use liquids which contain neutral detergents when cleaning soft backup pins
because some of the material used to make the backup pins is water soluble.
01MEC-0009

6.10.12 Lubricating the PCU (Pallet Change Unit)

Lubricate the PCU when the levers for the handles on each side of the unit do not move
smoothly or when the PCU does not operate correctly while changing feeder pallets.
PCU for standard feeder pallets
Required grease Application location Amount

(cc)
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (1) Grooves at front and back sliders (4 locations) 0.3
(Idemitsu)
(2) Screw to lower or raise the unit 0.3
(3) Gear to lower or raise the unit 0.3
(4) Front side spring 0.3
(5) Sliding section at front side slider (2 locations) 0.3
(6) Support pins for guide (2 locations) 0.3
(7) Sliding section for lower slider at center 0.3
(8) Sliding section for lower slider at left side 0.3

(3 locations)
(9)Pipe support area at lower left and right sides 0.3
(10) Around slide lock pin at lower left and right 0.3
sides (2 locations)
(11)Sliding section for top pin 0.3

(For M3(S) modules, there are 4 locations at the
left, right and center, for M6(S) modules there are
2 locations at the left and right.)
1. Wipe off any dirt from the lubrication points with a clean cloth.
3. Apply grease to the sliding sections of the lubrication points.
• When lubricating the screw to lower or raise the unit (item 2), apply grease after
raising the unit by turning the height adjustment handle.
• When lubricating item 6, the pin (item 11) and the pipe support area (item 9),
apply grease around the gap of the sliding sections.
• (When lubricating the sliding sections on the sliders (items 5, 7 and 8), apply
grease to the sliding surface while moving the slider. If grease cannot be
applied to the sliding surface, apply grease to the area surrounding the sliding
parts.
4. Move each lubrication point to spread the grease evenly.

PCU for standard feeder pallets
Lever
(11)
(9)
(10) (6) (4)
(5)
(8)
(7) (1)
(3)
(2)
(9)
Handle
(10)
01MEC-0968E

PCU for bucket type feeder pallets
Required grease Application location Amount

(cc)
Daphne Eponex No. 2 (1) Grooves at front and back sliders (4 locations) 0.3
(Idemitsu)
(2) Screw to lower or raise the unit 0.3
(3) Gear to lower or raise the unit 0.3
(4) Front side spring 0.3
(5) Sliding section at front side slider (2 locations) 0.3
(6) Support pins for guide (2 locations) 0.3
(7) Sliding section for lower slider at center 0.3
(8) Sliding section for lower slider at left side 0.3

(3 locations)
(9)Pipe support area at lower left and right sides 0.3
(10) Around slide lock pin at lower left and right 0.3
sides (2 locations)
(11) Cam follower support pin on plate 0.3

(12)Around pallet lock pin on plate (2 locations) 0.3
(13) Stopper support pin on plate 0.3

1. Wipe off any dirt from the lubrication points with a clean cloth.
3. Apply grease to the sliding sections of the lubrication points.
• When lubricating the screw to lower or raise the unit (item 2), apply grease after
raising the unit by turning the height adjustment handle.
• When lubricating the support pin (item 6 and 13) and the pipe support area (item
9), apply grease around the gap of the sliding sections.
• (When lubricating the sliding sections on the sliders (items 5, 7 and 8), apply
grease to the sliding surface while moving the slider. If grease cannot be
applied to the sliding surface, apply grease to the area surrounding the sliding
parts.
4. Move each lubrication point to spread the grease evenly.

PCU for bucket type feeder pallets
(12) (11)
(1)
(6) (4)
(5)
Lever
(9)
(10)
(8)
(13)
Handle
(3) (2)
(9)
(7)
(10)
01MEC-0969E

QD008-27 7. Replacing Consumable Parts
7. Replacing Consumable Parts

7.1 Replacing Conveyor Belts
7.1.1 Recommended frequency
Replace when damage to the belt results in panel conveyance errors.
7.1.2 Procedure (example of M6(S) module)

It is necessary to replace both the reference side and adjustable side conveyor belts at the
same time.
Note: In the descriptions below, a double conveyor for a M6(S) module is shown. However, the
procedures for changing the conveyor belt for the single and M3(S) modules are the same.
1. Move the conveyor rail to the replacement position for the side on which the belt is being
replaced.
NXTBAS010a
3. Turn the main switch off.
4. Loosen the hex rod set screws, and slide the hex rods back far enough to allow the belt
to be removed.
Set screws
Hex rods NXTBAS011Ea

7. Replacing Consumable Parts QD008-27
5. Loosen the tension pulley.
Conveyor belt
Tension pulley
NXTBAS012Ea
6. Remove the panel guides.
Panel guide
(adjustable side)
Panel guide
(reference side)
NXTBAS014Ea

7. Remove the clamp plate and replace the conveyor belt with new one. Adjust the belt
tension after the belt has been set. (Refer to section 6.10.9 "Checking the conveyor belt
tension" for more details.)
Conveyor belt
Clamp plate
NXTBAS015E
Note: Attach the conveyor belt compatible with the optional thin panel conveyor with the raised
section of the belt on the clamp plate side.
Conveyor belt Belt guide
Raised section
Clamp plate
AIMBAS074E
8. Reattach the clamp plate and panel guides (together with the adjustable conveyor rail
panel clamp sensor).
9. Return the adjustable conveyor rail sensor wiring to its original position and fasten with
the plate.
10.Return the hex rods to their original position and tighten the set screws.
11.Turn on the main switch ant turn on the module.
12.Push the module back to its original position. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/

7.2 Replacing the Conveyor Belt Cleaner

When panel conveyance errors occur.
7.2.2 Procedure
3. Replace the belt cleaner. When mounting the new belt cleaner, the end of the brushes
should push in about 1.0 mm from the edge of the conveyor belt.
<M3(S) module>
Bolt torque: 0.8 Nm

Belt cleaner About 1.0 mm
(Double conveyor: 4 places)
(Single conveyor: 2 places) NXTBAS215Ea
Note: When attaching to the lane 1 reference rail, a spacer is required.
Spacer
Bolt torque: 0.8 Nm

NXTBAS216E
<M6(S) module>
About 1.0 mm
Belt cleaner
(Double conveyor: 4 places)
Bolt torque: 0.8 Nm (Single conveyor: 2 places)
NXTBAS214Ea
4. Turn on the main switch and turn on the module.
5. Push the module back to its original position. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/

7.3 Replacing Panel Clamper Pins

When panel conveyance errors occur.
7.3.2 Procedure
3. Remove the panel clamper by removing the two bolts holding it in place. Be careful to
not lose the springs.
Pin
Panel clamper
Pin
Bolt
Springs Bolt NXTBAS217E
Note: The reference rail for a M3(S) module is shown in the diagram above. The items for the
adjustable rail are removed the same way. In addition, there are 4 pins for a M3(S) module
and 6 for a M6(S) module.
4. Replace the pins. When inserting the new pins, there should be a distance of 52.00 mm
+/- 0.05 from the top of the clamp plate to the bottom of the pins.
Clamp plate
52.0 mm 0.05
Pin NXTBAS218E
5. Return the springs back to their original locations and reattach the clamper.
6. Apply grease to the front tip of the pin.
• lubricant: Biral T&D
8. Push the module back to its original position. (Refer to section 5.1 "Pulling Out/

7.4 Replacing the Module Servo Amplifier Battery

7.4.1 Battery type
Drawing number H10212
Part name Battery
Type JZSP-BA01
Guarantee period *1 Three years (Temperature 40 degrees, no-operation) *2
*1: The guarantee period is started from the date of manufacture.
*2: The battery life may be shortened depending on the environment in which it is used.

Read the alarm that appears at the operation panel of the machine to determine the
appropriate procedure.
Alarm Details
Seek Number: 3A21 Battery low (Replace the battery as soon as possible using
the procedure in this section.)
Seek Number: 3A1F Backup data lost (Contact your Fuji Representative. The
origin of the servo motor must be reset when replacing the
battery.)
7.4.3 Procedure
CAUTION
• Do not use a battery other than the specified battery.
• Replace the battery with the machine power on. It will be

necessary to reset the motor origin if the battery is replaced with
the machine power turned off.
• Properly dispose the used battery according to the local

regulations.
1. Ensure that the module is turned on.
2. While holding the bottom rear cover for the module to ensure that it does not drop,
remove the four bolts for this cover with a plus driver and gently remove the cover.

Rear cover
Servo box
NXTBAS009Ea
3. While holding the fan, remove the four allen bolts for the fan and then let the fan hang
down. Do not disconnect the fan wiring.
4. To be able to provide power to the servo amplifier, begin production of a job and then
immediately stop production.
a. Transmit a job to the machine and prepare for production.
b. Push the START button to begin production.
c. As soon as the head begins to move, push CYCLE STOP. Power is now supplied to
the servo amp.
5. Gently move the cables in the back area of the module and locate the battery case for
the axis that needs the new battery.
6. Open the battery case and replace the battery.
Fan
Servo amplifier
battery case
Battery
NXTBAS007Ea
7. Reattach the fan.
8. Reattach the rear cover.

7.5 Replacing the Placing Head Battery

7.5.1 Battery type
Drawing number H1021H
Part name Battery
Type ER6VLY
Guarantee period Four years (Temperature 40 degrees, no-

*1 operation) *2
*1: The guarantee period is started from the date of manufacture.
*2: The battery life may be shortened depending on the environment in which it is used.

Read the alarm that appears at the operation panel of the machine to determine the
appropriate procedure.
Alarm Details
Seek Number: 3A21 Battery low (Replace the battery as soon as possible using
the procedure in this section.)
Seek Number: 3A1F Backup data lost (Contact your Fuji Representative. The
origin of the servo motor must be reset when replacing the
battery.)
7.5.3 Procedure
Replace the battery with power being supplied to the placing head.
Remove the placing head from the module and then remove the battery cover. Attach the
placing head to the module. Use the cleaning command in manual mode and then replace
the battery with the power on.
CAUTION
•Perform battery exchange with the power to the placing head on. If
the battery is removed without the power being on, the backup data
is deleted and it will be necessary to reset the origin position of the
motor.

regulations.

1. Use the placing head exchange command in manual mode to remove the placing head
from the module. (Refer to section 5.8 "Removing/Attaching a Placing Head").
2. When performing this work, put on an electrostatic wrist strap (with an internal
resistance of 1M and above) to prevent static electricity build up. The connection point
for the wrist strap (labeled EARTH BONDING POINT) is located on the front of the base.
CAUTION
It is possible that electrical items will be damaged if the person

performing the work is not grounded to prevent electrostatic.
3. Remove the battery cover from the placing head (Refer to the diagram below). Do not
remove the battery yet.
4. With the battery cover removed, attach the placing head to the module. Return the
module. (Refer to section 5.8 "Removing/Attaching a Placing Head".)
5. Push CANCEL and MANUAL. The monitor displays the main screen.
6. Push START. The module starts auto-calibration.
7. After calibration is complete, push CYCLE. The monitor displays the main screen.
8. Use the cleaning command in manual mode to pull out the module. (A basic outline of
the procedure is listed below. However, for your safety, refer to the Chapter 6 “Manual
Mode Commands” in the NXT System Reference manual before performing this
procedure.
a. Push MANUAL to display the manual commands.
b. Select the cleaning pictogram and then push OK.
c. The module clamp is released.
d. Pull the module forward.
9. With the placing head still attached to the module, remove the harness connector of the
old battery and then remove the battery itself. Attach the new battery to the placing head
and then connect the harness connector. (Refer to the diagram below.)
10.Return the module. (Refer to section 5.8 "Removing/Attaching a Placing Head".)
11.Push CANCEL and MANUAL. The monitor displays the main screen.
12.Using the method used in Step 1, remove the placing head and then attach the cover.

<H01 Head>
Battery
(Drawing No. : H1021H)
Cover
NXTPHD012Ea
<H02 Head>
Battery
01MEC-0191E

<H04 Head>
Battery
Cover
NXTPHD019Ea
<H08 Head>
Battery
Cover
NXTPHD008Eb

<H12(S) Head>
Battery
Cover
NXTPHD044E
<H12HS Head>
Battery
(Drawing No. : H1021H
Cover
01MEC-0199E

7.6 Replacing the Module CPU Battery

A battery retains the data listed below when the main switch for the machine is turned off.
However, the following data is deleted when the main switch is turned off and the battery
has no power.
a. Module calibration data
• Matrix data, Feeder pallet levelness data, 4 nozzle head parts camera data, and
auto-calibration values.
b. Module configuration settings
c. Production information
• Current job name, Production information, Profiler information, and completed

sequences.
Perform the preparation procedures in order to ensure that the necessary data is available
and then proceed to change the battery.
7.6.1 Battery type
Drawing number H1019K
Part name Battery
Type CR2032
Battery life 2.8 years with the machine power turned off, 5.6
(estimated) years with the machine power on for 12 hours
per day

Replace the battery upon the occurrence of a battery alarm.
7.6.3 Preparation procedures

1. Ensure that the floppy disk with matrix data, feeder pallet levelness backup data and
parts camera offset backup data is available and useable. The matrix and feeder pallet
levelness data will be used. If there is parts camera data for use with 4 nozzle heads,
then this data will also be used. This disk is shipped with the module (or camera).
Note: If the disk cannot be located or is bad, perform the following procedures.
Save the module matrix data from the module on a computer. In addition, record the feeder
pallet levelness values for the module. This data is displayed in the information command
in manual mode. (Refer to the “Information Command“ section in chapter 6 “Manual Mode
Commands“ of the NXT System Reference manual for details.)
2. Record the module configuration settings. Use Accessory Software to display the
module configuration settings for the module in question. Refer to “Making module
configuration settings“ in the “Machine Accessories“ section in chapter 7 “Accessory
Software“ of the NXT System Reference manual for details. Once all of the module data
has been checked and/or recorded, then proceed to the next step.
3. Eject all nozzles from the head by using the manual mode command.
4. Remove any panels that are in the module.

5. Set the nozzle jigs for the type of head in the module in the nozzle station. Set the same
number of nozzle jigs as there are holders on the head.
6. Have the replacement battery and an electrostatic discharge wrist strap (with an internal
resistance of 1MW and above) prepared and ready to be used.
7.6.4 Procedure for replacing the battery
CAUTION

Properly dispose of the used battery according to local regulations.
• After replacing the battery, do not attempt to run the module. It is

possible for items in the module to collide because calibration data
for the module is not correct.L
1. Pull the module forward.
If NXT V4.03 or earlier is installed, manually pull the module forward. (Refer to 5.1
Pulling Out/Returning a Module.)
If NXT V4.10 or later is installed, the module can be unclamped using Accessory
Software by following the procedure listed below.
a. Start Accessory Software. Select the module to be pulled out and then click
[Calibration].
01MEC-0030E

b. Click [When the module CPU box battery has expired].
01MEC-0031E
c. Click [Unclamp module].
01MEC-0032E
d. Pull the module forward.

2. Turn off the main switch and then remove the CPU box. Refer to section 8.7 "Replacing
the Module CPU Box" for details.
CAUTION

4. Remove the top cover for the CPU box and then remove the screws from the front panel.
Screws
Cover
Front panel
Screws
NXTBAS254E

5. Remove the connectors for the ATX power cable and the fan cable.
Fan power cable

connector
ATX power cable

connector
NXTBAS255E
6. Gently pull the front panel with the boards attached forward just until the point that the
battery can be replaced.
Battery NXTBAS256E
7. Replace the battery. Pull up on the front of the battery in order to remove it from the
battery holder. It set the new battery, set the rear of the battery in the battery holder and
then gently push down on the front of the battery.
Front direction
Battery
(CR2032) NXTBAS257E
8. After replacing the battery, follow the procedures in reverse to return the CPU box back
in the module.

7.6.5 Making all settings after changing the battery

After changing the battery, the following items must be performed.
a. Register matrix data
b. Register feeder pallet levelness data
c. Register 4 nozzle head parts camera data (This is only necessary if the 4 nozzle
head parts camera data is on the floppy disk.)
d. Transmit the job
e. Remeasure calibration data
f. Specify module configuration settings
NXT V4.03 and earlier

1. Turn on the main switch.
2. Check the serial number for the target module.
3. Start Accessory Software. Select the module to be pulled out and then click [Calibration].
4. Direct load the matrix measurement software or the feeder pallet levelness
measurement/4 nozzle head parts camera software. Refer to “ Directly loading matrix
or feeder pallet measurement software” in the “Machine Accessories“ section in chapter
7 “ Accessory Software” of the NXT System Reference for details.
5. Register the matrix data. Click [Register Matrix Data].
6. Click [Browse] and select where the saved matrix data is located.
7. Click [Register]. The data is saved in the module.
8. Register the feeder pallet levelness data. Click [Feeder pallet level measurement] from
the [Calibration Data Management Menu].
Note: If feeder pallet measurement has not been performed for a module, it is not necessary to
register the feeder pallet measurement data.
9. Click [Browse] and select where the saved feeder pallet levelness data is located. If you
wrote the measurement values down from the [Information Command] of manual mode,
enter the values here.
10.Click [Send to Machine]. The data is registered in the module.
11.When you need to register 4 nozzle head parts camera data, click [4 nozzle head parts
camera measurement] to register this data.
12.Click [Browse] and then select the 4 nozzle head parts camera data file.
13.Click [Register]. The data is saved in the module.
14.Turn off the main switch and then turn it back on after waiting for a short time. The
registered data is enabled once the machine is rebooted.
15.Module configuration settings have been initialized. Use Accessory Software to reset
these settings.
If feeder pallet levelness measurement has not been performed for a module, open the
module configuration settings and specify the following setting in Accessory Software:

[Module configuration] - [Feeder pickup height setting] - [Use default values].
16.Transmit a job from Fuji Flexa.
17.At the [Calibration] page in machine accessories for the module, click [Remeasure
Calibration Data] to remeasure the calibration data. (Refer to the Accessory Software
Online Manual.)
a. Switch on the power to the machine 30 minutes before performing the following
measurement to warm up the parts camera.
b. Set the jig nozzles in the nozzle station.
c. Push START to begin auto calibration.
NXT V4.10 and later

All calibration data can be registered using Accessory Software.
1. Switch on the power to the machine. A battery error message is displayed.
Module <<Normal Mode>>

Fuji_VM Version V02.61
Boot Error occurred
ErrorCode :0x8000EB19
Booting system
SubErrorCode :0x00000001
Battery Error(Module)
DIO Initialize Done
CUnet Initialize Done
Panel Initialize Done
IO Shell Initialize Done
: 01MEC-0029
:
Note: If a battery error message is not displayed and the machine starts normally, perform the
diagnostic command and wait for the following pictogram to appear.
01MEC-0037

3. Click [When the module CPU box battery has expired].
01MEC-0031E
4. Click [Register calibration data].
01MEC-0033E
5. Click [Start].
01MEC-0034E

After the machine restarts, check that the operation panel displays that the module can
receive calibration data.
01MEC-0035
6. Register the calibration data. Click [Browse] and then specify the storage location of
each calibration data file.
register the feeder pallet measurement data. If parts camera offset for four nozzle operation
is not used, it is not necessary to register data for parts camera offset for four nozzle
operation.
01MEC-0036E
7. After all of the necessary data has been specified, click [Start].
8. Switch the power off and then on.
9. Module configuration settings have been initialized. Use Accessory Software to reset
these settings.
Online Manual.)
12.If necessary, perform on machine PAM to recalculate the manual final offset. (Refer to
section 9.1 "On machine PAM (Placement Accuracy Measurement)".)

7.7 Replacing the Base CPU battery

A battery retains the network data when the main switch for the machine is turned off.
However, this data is deleted when the main switch is turned off and the battery has no
power.
Perform the preparation procedures in order to ensure that the necessary data is available
and then proceed to change the battery.
7.7.1 Battery type
Drawing number H1019K
Part name Battery
Type CR2032
Battery life 2.8 years with the machine power turned off, 5.6
(estimated) years with the machine power on for 12 hours
per day

Replace the battery upon the occurrence of a battery alarm.

Use the manual mode Information command to display the network settings for the
machine. The following is a list of the network settings that is required.
• IP address • Subnet mask • Default gateway

• Other settings such as DNS server.
Have the replacement battery and an electrostatic discharge wrist strap (with an internal
resistance of 1M and above) prepared and ready to be used.
7.7.4 Procedure for replacing the battery
CAUTION
• Properly dispose of the used battery according to local

regulations.
1. Turn off the main switch and then remove the CPU box. Refer to section 8.12
"Replacing the Base CPU Box" for details.

CAUTION
3. Remove the top cover for the CPU box and then remove the screws from the front panel.
Screws
Cover
Front panel
Screws
NXTBAS254E
4. Replace the battery. Pull up on the front of the battery in order to remove it from the
battery holder. It set the new battery, set the rear of the battery in the battery holder and
then gently push down on the front of the battery.
Battery Front direction

(CR2032)
NXTBAS258E
5. After replacing the battery, follow the procedures in reverse to return the CPU box back
in the base.

7.7.5 Making all settings after changing the battery

After changing the battery, the network settings for the base must be specified.
NXT V4.03 or earlier

1. Turn on the main switch for the machine.
1. Use the software tool "TcpIPSetting" to specify the network settings. Refer to the NXT
System Reference Manual for details.
2. Restart the machine to enable the new network settings.
NXT V4.10 or later

1. Turn on the main switch for the machine.
2. When the battery error message is displayed, press OK. The Network setting screen is
displayed.
Note: If a battery error message is not displayed and the network settings screen is displayed,
proceed to the next step.
If the [Network Settings] screen fails to display, even when the OK button is pushed, and a
[Module and base are unable to communicate.] error screen appears, use the
“TcpIpSetting” software tool to make the network settings. (Refer to the “TcpIpSetting”
section in chapter 8 “NXT Software Tools” of the NXT System Reference for details.)
Module <<Normal Mode>>

Fuji_VM Version V02.61
Boot Error occurred
ErrorCode :0x8000EB0D
Booting system
SubErrorCode :0x00000000
Battery Error(Base)
DIO Initialize Done
CUnet Initialize Done
Panel Initialize Done
IO Shell Initialize Done
:
:
: 01MEC-0027
3. At the Network settings screen, set the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway.
01MEC-0028
4. Switch the power off and then on.
5. If you want to make further settings, such as DNS server or host name, use the
NetworkSetting Tool. (Refer to the NXT System Reference.)

7.8 Replacing the Nozzle Station Fluorescent

Stickers
7.8.1 Replacement frequency
Replace if errors occur when the machine tries to detect the presence of a nozzle.
7.8.2 Procedure
Remove the nozzle station from the module. (Refer to section 5.9 "Removing/Attaching a
Nozzle Station" for details.) Attach new fluorescent seals to the bottom of the nozzle slots
on the nozzle changer based on the procedures for the head type.
<H01 type>
1. Directly peel off and attach the new fluorescent stickers.
Fluorescent seals
Fluorescent seals
Fluorescent seals
NXTNZC010Ec
<H04 type>
1. Directly peel off and attach the new fluorescent stickers.
Fluorescent seals
Fluorescent seals
NXTNZC012Ea

<H08/H12(S) type>
1. Detach the spring located below the nozzle station.
Spring
Plate
Plate
NXTNZC008Ea
2. Remove the plate, peel off the existing stickers and replace them with new ones.
Plate
Fluorescent seal
NXTNZC009Eb

7.9 Replacing a Fuse on a Board inside a Module

A fuse check LED on the board turns off when a fuse on that board inside the module is
burnt out. Ensure that the fuse is burnt out before replacing it.
As a countermeasure to static electricity, put on an electrostatic discharge wristband (with

a resistance of 1 megaohm or greater).The connection points for the wrist strap (labeled
EARTH BONDING POINT) are located on the front and back of the base..
CAUTION
7.9.1 Module remote I/O boards

1. Remove the front cover that covers the remote I/O board.
Remote I/O board

Remote I/O board Cover NXTBAS071E
2. Put on the electrostatic discharge wrist strap.
3. Locate the burnt out fuse.
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the machine power before replacing any fuses.
Replace fuses with fuses of the same capacity.
4. Turn off the power to the machine by turning the main switch off.
5. Remove the burnt out fuse (F1 or F3) from the remote I/O board and replace it.
Remote I/O Board LED1 LED3 Remote I/O Board LED1 LED3
When F1 is burnt out: LED1 turns off

F1 F3 When F3 is burnt out: LED3 turns off F1 F3 NXTBAS072Ea

7.9.2 Module I/F board and module connector board

(inside the module control box)
Cover
Module control box NXTBAS073E
CAUTION
5. Remove any burnt out fuses (F1 or F3) from the module I/F board and replace them.
6. Remove any burnt out fuses (F1, F2, F3 or F4) from the module connecting board and
replace them. Remove the holder cover when removing the fuses F1, F3, or F4.
Module connecting board

When F4 is burnt out: LED6 turns off LED3
F1 LED4
When F1 is burnt out: PL8 turns off LED5
When F2 is burnt out: PL9 turns off F2
LED6
PL9 PL8 F3
F1
F4
F2
Module interface board NXTBAS074E

7.10 Replacing a Fuse on the Base Remote I/O

Boards
The position of the remote I/O boards in the base is shown in the figure below. When a
fuse on the I/O board burns out, a fuse check LED for that fuse turns off. Confirm whether
or not a fuse is burnt out, before replacing the fuse. When replacing a fuse, the module
over the remote I/O board needs to be pulled forward.
Remote I/O board 1 (For module 1, 2)
Remote I/O board 1 Remote I/O board 2
Remote I/O board 3
Remote I/O board 4
8M base
Remote I/O board 1
4M base 2M base
Remote I/O board 1 NXTBAS109Ea

Remote I/O board 2
WARNING
There is a limit to the number of the modules that can be pulled out
at safely at the same time. (Maximum: Four M3(S) modules on an
8M base, or two M3(S) modules on a 4M base). If the maximum is
exceeded, the entire machine may fall over to the front, possibly
resulting in serious physical harm.


CAUTION
7.10.1 Remote I/O board 1 (for an 8M base)

1. Remove the cover above the remote I/O board.
Base remote I/O board 1
Cover
NXTBAS075E
CAUTION
Remote I/O board 1

LED1
LED3
F1
When F1 is burnt out, LED1 turns off F3

When F3 is burnt out, LED3 turns off NXTBAS076E


Remote I/O board 2
Cover
NXTBAS077E
CAUTION
Remote I/O board 2

LED1
LED3
When F1 is burnt out: LED 1 turns off F1

When F3 is burnt out: LED 3 turns off
F3
NXTBAS078E


Cover
NXTBAS079E
CAUTION
Remote I/O board 3

LED1
LED3
F1

NXTBAS080E


Cover
NXTBAS081E
CAUTION
Remote I/O board 4

LED1
LED3
F1
F3
NXTBAS082E

7.10.5 Remote I/O board 1 (for a 4M base)

Cover
NXTBAS086E
CAUTION
Remote I/O board 1

LED1
LED3
F1



Cover
NXTBAS087E
CAUTION
Remote I/O board 2

LED1
LED3

F3
NXTBAS078E


Base remote I/O board Cover
NXTBAS236E
CAUTION
Remote I/O board 1

LED1
LED3
F1


7.11 Replacing a Fuse on a Base Control I/F Board

The positions of the base control boxs are shown in the figure below. When a fuse on a I/F
board in the base control box is burnt out, a fuse check LED for the fuse turns off. Confirm
whether or not the fuse is burnt out, before replacing the fuse. When replacing a fuse, the
module above the base control box needs to be pulled forward.
Base control box 1

Base control box 2
Base control box 3
Base control box 4
8M base
Base control box 1
4M base
2M base
Base control box 1
Base control box 2

NXTBAS110Ea
WARNING
There is a limit to the number of the modules that can be pulled out
at safely at the same time. (Maximum: Four M3(S) modules on an
8M base, or two M3(S) modules on a 4M base). If the maximum is
exceeded, the entire machine may fall over to the front, possibly
resulting in serious physical harm.

CAUTION

7.11.1 Base control I/F board 1 (for an 8M Base)

1. Remove the cover above the base control box 1.
Base control box

Cover
NXTBAS045E
3. Locate the burnt out fuse and then turn off the main switch to turn off the machine.
CAUTION
4. Remove and replace the fuses (F1, F2, F3 and F4) on the interface board inside the
base control box. The fuses (M1F1, M1F2) in the base control box are held inside a
holder. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the holders and then replace the fuses.
F4 F3 F2 F1
M1F1
M1F2
PL64 PL63 PL62 PL0
F4 F3 F2 F1
When F1 is burnt out: PL0 turns off

Base control box
NXTBAS083Ec
Interface board


Base control box 2

Cover
NXTBAS052E
CAUTION
base control box. The fuses (F1) in the base control box are held inside a holder. Use
a Phillips screwdriver to remove the holders and then replace the fuses.
F4 F3 F2 F1
F1
PL64 PL63 PL62 PL0
F4 F3 F2 F1
When F1 is burnt out, PL0 turns off

When F4 is burnt out, PL64 turns off Base control box
NXTBAS088Ec
Interface board


Base control box 3
Cover
NXTBAS059E
CAUTION
F4 F3 F2 F1
F1
PL64 PL63 PL62 PL0
F4 F3 F2 F1

NXTBAS088Ec
Interface board


Base control box 4
Cover
NXTBAS061E
CAUTION
F4 F3 F2 F1
F1
PL64 PL63 PL62 PL0
F4 F3 F2 F1

NXTBAS088Ec
Interface board

7.11.5 Base control I/F board 1 (for a 4M Base)

Base control box 1

Cover
NXTBAS049E
CAUTION
F4 F3 F2 F1
M1F1
M1F2
PL64 PL63 PL62 PL0
F4 F3 F2 F1

Base control box
NXTBAS083Ec
Interface board

7.11.6 Base control I/F board 2 (for a 4M Base)

Base control box 2

Cover
NXTBAS056E
CAUTION
F4 F3 F2 F1
F1
PL64 PL63 PL62 PL0
F4 F3 F2 F1

NXTBAS088Ec
Interface board

7.11.7 Base control I/F board 1 (for a 2M base)

1. Remove the cover above the base control I/F box.
Base control I/F box 1 Cover
NXTBAS237E
WARNING
F4 F3 F2 F1
M1F1
M1F2
PL64 PL63 PL62 PL0
F4 F3 F2 F1

Base control box
NXTBAS083Ec
Interface board

7.12 Replacing the Thermofuse on the Vacuum Pump

When replacing the thermofuse, the module located at the right end of the base needs to
be pulled forward.
7.12.1 8M base / 4M base

1. Remove the cover above the vacuum pump.
Thermofuse
Cover NXTBAS084E
CAUTION
3. Push down on the two levers on the thermal fuse side of the thermal fuse terminal box.
With these two levers being pushed down, remove the thermal fuse.
Fuse
Terminal box
Lever
NXTBAS231E
4. When putting in the new fuse, push down on the two levers and insert the new thermal
fuse. Return the levers back up to lock the thermal fuse in place.

7.12.2 External control box

1. Remove the covers.
Cover Cover
NXTBAS238E
2. Check the burnt out fuse and then turn off the main switch to turn off the machine.
CAUTION
3. Push down on the two levers on the thermal fuse side of the terminal fuse terminal box.
Fuse
Terminal box
Levers
NXTBAS239E
fuse. Return the lever back up to lock the thermal fuse in place.

7.12.3 Add on vacuum pump box

Cover
NXTBAS240E
2. Check the burnt out fuse and then turn off the main switch to turn off the machine.
CAUTION
3. Push down on the two levers on the thermal fuse side of the terminal fuse terminal box.
Fuse
Levers
Terminal box NXTBAS241E
fuse. Return the lever back up to lock the thermal fuse in place.

7.13 Replacing the Cooling Fan

7.13.1 Module fan
1. Remove four screws to remove the rear side cover of the module.
Cover
Module fan
NXTBAS112E
WARNING
Be sure to turn off the power to the machine before performing any
replacement work.
3. Remove the two bolts and then remove the fan mounting bracket from the rear side of
the module.
Mounting bracket
Fan NXTBAS113E

4. Disconnect any connectors to remove the fan and bracket from the module. Then,
remove the two screws and disassemble the fan and the bracket and replace the fan.
Connector
Fan
Bracket
NXTBAS114E

7.13.2 Base fan

1. Remove the four screws to remove the rear side cover of the module.
WARNING
replacement work.
Cover
NXTBAS115E
Base fan
3. Disconnect any connectors to remove the fan and the bracket from the module. Then,
remove the four screws and disassemble the fan and the bracket and replace the fan.
Cover Fan
Connector
NXTBAS116E

7.13.3 Fan for the DC power supply unit on the feeder pallet
<M6(S) Module>
Remove a feeder pallet prior to replacing the fan for the DC power supply unit on the feeder
pallet base.
WARNING
replacement work.
2. Remove the four bolts and disconnect any connectors for the fan and then remove the
cover of the DC power supply unit from the pallet base.
Fan
Cover
NXTBAS123E
3. Remove the four screws and remove the fan from the cover of the DC power supply unit
and replace the fan.
Fan
Connector
NXTBAS124E

<M3(S) Module>
Remove a feeder pallet prior to replacing the fan of the DC power supply unit on the feeder
pallet base.
WARNING
replacement work.
2. Remove the four bolts and disconnect any connectors for the fan and then remove the
cover of the DC power supply unit from the pallet base.
Cover
Fan
NXTBAS125E
3. Remove the four screws and remove the fan from the cover of the DC power supply unit
and replace the fan.
Fan
Connector NXTBAS126E

7.14 Replacing the Tray Unit-L Servo Controller

Battery
The internal memory of the MP2300 servo controller stores data required for operation of
the tray unit-L and a battery inside the controller helps maintain this data when power is not
supplied to the servo controller. To ensure the stable operation of the tray unit-L, replace
this battery every two years.
7.14.1 Battery type
Part name Battery
Type JZSP-BA01
Battery life 3 years with the machine power on for 8 hours

(estimated) per day
7.14.2 Procedure
CAUTION


regulations.
2. Loosen the screws for the control box cover, and then open the control box.
Control box NXTMTU022E

3. Ensure that the controller [RDY] LED green light is lite.
4. Gently remove the battery cover from the front of the controller.
Controller
Battery cover
NXTMTU023E
5. Detach the battery connector and remove the old battery. Attach and insert the new
battery.
RDY
ALM
TX
Battery
Maker: Yasukawa Electric
Model: JZSP-BA01
NXTMTU027E
6. Ensure that the [BAT] LED turns off after the new battery has been attached.
7. Reattach the battery cover.
8. Close and retighten the control box cover.

7.15 Replacing the Tray Unit-L Servo Axis Amplifier

Battery
Replace upon the occurrence of a battery alarm.
CAUTION


regulations.
7.15.2 Procedure
1. Remove the cover for the tray unit.
2. Open the battery case and replace the battery for the axis to be changed (TY- or TZ-
axis).
Battery
Model: JZSP-BA01
NXTMTU028E
3. Reattach the tray unit cover.

7.16 Replacing the Tray Unit-L Interface Board Fuse

A fuse check LED on the board turns off when a fuse on that board inside the tray unit-L is
burnt out. Ensure that the fuse is burnt out before replacing it.
7.16.1 Procedure
1. Loosen the screws for the control box cover, and then open the control box.
Tray unit-L interface board NXTMTU024E
CAUTION
4. Remove any burnt out fuses (34F1, 34F2, or 34F3) from the interface board and replace
them.
Fuse (34F3)
Type : DM05
Fuse (34F2)
Type : DM20
Fuse (34F1)
Type : DM20
NXTMTU025Ea

7.17 Replacing the Sponge Pad on the Tray Unit-L

Remover
A sponge pad is affixed to the bottom of the tray remover to preserve the vacuum. By
changing the sponge pad at the specified interval, it is possible to maintain stable pickup of
trays.
Note: These procedures are not necessary for tray units-L that do not have the tray remover.

Every year
7.17.2 Replacing procedure

1. Remove the tray unit-L from the machine. Refer to section 5.5 "Inserting/Removing a
Tray Unit-L" for details on removing a tray unit-L.
2. Push the lever and pull up on the remover.
Remover
Lever
NXTMTU106E
3. Gently peel off the old sponge pad from the bottom of the remover.
Note: Gently peel off the sponge pad to prevent changing the shape of the plate. If the shape of
the plate is changed, it may not be possible to maintain stable pickup of empty trays.
Replace the plate if the old sponge pad cannot be completely removed or if the plate
becomes bent.
4. Peel off the cover from the adhesive paper on the sponge pad and affix the sponge pad
to the bottom of the plate.
Plate
(PB6969*)
Sponge pad
(PJ1087*)
NXTMTU107E
Note: Be sure that the sponge pad shape is attached so that it matches the plate shape.

7.18 Replacing the Tray Unit-LT Servo Controller

Battery
the tray unit-LT and a battery inside the controller helps maintain this data when power is
not supplied to the servo controller. To ensure the stable operation of the tray unit-LT,
replace this battery every two years.
7.18.1 Battery type
Part name Battery
Type JZSP-BA01
Guarantee period 3 years with the machine power on for 8 hours

(estimated) per day
7.18.2 Procedure
CAUTION


regulations.
2. Loosen the screws for the control box cover, and then open the control box. (Refer to
section 8.20 "Removing Tray Unit-LT Covers".)
Control box 01MEC-0585E

Controller
㪤㪧㪉㪊㪇㪇
Battery cover 01MEC-0586E
battery.
RDY
ALM
TX
Battery
Model: JZSP-BA01
NXTMTU027E

7.19 Replacing the Tray Unit-LT Servo Axis Amplifier

Battery
CAUTION


regulations.
7.19.2 Procedure
1. Loosen the screws for the control box cover, and then open the control box. (Refer to
section 8.20 "Removing Tray Unit-LT Covers".)
2. Open each of the battery cases in the control box and replace all the batteries with new
ones.
Battery
Model: JZSP-BA01
01MEC-0587E
3. Reattach the tray unit cover.

7.20 Replacing the Tray Unit-LT Interface Board Fuse

A fuse check LED on the board turns off when a fuse on that board inside the tray unit-LT
is burnt out. Ensure that the fuse is burnt out before replacing it.
7.20.1 Procedure
1. Loosen the screws, and then open the front cover. (Refer to section 8.20 "Removing
Tray Unit-LT Covers".)
interface board
01MEC-0560E
CAUTION
4. Remove any burnt out fuses (T1F1 - 9) from the interface board and replace them.
Fuse (TIF2㨪4) Fuse 6+(

Type : DM10 Type : DM10
Fuse㧔6+(㧕 Fuse 6+(㨪

Type : DM16 Type : DM10 01MEC-0588E

7.21 Replacing the Tray Unit-LTC Servo Controller

Battery
the tray unit-LTC and a battery inside the controller helps maintain this data when power is
not supplied to the servo controller. To ensure the stable operation of the tray unit-LTC,
replace this battery every two years.
7.21.1 Battery type
Part name Battery
Type JZSP-BA01
Guarantee period 3 years with the machine power on for 8 hours

(estimated) per day
7.21.2 Procedure
CAUTION


regulations.
1. Turn on the power to the module and then attach the tray unit-LTC.
2. Remove the waste tape box from the tray unit-LTC.
3. Remove the screws and then remove the front lower cover. (Refer to " 8.22 Removing
Tray Unit-LTC Covers ".)
Cover
Waste tape box 01MEC-0887E

Controller
㪤㪧㪉㪊㪇㪇
Battery cover 01MEC-0589E
battery.
RDY
ALM
TX
Battery
Model: JZSP-BA01
NXTMTU027E

7.22 Replacing the Tray Unit-LTC Servo Axis

Amplifier Battery
CAUTION


regulations.
7.22.2 Procedure
1. Remove the waste tape processing duct (duct secured inside base) from inside the
base.

(fixed base part)
01MEC-0883E
2. Remove the screws and then remove the cover on the left lower section of the tray unit-
LTC. (Refer to " 8.22 Removing Tray Unit-LTC Covers ".)
Cover
01MEC-0891

3. Turn on the power to the module and then attach the tray unit-LTC.
4. Remove the waste tape box from the tray unit-LTC.
5. Remove the screws and then remove the front lower cover. (Refer to " 8.22 Removing
Tray Unit-LTC Covers ".)
6. Open each battery case beneath the cover and replace with new batteries. The TZ-axis
battery should be replaced by inserting your hand between the tray unit-LTC and module
or by inserting your hand into the front lower opening.
Battery
Model: JZSP-BA01
Cover TZ2-axis battery

01MEC-0892E
TY-axis battery TZ1-axis battery
7. Remove the tray unit-LTC from the module.
8. Attach the tray unit-LTC covers.

7.23 Replacing the Tray Unit-LTC Control Board Fuse

Replace fuses on the tray unit-LTC controller board after removing the unit from the
module.
7.23.1 Procedure
1. Remove the screws and then remove the cover on the left lower section of the tray unit-
LTC.
Cover
Control board
01MEC-0893E
2. Remove fuses (T1F1 to 9) from the control board and then check each one visually to
see if they have burnt out. Return any fuses that are in good condition to their original
location.
Fuse (TIF2㨪4) Fuse 6+(

Type : DM10 Type : DM10
Fuse㧔6+(㧕 Fuse 6+(㨪

Type : DM16 Type : DM10 01MEC-0588E
3. Replace any burnt out fuses with new ones.
CAUTION
4. Attach the cover.

7.24 Replacing the Tray Unit-M Control Board Fuses

7.24.1 Procedure
1. Before performing these procedures, first remove the tray unit-M from the machine.
Cover
Control board
NXTMTU071E
2. Remove any burnt out fuses (M1F1, M1F2, M1F3) from the control board and replace
them.
M1F3
M1F2
M1F1
Fuse (M1F3)
Type: DM32CDL (3.2A)
Fuse (M1F2) Fuse (M1F1)
Type: DM32CDL (3.2A) Type: DM20CDL (2A) NXTMTU072Ea
3. Reattach the side cover.

7.25 Replacing the Vacuum Pump's Inlet Valves/

Outlet Valves & Gaskets
The inlet valves, outlet valves and gaskets are consumable items, and should be replaced
by the new items provided in the vacuum pump maintenance kit.

Consumables should be replaced after every 10,000 hours of operation.
7.25.2 Required equipment
DOP-300SA Inlet valve rubber separator 4

Maintenance Kit
Inlet & outlet valves 12
Backup outlet valves 4
Cup packing 4
Gaskets 4
Backup inlet valves 4
Connecting tubes 1
Tools Hex wrench set
Torque wrench 5mm hex socket-

head wrench
(torque settable to
8N•m)
Plus driver No.2
Other Cleaning solvent (Industrial Ethyl alcohol) For wiping clean
Paper wipe For wiping clean
Dust mask, gloves, oil-based marker pen -

7.25.3 Replacement procedure

Removing the vacuum pump
1. After pulling the base's right-most module out, turn the main switch off.
WARNING
Be sure that the machine's main power has been turned off before
attempting to remove the vacuum pump.
2. First, remove the 2 covers. Remove the 2 screws which secure the rail, then bend the
rail so that it will not interfere with the vacuum pump removal process.
Rail
NXTBAS064E
3. Remove the vacuum pump's terminal box cover, then disconnect the terminal block
wiring.
U V W
NXTBAS173

4. Remove the thermal fuse bracket, then remove the vacuum pipe.
Thermal fuse bracket
Vacuum pipe
NXTBAS174E
5. Remove the 4 bolts that secure the vacuum pump, then lift the pump off the machine
base.
WARNING
Pump handling requires two or more personnel. To avoid back

injuries, etc., avoid strained postures when lifting the pump.
Mounting bolt
Handles
NXTBAS175E
WARNING
After stopping pump operation, allow the pump 30 minutes or more

to cool before beginning the replacement procedure. Failure to do
this could result in burns, as the pump interior is extremely hot
immediately after operation is stopped.

Disassembling the vacuum pump
WARNING
To prevent the ingestion of microscopic particles from worn

components, always wear a dust mask and gloves before
performing the following procedure.
1. Use a hex wrench to loosen the hex socket head bolt (M6 x L16) that secures the handle,
then remove the handle and plate.
Handle fixing bolts
Handle
Plate
NXTBAS221E
2. Stand the pump upright so that the head to be replaced can be removed vertically.
3. Remove the head cover as follows.
a. Use a hex wrench to loosen the 4 hex socket head bolts (M6 x L30) that secure the
head cover, then remove the bolts.
NXTBAS153

b. Pull the fitting joint forward with both hands, then remove the connecting tube and
the head cover. Pull the left and right fitting joints in an alternating and gradual
manner until they are removed.
NXTBAS154
4. Remove the cylinder as follows.
a. Use a permanent marker to mark the cylinder and casing before removing the
cylinder.
NXTBAS155
b. With gloves on, slowly turn the fan. Do not attempt this without gloves.
NXTBAS156

c. Lift the cylinder upward to remove it.
NXTBAS157
5. Remove the holder plate and the packing as follows.
a. Mark the holder plate at the casing's mark position.
NXTBAS158
b. Loosen the 4 countersunk screws (M5 x L12) in the holder plate. With a gloved hand,
hold the connecting rod in place when loosening the countersunk screws.
Holder plate
NXTBAS159E

c. Remove the holder plate.
Holder plate
NXTBAS160E
d. Remove the cup packing.
Cup packing
NXTBAS161E
e. Remove the inlet valve's rubber separator from the holder plate.
f. Wipe the holder plate clean using a cloth or paper wipe dampened with industrial
alcohol.

6. Remove the cylinder's small components as follows.
1. Inlet valve
2. Backup inlet valve
3. Inlet valve holder plate
4. Outlet valve holder plate
5. Backup outlet valve
6. Outlet valve
1 2 3 4 5 6
NXTBAS164E
a. Loosen the roundhead screw (M3 x L5) that secures the outlet valve holder plate.
Outlet valve holder plate
NXTBAS162E
b. Remove the outlet valve holder plate, the backup outlet valve, and the outlet valve.
c. Loosen the roundhead screw (M3 x L5) that secures the inlet valve holder plate.
Inlet valve holder plate NXTBAS163E
d. Remove the inlet valve holder plate and the inlet valve.
e. Wipe the entire cylinder clean using a cloth or paper wipe dampened with industrial
alcohol. Pay particular attention to cleaning the inlet/outlet valve mounting faces,
and the cup packing's vibrating face. When cleaning, use care to avoid wiping off the
mark.

Reassembling the vacuum pump

1. Set the new cup packing on the connecting rod with the cup's flange facing downward.
Cup packing
NXTBAS165E
2. Insert a new inlet valve rubber separator into the groove on the rear side of the holder
plate.
3. Align the holder plate mark, then tighten the 4 countersunk screws (M5 x L12).
Inlet valve rubber separator
Markings
NXTBAS166E

4. Mount the inlet valves on the cylinder as follows.
a. Place the 2 inlet valves on the cylinder, then place the inlet valve backup and inlet
valve holder plate on top of them.
b. While verifying that the inlet valve is not making contact with the groove's inner
perimeter, tighten the roundhead screw (M3 X L5) that secure the inlet valve holder
plate.
Note: Be sure that the orientation of the inlet valve holder plate is correct. The top of the inlet
valve holder plate must be set facing upward and the shorter direction (distance from center
of hole to end face) is facing the rounded side of the inlet valves.
Inlet valve holder plate

Upper side
Valve's rounded
side
Lower side (valve side)
NXTBAS167E
5. Mount the outlet valve on the cylinder as follows.
a. Place the outlet valve on the cylinder, then place the outlet valve backup and outlet
valve holder plate on top of it.
b. While verifying that the outlet valve is not making contact with the groove's inner
perimeter, tighten the roundhead screw (M3 x L5) that secures the outlet valve holder
plate.
Outlet valve holder plate NXTBAS168E
6. Align the cylinder with the mark, then insert it into the cup packing.
Markings
NXTBAS169E

7. Replace the head cover gasket as follows.
a. Remove the old gasket from the head cover.
b. Clean the head cover by wiping it with industrial alcohol, then dry it with compressed
air.
c. Set the new gasket on the head cover.
Gasket
NXTBAS170E
8. Mount the head cover on the casing as follows.
a. Insert the head cover joint into the connecting tube and align the casing screw holes
with those in the head cover.
b. Tighten the 4 hex socket head bolts (M6 x L30) to a torque of 8N•m. (If replacing the
connecting tube, be sure that the tube is cut to the same pump length.)
Head cover
NXTBAS171E
9. Connect the connecting tube. (If replacing the connecting tube, be sure that the tube is
cut to the same pump length.)
Connecting
tube
NXTBAS172E
10.Lay the pump on its side, then mount the panel and handle.

Mounting the vacuum pump

1. Reverse the removal procedure in order to mount the vacuum pump on the machine
base.
WARNING
Pump handling requires two or more personnel. To avoid back

injuries, etc., avoid strained postures when lifting the pump.
2. Connect the wiring to the terminal block (Earth, W, V, U) as shown below.
U V W
NXTBAS173

MEMO:

QD008-27 8. Replacing Parts
8. Replacing Parts
8.1 Replacing the Parts Camera
The parts camera cover, lighting, lens, and camera should be treated as one unit. It is not
possible to just replace an item on this unit without special equipment and training.
8.1.1 Required tools

Phillips screwdriver, metric Allen wrench set
8.1.2 Required time

Approximately 10 minutes are required to remove the existing light and camera units and
attach the new unit.
8.1.3 Procedure
1. Pull out the module. (See section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module".)
WARNING
work.
3. When working on a M6S module, wait until the shaft for the linear motor cools to room
temperature and then set the protective covers on the shaft.
WARNING

magnetic field.
CAUTION
may be deformed.

8. Replacing Parts QD008-27
CAUTION
tools.

Linear motor coil

Linear motor shaft
Linear scale
M6S module
Protective covers
NXTBAS275Eb
4. Loosen and remove the four (4) screws securing the cover using a driver.
Screws (M3 x 4)
Cover
NXTPCA003E

5. Gently remove the cover and then disconnect the two electrical connectors.
Connectors
NXTPCA005E
6. Use an Allen wrench to loosen and remove the four stud bolts. Gently remove the
lighting unit.
Stud bolt
(4 mm Allen wrench required)
Stud bolt identification
No groove One groove Two grooves

(Standard and (High reso- (Sidelight
P03 camera) lution camera) type camera)
Lighting unit
Lens 01MEC-0201Ea
Caution: When attaching the unit in the machine, be careful to not pinch wires under the lighting
stand legs or bolts. A pinched wire may cause a short.

7. Loosen and remove the 4 bolts as shown below using an Allen wrench in order to free
the camera unit.
Bolts (4 mm Allen wrench required)
Parts camera
NXTPCA006E
8. Disconnect both connectors at the bottom of the camera.
Connectors
NXTPCA007E
9. Use the reverse procedure to attach the new unit.
11.Push the module back to its original position. (See section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a
Module".)

8.2 Replacing the Mark Camera

The mark camera lighting, lens, and camera should be treated as one unit. It is not possible
to just replace an item on this unit without special equipment and training.

Metric Allen wrench set, 5.5 mm spanner
8.2.2 Required time

Approximately 10 minutes are required to remove the existing light and camera units and
attach the new unit.
8.2.3 Process
WARNING
work.
3. Remove the connectors from the rear of the camera unit.
Connectors
Mark camera
NXTMCA004E

4. Loosen the two (2) cap bolts and two (2) hex bolts, slide the camera unit backwards and
remove.
Hex bolts
(5.5 mm spanner required)
Cap bolts
(3 mm Allen wrench required) Mark camera
NXTMCA005Eb
Note: Under no circumstances should the the mark camera bolts or stoppers be loosened. (See
the illustration below.)
Bolts
Stoppers
NXTMCA007Ea

5. Disconnect the connector for the mark camera lighting unit.
Connector
NXTMCA002E
6. Loosen the four (4) bolts and remove the lighting unit.
Lighting unit
Bolts (3 mm Allen wrench required)

NXTMCA003E

7. Use the reverse procedure to attach the new unit.

Note: Slide the camera unit forward until the stoppers on the camera contact the lighting unit, then
tighten.
Stopper
Lighting unit Mark camera

NXTMCA006Eb
9. Push the module back to its original position. (See section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a
Module".)

8.3 Replacing the Reject Parts Unit

8.3.1 Required time
Approximately 3 minutes are required to remove the existing unit and attach the new unit.
8.3.2 Procedure
1. When removing the reject parts conveyor, pull out the conveyor horizontally, while
pulling the clamp lever in the direction indicated in the diagram.
Clamp lever
NXTRPC004Ea

2. Align and slide the guide on the underside of the reject parts conveyor into one of the
feeder pallet slots.
Feeder pallet
Reject parts conveyor
Feeder pallet slot

Guide
NXTRPC002Ea
3. Slide the reject parts conveyor while pulling the clamp lever in the direction indicated in
the illustration below. Release the clamp lever when set properly in position.
Ensure that the connector on the reject parts conveyor is connected to the connector on
the feeder pallet.
Clamp lever
NXTRPC003Ea

8.4 Replacing the Waste Tape Processing Unit

It is necessary to remove the waste tape processing unit in cases such as when performing
maintenance on the unit.

Allen wrench set
8.4.2 Required time

Approximately 10 minutes are required to remove the existing unit and attach the new unit
(excludes the time required for work being performed on the unit such as lubrication.)
8.4.3 Procedure
1. Remove the feeder pallet. (See section 5.4 "Removing/Loading a Feeder Pallet" for
details.)
3. Turn off the machine by switching the main switch to off.
WARNING
work.
4. Remove the attachment bolts followed by the duct.
Duct
Attachment bolt
NXTWTC002E

5. Remove the 4 bolts with an Allen wrench.
Waste tape disposal unit
NXTWTC004Eb
6. Disconnect the power cable connection from the right-hand side of the waste tape
processing unit. Pull the coupler in the direction of the arrow in the illustration to
disconnect the air hose.
Air hose
Power connector Coupler NXTWTC005Eb
7. Slide the unit out of the machine using the handle on the right-hand side.
Note: The unit may drop on the ground, resulting in damage, if pulled out too far.
NXTWTC006b

8. Lift the unit using the handles and carry to the maintenance stand..
Handles
Duct
NXTWTC007Eb
WARNING
Ensure not to put your hands inside the waste tape processing unit
when transporting the unit, as the cutter blade moves freely when
the unit is removed from the machine.
CAUTION
• Be careful not to drop the unit while carrying as it is extremely

heavy.
• Turn the unit upside down as shown and set on the maintenance
stand when working on the unit. Setting the unit on the
maintenance stand as is may result in damage to the duct due to
the weight of the unit.
9. After maintenance work has been completed, use the reverse procedure to return the
unit to the machine.
10.Attach the duct.
12.Push the module back to its original position. (See section 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a
Module".)

8.5 Replacing the Module Servo Box
WARNING
work.
• When changing the module servo box, ensure that no one pushes
in the module. The module may pinch, sever, or cause serious
injury.
CAUTION
• Hold the harness connectors when disconnecting the connectors.

Do not pull on the cables.
• Take care not to hook and pull the wiring harnesses when taking
out the servo box.
• Confirm the connector names are right when reconnecting the

connectors.
• Take care not to pinch or damage the wiring harnesses when

installing the servo box.

Phillips screwdriver, Allen wrench set
8.5.2 For M3(S) modules

2. Remove the screws (four), then remove the cover.
Cover
Module servo box NXTBAS039E

3. Remove the bolts (four) which fix the servo box.
NXTBAS040
4. Disconnect the connectors in the black marked positions in the illustration below.
Type A Type B
12 5 3 7 9
X-axis Y-axis Z/R/Q/SX-axes Power
2
7
9
1
11
8
1 10 12
3 4 5 6 11 2 4 6 8 10
01MEC-0409E
No. Connector No. Connector No. Connector

name name name
Type A 1 J1 5 N1/11 9 N1/13 M2
2 J2 6 N1/11 CN2 10 DMD PG2
3 N1/12 7 N1/13 M1 11 IN
4 N1/12 CN2 8 N1/13 PG1 12 OUT
Type B 1 J1 5 11SA1 9 13SA1 M2
2 J2 6 11SA1 CN2 10 13SA1 PG2
3 12SA1 7 13SA1 M1 11 IN
4 12SA1 CN2 8 13SA1 PG 12 OUT

5. Take out the servo box from the module body.

Note: The diagram below shows a type A servo control box but it is the same for the other servo
box types.
Servo box
NXTBAS038E
6. Use the reverse procedure when installing the new servo box.


Cover
Module servo box NXTBAS035E
3. Remove the bolts (four) which fix the servo box.

box types.
NXTBAS036

<M6 Module>
Type A 12 Type B
Power 5 3 9
Y-axis X-axis Z/R/Q-axes
1
11
1 10 12
3 4 5 6 11 2 4 6 10 01MEC-0407Ea

name name name
Type A 1 J1 5 N1/11 9 N1/13 M2
2 J2 6 N1/11 CN2 10 DMD PG2
3 N1/12 7 - 11 IN
4 N1/12 CN2 8 - 12 OUT
Type B 1 J1 5 12SA1 9 13SA1 M2
2 J2 6 12SA1 CN2 10 13SA1 PG2
3 11SA1 7 - 11 IN
4 11SA1 CN2 8 - 12 OUT

<M6S Module>
Type C For head axes Type D
k Y-axis Power c e k g
j
X-axis
a
a i
e f i h g c d b f d h
01MEC-0408E

name name name
Type C a J1 e 11SA1 i IN
b J2 f 11SA1 CN2 j OUT
c 12SA1 g 13SA1 M2 k 12B1 12B2
d 12SA1 CN2 h 13SA1 PG2 - -
Type D a J1 e 11SA1 i IN
b J2 f 11SA1 CN2 j OUT
c 12SA1 g 13SA1 M2 k REG1 REG3
d 12SA1 CN2 h 13SA1 PG2 - -
5. Take out the servo box from the module body.

box types.
Servo box
NXTBAS038E
6. Use the reverse procedure when installing the new servo box.

8.6 Replacing the Module Control Box

EARTH BONDING POINT) are located on the front and back of the base.
WARNING
work.
• When changing the module control box, ensure that no one

pushes in the module. The module may pinch, sever, or cause
serious injury.
CAUTION
out the servo box.

connectors.

installing the unit.
• It is possible that electrical items in the control box will be

damaged if the person performing the work is not grounded to
prevent electrostatic.


Cover
Module control box NXTBAS025E

4. Remove the bolts (four) which fix the control box.
NXTBAS026
Connector board
Interface board CN
5
6 10 9
7 11
19
15 17
5 10 9 3 2 15 17
8 7
11 6 1 16
20
MCBCN
Connector panel NXTBAS030E
6. Take out the control box from the module body.
Control box
NXTBAS028E
7. Use the reverse procedure when installing the new control box.


Cover
Module control box
NXTBAS029E
NXTBAS026

Connector board
Interface board CN
5
6 10 9
7 11
15 17
5 10 9 3 2 15 17
8 7
11 6 1 16
20
MCBCN
Connector panel NXTBAS027E
6. Take out the control box from the module body.
Control box
NXTBAS028E

8.7 Replacing the Module CPU Box

EARTH BONDING POINT) are located on the front and back of the base.
WARNING
work.
• When changing the module CPU box, ensure that no one pushes
in the module. The module may pinch, sever, or cause serious
injury.
CAUTION

out the servo box.

connectors.

• It is possible that electrical items in the CPU box will be damaged

if the person performing the work is not grounded to prevent
electrostatic.

Phillips screwdriver, Flat head screwdriver, Allen wrench set

1. Ensure that the floppy disk with matrix data, feeder pallet levelness backup data and
parts camera offset backup data is available and useable. The matrix and feeder pallet
levelness data will be used. If there is parts camera data for use with 4 nozzle heads,
then this data will also be used. This disk is shipped with the module (or camera).
Note: If the disk cannot be located or is bad, perform the following procedures.
Save the module matrix data from the module on a computer. In addition, record the feeder
pallet levelness values for the module. This data is displayed in the information command
in manual mode. (Refer to the “Information Command“ section in chapter 6 “Manual Mode
Commands“ of the NXT System Reference manual for details.)

2. Record the module configuration settings. Use Accessory Software to display the
module configuration settings for the module in question. Refer to “Making module
configuration settings“ in the “Machine Accessories“ section in chapter 7 “Accessory
Software“ of the NXT System Reference manual for details. Once all of the module data
has been checked and/or recorded, then proceed to the next step.
3. Eject all nozzles from the head by using the manual mode command.
4. Remove any panels that are in the module.
5. Set the nozzle jigs for the type of head in the module in the nozzle station. Set the same
number of nozzle jigs as there are holders on the head.
8.7.3 Procedure
Ensure that a backup of the matrix data and feeder pallet levelness data for each module
exists before performing this procedure.
Module CPU box
Cover
NXTBAS031E
Note: For M6S modules, there are 6 screws.
4. Remove the bolts (six) which fix the CPU box.
NXTBAS032

20 21 22
15 16 17 18 19
11 12 13 14
8 10
1 3
2 4 5
NXTBAS033
6. Take out the CPU box from the module body, and detach the bracket from the CPU box.
CPU box
Bracket
NXTBAS034E
7. Use the reverse procedure when installing the new CPU box
8. Turn on the power and confirm that the machine starts up correctly.
8.7.4 Making all settings after replacing the CPU box

The following actions are necessary after replacing the CPU box.
a. Register matrix data
b. Register feeder pallet levelness data
c. Register 4 nozzle head parts camera data (This is only necessary if the 4 nozzle
head parts camera data is on the floppy disk.)
d. Transmit the job
e. Remeasure calibration data
f. Specify module configuration settings

Procedure
All calibration data can be registered using Accessory Software.
1. Turn on the main switch.
3. Direct load the matrix measurement software or the feeder pallet levelness
measurement/4 nozzle head parts camera software. Refer to “ Directly loading matrix
or feeder pallet measurement software” in the “Machine Accessories“ section in chapter
7 “ Accessory Software” of the NXT System Reference for details.
4. Register the matrix data. Click [Register Matrix Data].
5. Click [Browse] and select where the saved matrix data is located.
6. Click [Register]. The data is saved in the module.
7. Register the feeder pallet levelness data. Click [Feeder pallet level measurement] from
the [Calibration Data Management Menu].
register the feeder pallet measurement data.
8. Click [Browse] and select where the saved feeder pallet levelness data is located. If you
wrote the measurement values down from the [Information Command] of manual mode,
enter the values here.
9. Click [Send to Machine]. The data is registered in the module.
10.When you need to register 4 nozzle head parts camera data, click [4 nozzle head parts
camera measurement] to register this data.
11.Click [Browse] and then select the 4 nozzle head parts camera data file.
12.Click [Register]. The data is saved in the module.
13.Turn off the main switch and then turn it back on after waiting for a short time. The
registered data is enabled once the machine is rebooted.
14.Module configuration settings have been initialized. Use Accessory Software to reset
these settings.
Online Manual.)

8.8 Replacing the Base Control Box 1

WARNING
work.
• When working in an opening in the top of the base with the cover
off, ensure that no one pushes in the module. The module may
pinch, sever, or cause serious injury.
CAUTION
out the servo box.

connectors.



8.8.2 For 8M base

Base control box

Cover
NXTBAS045E

NXTBAS046
Interface board
NXTBAS047Ea
6. Take out the control box from the base.
NXTBAS048

8.8.3 For 4M base

Base control box 1

Cover
NXTBAS049E
NXTBAS050

Interface board
Connector board
NXTBAS051E
NXTBAS048


WARNING
work.
CAUTION
out the servo box.

connectors.



8.9.2 For 8M base

Base control box 2

Cover
NXTBAS052E

4. Remove the bolts (two) which fix the control box.
NXTBAS053
Interface board
NXTBAS054Ea
NXTBAS055

8.9.3 For 4M base

Base control box 2

Cover
NXTBAS056E
NXTBAS057

Interface board
NXTBAS058Ea
NXTBAS055


WARNING
work.
CAUTION
out the servo box.

connectors.



8.10.2 For 8M base only

Base control box 3
Cover
NXTBAS059E

NXTBAS053
Interface board
NXTBAS054Ea
NXTBAS060


WARNING
work.
CAUTION
out the servo box.

connectors.



8.11.2 For 8M base only

Base control box 4
Cover
NXTBAS061E

NXTBAS057
Interface board
NXTBAS062Ea
NXTBAS055

8.12 Replacing the Base CPU Box

WARNING
• Always turn the main switch OFF before performing this work.
CAUTION

out the servo box.

connectors.

• It is possible that electrical items in the CPU box will be damaged

if the person performing the work is not grounded to prevent
electrostatic.


1. Use the manual mode Information command to display the network settings for the
machine. The following is a list of the network settings that is required. Refer to the
“Information Command“ section in chapter 6 “Manual Mode Commands“ of the NXT
System Reference manual for details.
• • IP address • Subnet mask • Default gateway

• Other settings such as DNS server.
2. Before replacing the CPU box memory card, confirm that you have the matrix data,
feeder pallet levelness data, and the floppy disk with the final offset files. The final offset
files are used in this procedure. The disk is attached to the machine.

8.12.3 For 8M base

2. Remove the screws (eight), then remove the covers.
Base CPU box
Covers
NXTBAS063E
3. Remove the bolts (two) which fix a section of the rail. Keep this part of the rail away from
the opening when working in the base.
Rail
NXTBAS064E
5. Remove the bolts (two) which fix the CPU box.
NXTBAS065

11
7 8
1 3
2 4 5
NXTBAS066
7. Remove the memory card from the old base CPU and put into the new base CPU.
8. Take out the CPU box from the base, and detach the bracket.
Bracket
NXTBAS067E
9. Use the reverse procedure when installing the new CPU box.
10.Turn on the power and confirm that the machine starts up correctly.

8.12.4 For 4M base

2. Remove the screws (eight), then remove the covers.
Base CPU box
Covers
Base cotrol box 2

NXTBAS068E
3. First remove the base control box 1 and the base control box 2. (Refer to section 8.8.3
"For 4M base" and section 8.9.3 "For 4M base".)
4. Remove the bolts (two) which fix a section of the rail. Keep this part of the rail away from
the opening when working in the base.
Rail
NXTBAS064E
6. Remove the bolts (two) which fix the CPU box.
NXTBAS065

11
7 8
1 3
2 4 5
NXTBAS066
9. Take out the CPU box from the base, and detach the bracket.
Bracket
NXTBAS069E
10.Use the reverse procedure when installing the new CPU box.
11.Turn on the power and confirm that the machine starts up correctly.

8.12.5 For 2M base (external control box)

2. Remove the screws (four), and then remove the covers.
Cover
Cover
NXTBAS242E
4. Remove the bolts (four) which fix the CPU box.
NXTBAS243
5. isconnect the connectors in the black marked positions in the illustration below.
7 8
1 3
4 5
NXTBAS244

7. Take out the CPU from the control box and detach the bracket.
Bracket
NXTBAS245E
8. Use the reverse procedure when installing the new CPU box.
9. Turn on the power and confirm that the machine starts up correctly.
8.12.6 Settings after replacement

The following actions are necessary after exchanging the CPU box.
a. Configure network settings
b. Install machine application software
c. Transmit the final offset file (when replacing the CPU box memory card)
1. The network settings screen displays when the machine is started. Input the values you
wrote down. Refer to the “Making Network Settings“ section in chapter 3 “Machine Set
Up“ of the NXT Setup manual for details.
2. Install the version of the machine application software that matches the modules (the
same version as the modules). Refer to “Upgrading machine control software“ in the
“Machine Accessories“ section in chapter 7 “Accessory Software“ of the NXT System
Reference manual for details.
3. Send the final offset file to the modules. Refer to “Sending the final offset file to a
module“ in the “Machine Accessories“ section in chapter 7 “Accessory Software“ of the
NXT System Reference manual for details.
Note: Also refer to “Installing the machine application software” and “Performing PAM at the
machine” in the online version of the Fuji Accessory Software Operation Manual.

8.13 Replacing the Vacuum Pump Control Box
WARNING
work.
CAUTION

out the servo box.

connectors.

8.13.1 8M base and 4M base

Vacuum control box
Cover NXTBAS042E

3. Disconnect the harness connectors from the bracket of the vacuum pump control box.
NXTBAS043
4. Remove the bolts (two) which fix the bracket of the vacuum pump control box.
NXTBAS044
5. Take out the vacuum pump control box with the bracket attached.
6. Use the reverse procedure when installing the new vacuum control box.

8.13.2 External control box

1. Turn off the power to the machine by turning off the main switch.
Cover Cover
NXTBAS238E
3. Check the mounting position in the external control box and then disconnect the three
connectors (MSICN1, MSICN2, and MSICN3).
NXTBAS246

4. Remove the bolts (two) which fix the bracket of the vacuum control box.
NXTBAS247
5. Take out the vacuum control box with the bracket attached.

8.13.3 Add on vacuum pump box

1. Turn off the power to the machine by turning off the main switch.
Cover
NXTBAS240E
3. Check the mounting position in the add on vacuum pump box and then disconnect the
three connectors (MSICN1, MSICN2, and MSICN3).
NXTBAS246

4. Remove the bolts (two) which fix the bracket of the vacuum control box.
NXTBAS247
5. Take out the vacuum control box with the bracket attached.

8.14 Replacing the DC Power Supply Unit on the

Feeder Pallet
Remove the feeder pallet prior to replacing the DC power supply unit on the part supply
base.
WARNING
Always turn the machine main switch OFF before performing this
work.
CAUTION


connectors.
8.14.1 M3(S) module

2. Remove the four bolts to remove the cover of the DC power supply unit from the part
supply base.
Cover
NXTBAS120E
DC power supply unit

3. Disconnect any connectors connected to the DC power supply unit.
Connectors
NXTBAS121E
4. Remove the four screws and then remove the DC power supply unit from the part supply
base and replace it.

NXTBAS122E

8.14.2 M6(S) module

2. Remove the four bolts to remove the cover of the DC power supply unit from the part
supply base.
Cover

NXTBAS117E
3. Disconnect any connectors connected to the DC power supply unit.
Connectors
NXTBAS118E

4. Remove the four screws and then remove the DC power supply unit from the part supply
base and replace it.

NXTBAS119E

8.15 Replacing a Conveyer Controller

WARNING
Always turn the machine main switch OFF before performing this work.
CAUTION


connectors.
• If procedures are performed with static electric charge still present,

the electrical components on boards may be damaged.
8.15.1 M3(S) module

1. Move the back rail for lane 2 forward.
2. Turn off the power supply.
4. Remove the two screws and then remove the cover.
Double conveyor
Cover
Lane 2
back rall
Conveyor controller
NXTBAS089Ea

Single Conveyor
Cover
Conveyor controller NXTBAS143E
5. Remove the connectors marked by the black sections in the illustration below from the
conveyor controller.
Double conveyor controller
NXTBAS090Ea
Single conveyor controller
NXTBAS140Ea

6. Remove the two screws and then remove the conveyor controller and bracket.
Bracket
Conveyor controller
NXTBAS091E
7. Remove the two or four screws and then remove the conveyor controller from the
bracket and replace it.
Double conveyor
Conveyor controller
Bracket
NXTBAS092Ea
Single Conveyor
Conveyor controller
NXTBAS144Ea

8.15.2 M6(S) module

3. Remove the two screws and then remove the cover. Then, remove the stay with air
valves.
Double conveyor
Conveyor controller
Cover
Stay
NXTBAS093Eb
Single Conveyor Conveyor controller
Cover
Stay
NXTBAS139Eb

4. From the conveyer controller, remove the connectors from the black portion as shown
in the figures below.
Double conveyor controller
NXTBAS090Ea
Single conveyor controller
NXTBAS140Ea

5. Remove the two screws and then remove the conveyor controller and bracket, or the
cover.
Double conveyor
Bracket
Conveyor controller
NXTBAS094Ea
Single Conveyor
Conveyor controller cover
NXTBAS141E

6. Remove the four screws and then remove the conveyor controller from the bracket and
replace it.
Double conveyor
Conveyor controller
Bracket
NXTBAS092Ea
Single Conveyor
Conveyor controller
NXTBAS142E

8.16 Replacing the Connector between the Feeder

Pallet and the Parts Supply Base
The feeder pallet and device base connectors are made up of several connectors put
together. When assembling the connectors ensure to follow the procedures below.
CAUTION
• Always turn the machine main switch OFF before removing or
attaching connectors.
• If the connectors are disassembled, confirm that the connectors

are correctly reassembled by referring the indicator lines on the
side of the connectors.

Allen wrench set
8.16.2 M3(S) module

2. A set of connectors (indicated in the figure below) is connected to the feeder pallet and
the part supply base.
Connector
(feeder pallet side)
Connector
(part supply base side)
NXTBAS096E
3. If the connectors are disassembled, confirm that they are correctly reassembled by
referring the indicator lines on the sides of the connectors.
Connectors (feeder pallet side)
Connectors (part supply base side)
Indicator lines
NXTBAS098E

8.16.3 M6(S) module

2. A set of connectors (indicated in the figure below) is connected to the feeder pallet and
the part supply base.
Connecting connector Connecting connector

(feeder pallet side) (part supply base side)
NXTBAS095E
referring the indicator lines on the sides of the connectors.
Connectors (feeder pallet side)
Indicator lines
NXTBAS097E

8.17 Replacing the Connector for the Tray Unit-L and

Parts Supply Base
Allen wrench set
8.17.2 Procedure
Follow the procedures below to reassemble the connectors for the tray unit-L.
CAUTION
• Always turn the machine main switch off before removing or
are correctly reassembled by referring to the indicator lines on the
2. A set of connectors (indicated in the figure below) is connected to the tray unit-L and the
parts supply base.

(tray unit-L side) (part supply base side)
NXTMTU045E
referring to the indicator lines on the sides of the connectors.
Connectors (tray unit-L side)
Indicator lines
NXTMTU046E

8.18 Detaching and Attaching the Tray Unit-L Cover

8.18.2 Tray unit-L cover nomenclature

The following exploded view of the unit parts are numbered in the order that they should be
dismantled.
Detach the parts according to this order, and attach them in the reverse order.
4
8
AIMMTU010
1. Rear cover
2. Top cover
3. Front rails
4. Front cover
5. Upper right side cover
6. Upper left side cover
7. Front door
8. Lower right side cover
9. Lower left side cover

8.18.3 Detachment
WARNING
Always turn the machine main switch OFF before performing this
work.
Detach the covers from the tray unit in the following order.
1. Rear cover.
Remove the four screws, and then detach the rear cover.
Rear cover
AIMMTU011E
2. Top cover
a. Remove the two screws at the back.
b. Open the door at the front for the top cover, and then remove the bolts on the left and
right.
Note: These bolts are tightened together with the magnet catches.
Magnetic catch Magnetic catch
Top cover door
AIMMTU012Ea
c. Detach the top cover.

3. Front rails
Remove the four bolts holding the front rails (together with the front cover) from the
inside of the tray unit.
Front cover
Front rails
AIMMTU013E
4. Front cover
Detach the front cover together with the front rails when the four bolts holding both parts
are removed in the step above.
5. Upper right side cover

The upper right side cover is secured by bolts (7) from the outside of the tray unit, and
secured by a nut (1) from the inside of the tray unit. First, it is necessary to lower the
magazine rack and remove the nut from the inside of the tray unit. Use the procedures
listed below to lower the magazine rack.
a. Remove the brake cover from the bottom of the tray unit.
Brake cover
Bolts (M5 x 2)
01MEC-0019E

b. Remove the 3 bolts from the coupling of the brake unit.

Caution: The TZ-axis motor pulley(*) is located close to the brake unit. Do not mistakenly loosen the
bolts for the TZ-axis motor pulley.
Brake unit
Coupling
TZ-axis motor pulley(*)
01MEC-0020E
WARNING
The magazine rack will fall when the coupling is loosened. Do not
insert fingers or other body parts under the magazine rack, or
injury may occur.
c. The coupling is wedged firmly into place and cannot be removed by only removing
the bolts. The coupling can be pushed off by screwing the bolts that were just
removed into the other, unused holes of the coupling.
(1) Loosen and remove (2) Screw the bolts into

the bolts from the coupling. the unused holes.
01MEC-0021E
d. Manually lower the magazine rack so that the nut securing the side cover can be
accessed from inside the tray unit.

e. Remove the nut holding the upper right side cover from the inside of the tray unit.
AIMMTU014
f. Remove the seven bolts holding the cover on the outside of the unit, and then remove
the cover.
6. Upper left side cover.
a. Remove the two nuts holding the upper left side cover from the door hinge inside the
machine.
Front door
AIMMTU015E
b. Remove the six bolts holding the cover on the outside of the unit, and then remove
the cover.

7. Front door
a. Remove the four air hoses from the front door air cylinders.
b. Remove the four bolts from the front door hinges.
Front door
AIMMTU016E
c. Remove the front door.
8. Lower right side cover

Remove the bolts, and then remove the cover.
9. Lower left side cover

Remove the bolts, and then remove the cover.

8.18.4 Attachment
1. Attach the covers in the reverse order from their detachment.
2. Tighten the couplings with the magazine rack at its upper limit.
Torque for the coupling bolts: 4.0 Nm
Rectangular block
Coupling
Bolt
AIMMTU018E

8.19 Replacing the Connector for the Tray Unit-LT

and Parts Supply Base
Allen wrench set
8.19.2 Procedure
Follow the procedures below to reassemble the connectors for the tray unit-LT.
CAUTION

2. A set of connectors (indicated in the figure below) is connected to the tray unit-LT and
the parts supply base.

(tray unit-LT side) (part supply base side)
01MEC-0236E
Connectors (tray unit-LT side)
Indicator lines
01MEC-0237E

8.20 Removing Tray Unit-LT Covers

8.20.2 Tray unit-LT cover configuration

1
4
7
12
9
10
01MEC-0235a
11
1. Top left cover 7. Front cover
2. Top cover 8. Lower magazine door
3. Rear cover 9. Lower left cover
4. Right side cover 10. Lower middle cover
5. Left side cover 11. Lower right cover
6. Upper magazine door 12. Lower cover

8.20.3 Removing covers
WARNING
Always remove and attach covers on the tray unit-LT after

removing the unit from the machine.
Left side cover

1. Remove the rear cover.
Rear cover
01MEC-0463E
2. Remove the top left cover.
Top left cover
01MEC-0464E
3. Remove the lower left cover.
Lower left cover
01MEC-0465E

4. From the rear side of the unit, remove the four screws holding the left side cover.
Left side cover
01MEC-0467E
5. Remove the remaining nine screws holding the left side cover and then remove the
cover.
01MEC-0468

Right side cover

Rear cover
01MEC-0463E
2. If the bucket type reel holder is installed, then remove it so that the right side cover can
be removed.
Bucket type reel holder
01MEC-0469E
3. From the rear side of the unit, remove the four screws holding the right side cover.
Right side cover
01MEC-0470E

4. Remove the three screws holding the right side cover shown in the diagram below.
01MEC-0471
5. Remove the remaining eight screws holding the right side cover and then remove the
cover.
Note: It is not necessary to remove the access cover (shown in grey in the diagram below).
01MEC-0472

Front cover
1. Remove the screws from the front cover that are on the top, left side, and bottom.
Front cover
01MEC-0478E
2. Gently remove the front cover from the tray unit by pulling it towards you.
3. Remove all of the cable connectors connected to the cover.

Lower covers
Lower left cover
01MEC-0465E
2. Remove the lower right cover.
Lower right cover
01MEC-0474E
3. Remove the lower middle cover.
Lower middle cover
01MEC-0475E

4. Remove the eight screws holding the lower cover.
Lower cover
01MEC-0476E
5. Gently remove the lower cover from the tray unit by pulling it towards you.

8.21 Replacing the Connector for the Tray Unit-LTC

and Parts Supply Base
Follow the procedures below to reassemble the connectors for the tray unit-LTC.
CAUTION

Allen wrench set
8.21.2 Procedure
2. A set of connectors (indicated in the figure below) is connected to the tray unit-LTC and
the parts supply base.

(tray unit-LTC side) (part supply base side)
01MEC-0519E
Connectors (tray unit-LTC side)
Indicator lines
01MEC-0523E

8.22 Removing Tray Unit-LTC Covers

8.22.2 Tray unit-LTC cover configuration
1
2
3
5
6
12
11
10 01MEC-0894
1. Top left cover 7. Front cover
2. Top cover 8. Lower magazine door
3. Rear cover 9. Lower left cover
4. Right side cover 10. Lower middle cover
5. Left side cover 11. Lower right cover
6. Upper magazine door 12. Lower cover

8.22.3 Removing covers
WARNING
Always remove and attach covers on the tray unit-LTC after

removing the unit from the machine.
Left side cover

Rear cover
01MEC-0896E
2. Remove the top left cover.
Top left cover
01MEC-0464E
Lower left cover
01MEC-0895E

4. From the rear side of the unit, remove the four screws holding the left side cover.
Left side cover
01MEC-0467E
5. Remove the remaining nine screws holding the left side cover and then remove the
cover.
01MEC-0468

Right side cover

Rear cover
01MEC-0896E
2. If the bucket type reel holder is installed, then remove it so that the right side cover can
be removed.
Bucket type reel holder
01MEC-0903E
3. From the rear side of the unit, remove the four screws holding the right side cover.
Right side cover
01MEC-0897E

4. Remove the three screws holding the right side cover shown in the diagram below.
01MEC-0898
5. Remove the remaining eight screws holding the right side cover and then remove the
cover.
Note: It is not necessary to remove the access cover (shown in gray in the diagram below).
01MEC-0472

Front cover
1. Remove the screws from the front cover that are on the top, left side, and bottom.
Front cover
01MEC-0899E
2. Gently remove the front cover from the tray unit by pulling it towards you.
3. Remove all of the cable connectors connected to the cover.

Lower covers
Lower left cover
01MEC-0895E
2. Remove the lower right cover.
Lower right cover
01MEC-0900E
3. Remove the lower middle cover.
Lower middle cover
01MEC-0901E
4. Remove the eight screws holding the lower cover.

Lower cover
01MEC-0902E
5. Gently remove the lower cover from the tray unit by pulling it towards you.

MEMO:

QD008-27 9. Measurement and Adjustment
9. Measurement and Adjustment

9.1 On machine PAM (Placement Accuracy
Measurement)
The following are explanations for on machine PAM (Placement Accuracy Measurement).
9.1.1 Required parts

The following items are necessary for PAM measurements.
Required parts when using H01, H02, H04, G04 or OF placing heads
Jig Glass board PZ1459* For all types of placing head
Jig Jig plate AA01B** For all types of placing head
Jig Clamp test jig PM2438* When less than 280 mm backup
plate (M3(S):2 jigs, M6(S):3 jigs)
Parts Glass parts PZ1460* Number of parts used

H01, OF: 32 parts
H02 : 64 parts *1
H04, G04 : 64 parts *1
Nozzle dia. 7.0 AA080** H01: 1 parts , H02 : 2 parts
dia. 7.0 AA07C** H04: 4 parts
dia. 7.0 AA6TM** G04: 4 parts
dia. 7.0 AA1CH** OF: 1 parts
Other Glass part double-sided tape 10 mm width, half transparent

(available on market)
*1 : If only 32 parts are available, perform the measurement twice so that data for 64
placements is acquired.

9. Measurement and Adjustment QD008-27
Required parts when using the H08, H12(S) or H12HS placing head
Jig Glass board PZ1459* For all types of placing head
Jig Jig plate AA01B** For all types of placing head
Jig Clamp test jig PM2438* When less than 280 mm backup
plate (M3(S):2 jigs, M6(S):3 jigs)
Parts 1005 white parts 10,000 part / reel
Nozzle f 0.7 AA735** H08: 8 parts

H12S, H12HS: 12 parts
Other White part double-sided tape T4067B #5605 (50 mm x 100 mm),
transparent

9.1.2 About the sample job

The machine application CD-ROM has sample jobs for on machine PAM. Change the
sample job that has the conditions you are to measure so that it matches the machine
configuration..
Head type sample job
H01 PAM_H01_Glass_Shuffle_S.JOB
G04 PAM_G04_Glass_Shuffle_S.JOB
OF PAM_OF_Glass_Shuffle_S.JOB
H08 PAM_H08_1005_S.JOB
H12(S), H12HS PAM_H12S_1005_S.JOB
There are 64 placements when measuring H02, H04, and G04 heads. When there are only
32 glass parts, this is insufficient for the required placement quantity. Divide the
placements in the sample job into 32 placements for two jobs. By dividing into two jobs, it
is possible to acquire data for the required amount of placements.
Caution: Do not change the sequence or part related data.
Do not optimize the job.
9.1.3 Notes on performing on machine PAM

During PAM measurements, the following are important:
• PAM is not supported for double lane conveyance. When a job that uses both
lane 1 and 2 is specified, measurement can only be performed on lane 1. To
perform PAM on lane 2, send a job which only uses lane 2 to the machine.
• When measuring the glass parts at lane 2, use the pickup position which is
exactly 64 places in front of the jig.
• If "NaN" displays above the measured PAM results on the operation panel, this
indicates that a vision processing error may have occurred during the
measuring process. If "NaN" or blank lines are in the results file, ignore the
affected data.

9.1.4 Preparing
Preparing to perform measurements for H01, H02, H04 or G04 placing
heads
1. Use stickers to cover the two rows of dots that are adjacent to the corner marks. This
is to prevent the corner marks from being read mistakenly. The tape should be placed
on the surface with the printing.
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
NXTBAS188Ea
2. Next, set the glass board with the printed surface face up on the jig plate and secure the
glass board with the holders at all 4 corners.
Holders Glass board
Jig plate
Holders
NXTBAS201E
3. Affix the number of strips indicated below of double-sided tape (10 mm wide) with the
first strip of tape covering the top 4 rows of dots, and the remaining strips affixed as
shown below with a gap of 3 rows in between each strip. Do not cover the top right or
bottom left end corner marks from step 1 with this tape.
• For the H01 head: 5 strips For the H04 head: 9 strips
Double-sided tape
4 rows
3 rows
1 row
NXTBAS189Ea

4. Set the glass parts with their beveled edges face down in jig plate. For the H01 and OF
heads, set 32 glass parts from the first row. Set 64 parts for the H02 head and 128 parts
for the H04 and G04 heads.
Jig plate
Glass parts
NXTBAS191E
Note: Ensure that the surfaces of the glass board and parts are kept clean at all times.
Preparing to perform measurements for H08, H12(S) or H12HS placing

heads
1. Use stickers to cover the two rows of dots that are adjacent to the corner marks. This
is to prevent the corner marks from being read mistakenly. The tape should be placed
on the surface with the printing.
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
NXTBAS188Ea
2. Next, set the glass board with the printed surface face up on the jig and secure the glass
board with the holders at all 4 corners.
Holders Glass board
Jig plate
Holders
NXTBAS201E

3. Affix a strip of double-sided tape (50 mm wide with a minimum of 100mm in length)
across the bottom left corner of the glass board as shown below. Do not cover the
corner marks from step 1 with this tape.
Note: It is essential that nothing is trapped between the tape and the glass board including air
pockets.
Double-sided tape
50 mm
more than 100 mm
50 mm
50 mm NXTBAS190Eb
4. Set the white 1005 parts on an 8 mm feeder and set the pitch to be 2 mm pitch and then
set on the module to be used for PAM measurements.
Note: Ensure that the surfaces of the glass board and parts are kept clean at all times.

9.1.5 Placing accuracy measurement (PAM) flow chart

PAM is performed for each head.
When measuring PAM, remeasure the calibration data for the module before performing
PAM.
To check the accuracy of a module where PAM has previously been performed, perform
PAM without deleting the final offset file of the relevant head. The final offset file should only
be deleted when the placement accuracy is not good before performing PAM.
Change to PAM mode
Perform PAM
Are PAM results 0Q

OK?
;GU
Cancel PAM mode
(When creating the final

offset file easily) (When creating the final
offset file manually)
Select the easy create command and Select the manually create command
the final offset file is sent to the machine. and acquire PAM results.
Calculate PAM results
First time How many times was Second time or more

PAM performed?
"Output File (1/1)" to output "Output File (1/2)" to output

the final offset file the final offset file
Generate the binary file

and text file
Transmit the binary file for

calibrating the machine
(Repeat PAM) NXTPAM001b

9.1.6 Setting PAM measurement mode

There are two PAM measurement modes available (explained below). Select the mode
according to your purpose.
a. [PAM mode] - for measuring placement accuracy, calculating values for the final
offset file and sending to the machine.
b. [Accuracy check mode] - for confirming the accuracy of placement only.

Note: The steps below are performed using Accessory Software. For further details, refer to
"Performing on machine PAM" in the online Accessory Software operation manual on line.
Checks before setting PAM mode

Check the following before setting the PAM mode
a. Transmit the job to the machine in normal mode.
b. Use the nozzle exchange command to return all nozzles currently held by the head
to the nozzle station.
c. Confirm that there are no backup pins set on the backup plates.
d. In the [Loader setting] category of [Machine Configuration] in Accessory Software,

set both [Maximum panel width for lane 1] and [Maximum panel width for lane 2] to
[50 mm to 280 mm].
Specifying the PAM mode

1. From the machine accessories page in Accessory Software, select the module for which
PAM measurement is to be performed and click [Remote operation].
2. Click [On machine PAM]. The page changes to display the available options.
01MEC-0

3. Click [Change to PAM mode] or [Change to accuracy check mode].
01MEC-0639E
4. Click [Start]. The mode change is sent to the selected module. If completed
successfully, the module changes to PAM mode.
01MEC-0008E
Note: When in PAM mode, the background color of the operation panel is dark brown.
To cancel PAM mode, click [Remote operation] - [On machine PAM] - [Cancel PAM mode].
Click [Start] and then [Close] to return the module to the normal operating display. Also be
aware that when the machine returns from PAM mode to production operation, the job is
deleted from the machine.

9.1.7 PAM measurements

Measure using the following procedure. If backup pins are set on the backup plate, remove
them before performing the procedure.
Note: If backup pins remain on the backup plate during PAM measurement, the jig will collide with
the pins.
1. Transmit the PAM job from Flexa to the machine. For [Accuracy check mode], [CHECK]
is displayed before the name of the job transmitted.
2. Set the necessary feeder on the module at the required slot.
a. When performing PAM using a H08, H12(S) or H12HS heads, use the feeder with
white 1005 parts prepared earlier in the appropriate position and push set for the
feeder in the module.
b. When performing PAM using H01, H02, H04, G04 or OF heads on a module with a
feeder pallet, set an empty 12 mm feeder with 4 mm pitch on the module using glass
parts and push set for that feeder position.
c. When performing PAM on module with a tray unit-L/LT, skip this step.
3. Push START on all modules. Calibration is automatically performed and the conveyors
are automatically adjusted to be the correct size for the jig.
Note: It is necessary to push START on all modules. The conveyor width has to be correct on all
modules.
NXTOPE139
4. Upon completing calibration, the machine waits for panels to be loaded. Push CYCLE
STOP on all of the modules.
5. Push MANUAL on the module to perform PAM to display the manual commands.
6. Use the arrow keys to highlight cleaning pictogram and then push OK. The module is
unclamped and moved forward a little. When unclamped, the module moves forward a
short distance and can pinch or severe any items between the module and the base.
01MEC-0007
7. Confirm that the surrounding is safe. Grip the handle for the module and squeeze to
release the module brake. Gently pull the module forward.

8. Set the jig plate (if using a H01, H02, H04, G04 or OF head, with the loaded glass parts)
in lane 1 on the module.
9. Grip the handle for the module and squeeze to release the module brake and gently
10.Push MANUAL on the machine to exit the manual commands and then push START.
The module then places parts and then measures the placing accuracy. Upon
completion, the jig plate is automatically unclamped.
NXTOPE139
11.Wait until all operations are completed and the jig plate is unclamped, and then push
CYCLE STOP to return to the main screen.
12.Push MANUAL on the module to display the manual commands. Use the arrow keys to
highlight panel removal pictogram and push OK.
13.Follow the guidance displayed on the screen to remove the jig plate and gently push the
module back.
14.Push MANUAL on return to autopilot
15.Take note the placement accuracy results displayed on the operation panel.
01MEC-0640
16.If the PAM results are outside the tolerance range, it is necessary to create a final offset
file. The final offset file cannot be created in [Accuracy check mode].
OF, H01,
H08, H04 H02,
H12HS G04
Cpk 1.00 0.050 0.050 0.030
Placement accuracy (3 )
Cpk 1.33 0.066 0.066 0.040
17.For the H01, H02, H04, G04 or OF heads, remove all glass parts from the tape and place
them back in the jig plate. For the H08, H12S or H12HS heads, remove the tape along
with all components placed on it when measuring white 1005 parts and affix new tape
on the glass board.

9.1.8 Creating a final offset file

With [PAM mode] a final offset file is created after the completion of PAM measurements.
There are two ways to create a final offset file, the easy creation method and the manual
creation method.
The easy creation method does not use Accessory Software and the final offset values can
be sent to the machine easily. Use the easy creation method except when it is strictly
necessary to use the manual method. The manual method should only be used when the
following is true.
a. Offset values are to be edited
b. When measuring H02, H04 or G04 heads on machines with single or double
conveyors and there are only 32 glass parts.
Caution: Do not change the name of the final offset file. The file may not be able to be read by the
machine and the offset values will not be saved in the machine.
The final offset file cannot be created in [Accuracy check mode]. To acquire the
measurement results when using this mode, save the data in the same manner as for the
manual creation method.
Final offset file easy creation method

1. When the PAM results are displayed on the operation panel, use the arrow keys to
select the easy creation command and push OK. The final offset file will be created
momentarily and the main screen displayed.
01MEC-0641
2. When measuring again to confirm the accuracy, set the jig plate in the machine and
push START. Pushing start saves the final offset file in the machine and starts
measurement.
3. When PAM is complete, create a backup of the final offset file. Select [Calibration] -
[Delete and save offset file] in Accessory Software.
01MEC-0642E

4. Select the final offset file to backup and click [Save file].
01MEC-0643E
5. With the easy creation method, it is not necessary to transmit the file. The offset file is
saved in the machine automatically at any of the following points.
• When START is pushed with the machine in PAM mode
• When the machine is changed from PAM mode to production mode
• When the machine is restarted
Final offset file manual creation method

Note: The steps shown below are guidance to operations in Accessory Software. For further
details, refer to on machine PAM in the Accessory Software operation manual on line.
1. When the PAM results are displayed on the operation panel, use the arrow keys to
select the manual creation command and push OK. The main screen displays.
01MEC-0644
2. Check that the module that you wish to perform PAM on is selected and click [Remote
operation] - [On machine PAM].
01MEC-0638E

3. Click [Start Acquisition] to start the acquisition process.
01MEC-0645E
4. Right-click the file to download from the list that displays and click [Target As]. A [Save
As] dialog box is displayed.
Note: [Start Acquisition] downloads the results from the machine to the server and then displays
a list of the acquired files. By saving a file from this list, the results are downloaded from
the server to the client computer. The results are used for correcting the placement
accuracy.
5. Right-click the file to download from the list that displays and click [Save Target As]. A
[Save As] dialog box is displayed.
NXTOPE156E
6. Specify the location to save the file and click [Save]. The results are saved to the
specified location.
Note: It is best to save each file to the desktop using an easily understood file name (such as
PAM1.dat).
7. When using PAM mode, edit the saved data and save in the machine as the final offset
file. Refer to section section 9.1.9 "Correcting the placement accuracy (final offset file)"
for details.

9.1.9 Correcting the placement accuracy (final offset file)

Creating calculation data
1. Open the excel file for calculating PAM data which is located on the NXT installation CD.
• /Documents/PAM/PamToFinalOffset_v***.xls
Note: It is necessary to click [Enable Macros] in the displayed message box.
2. Select the language to use, click [Processing Start], then specify the PAM1.dat file that
is measured.
NXTOPE144Ea
Note: The .dat file naming system is as follows; select the target file checking by the module serial
No. and the head serial No. Those serial numbers can be confirmed on the information
command of the machine manual mode.
PAM01_M3_XNo01_H01_000020.dat
Module nickname
Module serial number
Head type
Head serial number NXTOPE241E
3. Click [Yes] in the dialog box after selecting the .dat file.
NXTOPE242E
4. The measured PAM results are loaded, calculated and displayed in the result and final
offset sheets.
Result sheet
The result sheet shows the placement accuracy (3 sigma) for the entire module, each angle
and each holder as well as the average placement accuracy for each angle and holder.
Values in red indicate that the value is outside the tolerance range.

• Click [CPK..] to change the CPK coefficient.
• Click [Print] to print the result sheet enter the user name & production number.
When the values of the results are outside the tolerance range, it is not possible
to print.
Final offset sheet

The manual final offsets (X, Y, Q) display by placement angles for each nozzle holder.
When the values of the results are outside the tolerance range, it is not possible to print.
NXTOPE244E

Outputting the correction file

1. Generate the correction file from the final offset sheet. The method differs depending
on the measurement and output conditions.
a. If performing PAM for the first time
• Click [Output File (1/1)].
NXTOPE245E
b. If performing PAM for the second time or more
• Click [Previous offset value] then [Output File (1/2)].
NXTOPE246E

c. If performing PAM for the second time or more, and changing the manual offset value
only for items which have exceeded a specified value.
• Click each range button, then input the desired value.
NXTOPE247
d. If performing PAM for the second time or more, and updating a percentage of the
measured results to the previous results.
• Click each [Reflection percentage] button, then input the desired value.
NXTOPE248

e. If performing PAM for the second time or more, and changing the manual offset value
only for certain items.
• Toggle the button (green) to OFF at the desired item.
NXTOPE247
Note:
1. If there are many items to change, select [ON] for those items which are not to be
changed.
2. If there are only a few items to change, select [All ON] and then change only those items
which are to be changed to [OFF].
In order to cancel the previous offset value, click [Delete previous offset].
NXTOPE251E

2. Click [Output File (1/1)] or [Output File (1/2)] to generate successively the binary file and
the text file. The dialog boxes display the file path and file name, click [OK].

NXTOPE252E
Note: The file naming system is as follows;
M3_XNo1_H01_000020_050822134648.bin(.txt)
Module nickname
Module serial number
Head type
Head serial number
File creation date
(YYMMDDHHMMSS) NXTOPE253Ea
3. In Accessory Software, transmit the binary file to the machine.
a. From [Machine Configuration], select the module to which to send the file.
b. Click [Calibration].
c. Click [Send offset file].
NXTOPE254E

d. Select the target file, then click [Send File].
NXTOPE255E
e. The final offsets are updated at the machine at either of the following times.
• When START is pushed with the machine in PAM mode.
• When the machine is changed from PAM mode to normal production mode.
• When the machine is rebooted.

9.1.10 Changing the type of PAM mode

There are three type of PAM modes available. These three types are [Place & Measure],
[Measure], and [Place]. The [Place & measure] mode is the default type. With this type of
mode, the parts are picked and placed on the module and then the placing accuracy is
measured on the module. If [Place] is specified, then the module only places the PAM parts
on the glass board. If [Measure] is specified, then the module only measures the placing
accuracy of previously placed PAM parts.
Follow the procedures below to change the type of PAM mode.
1. When in PAM mode, push MANUAL to display the manual commands
01MEC-0004
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the diagnosis pictogram and then push OK.
01MEC-0005
3. The 3 modes are displayed on the operation panel. The one that is highlighted (green)
represents the current type of mode in use. Use the arrow keys to highlight a different
mode if necessary, and push OK to exit this screen.
01MEC-0006
4. Push MANUAL to return to the main screen.

9.2 Sensitivity Adjustment for the Conveyor Panel

Pass Sensor
The panel pass sensors for the conveyor are transmission sensors. The sensitivity of these
sensors is automatically adjusted so that precise detection of panels is maintained even if
the conveyor width is changed. There are cases in which errors occur due to items such
as manually changing the conveyor width because the automatic sensitivity adjustment is
not performed. When errors occur, follow one of the methods below to restore the
automatic adjustment.
a. Turn the ballscrew by hand for the conveyor to make the width narrower until a
positive values display in the sensor amplifiers. (Check the sensor amplifier and
when a positive value displays, the automatic sensitivity adjust function is restored).
b. Reset the sensor sensitivity using Accessory Software. (See section 9.2.1 "Remote
adjustment procedure" for details).
c. Manually reset the sensor sensitivity at the sensor amplifier on the machine. (See
section 9.2.2 "On-machine adjustment procedure" for details).
WARNING

magnetic field.
CAUTION
may be deformed.

tools.


CAUTION
Linear motor shaft
Linear scale
9.2.1 Remote adjustment procedure

Reset the sensor sensitivity using Accessory Software. All conveyor sensors for the
module can be adjusted at once when using this method. Adjustment of the sensors using
Accessory Software is much easier to perform than on-machine adjustment, particularly
when many modules exist in a line.
1. Start Accessory Software and from Floor Monitor, click the machine name that has the
sensor to be adjusted. The machine Accessories log on page is displayed.
2. Select a user ID from the drop-down list.
3. Enter the password for the user and click [Log on].
4. Select the module on which to adjust the sensor and click [Remote Operation].
5. Click [Conveyor sensor sensitivity adjustment].
6. Ensure that there are no panels or any other items blocking any of the sensors and then
click [Start]. The sensitivity for the conveyor sensors for the selected module are
adjusted,

9.2.2 On-machine adjustment procedure

Manually reset the sensor sensitivity at the sensor amplifier on the machine.
1. Pull out the module. (Refer to 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module")
2. Open the lid of the sensor amplifier that needs to be adjusted.
1 Lane 1 (front) conveyor in sensor 2 Action changeover Dial

1 switch
2 Lane 1 (front) conveyor out sensor
LO
3
3 Lane 2 (rear) conveyor in sensor
4 Lane 2 (rear) conveyor out sensor 3
DO
1
20
Digital display
TMR
RUN
ADJ
SET
Mode indicator
2 Sensor activated LED

NXTSEN012Ea
3. Ensure that the action changeover switch is set to LO.
4. Push in the dial once. RUN flashes in the mode indicator location, and the digital display
changes to display "AA".
Note: If an error has occurred, the digital display may not change or display some other item but
the mode indicator does change correctly.
5. Rotate the dial until SET flashes in the mode indicator. The digital display changes to
“PH“.
6. Push the dial once again and the SET mode indicator remains lit while “PH“ flashes.
7. Push the dial once and the current value (the sensitivity of the sensor) for the sensor
amplifier flashes on the digital display.
8. Rotate the dial until the display reads 90.
9. Once the value of 90 is specified, push the dial to enter that value. "PH" then displays.
10.Push the dial again and the SET mode indicator then flashes.
11.Rotate the dial until RUN flashes in the mode indicator. The digital display changes to
“AA“.
12.Push the dial once again and RUN remains lit in the mode indicator, the digital display
shows the current measured value.
13.Check the condition by blocking the light for the adjusted sensor and the sensor
activated LED should turn off when the light is blocked. If it does not respond correctly,
repeat these procedures.
14.Close the lid for the sensor amplifier and return the module to its original position. (Refer
to 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module".)

9.3 Module Vacuum Sensor

9.3.1 Procedure
1. Pull the module that needs to be adjusted forward. (Refer to 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning
a Module".) If the module is the first module on the base and has the side cover on the
left side, remove the side cover to gain access to the sensor position.
2. Locate the module vacuum sensor. It is positioned on the left lower front side. There
are two sensors at this position displaying numbers. The vacuum sensor is the sensor
closest to the front of the module.
Module pressure sensor

(PS6-103G-PWM-019)
Module vacuum sensor

NXTBAS023E
(PS6-102V-PWM-020)
3. Change the MODE switch to S1 using a precision minus screwdriver.
4. Use the screwdriver to adjust the SET1 switch until the value -59 displays.
Note: Changing the MODE switch only changes the display. If SET1 or SET2 are adjusted when
the value for that item is not being displayed, the value will still change.
5. Change the MODE switch to S2 with the screwdriver.
6. Use the screwdriver to adjust the SET2 switch until the value 00 displays.
7. Change the MODE switch back to ME to display the current vacuum value.
Note: If any of the switches are changed while the value for that switch is not being displayed, be
sure to adjust that value to be correct after displaying it.
8. If the side cover was removed, replace it and then return the module to its original
position. (Refer to 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module".)

9.4 Module Pressure Sensor

9.4.1 Procedure
a Module".) If the module the first module on the base and has the side cover on the left
side, remove the side cover to gain access to the sensor position.
2. Locate the module pressure sensor. It is positioned on the left lower front side. There
are two sensors at this position displaying numbers. The pressure sensor is the sensor
farthest from the front of the module.
Module pressure sensor

(PS6-103G-PWM-019)
Module vacuum sensor

NXTBAS023E
(PS6-102V-PWM-020)
3. Change the MODE switch to S1 using a precision minus screwdriver.
4. Use the screwdriver to adjust the SET1 switch until the value 0.40 displays.
Note: Changing the MODE switch only changes the display. If SET1 or SET2 are adjusted when
the value for that item is not being displayed, the value will still change.
5. Change the MODE switch to S2 with the screwdriver.
6. Use the screwdriver to adjust the SET2 switch until the value 0.0 displays.
7. Change the MODE switch back to ME to display the current pressure value.
Note: If any of the switches are changed while the value for that switch is not being displayed, be
sure to adjust that value to be correct after displaying it.
8. If the side cover was removed, replace it and then return the module to its original
position. (Refer to 5.1 "Pulling Out/Returning a Module".)

9.5 Base Vacuum Sensor

9.5.1 Procedure
1. Locate the base vacuum sensor. It is positioned on the front left side and is the right
display of the two displays.
2. Push and hold the SET button until "LoC" displays.
3. Continue pushing one of the arrow keys until "UnL" displays and then push SET.
4. Push and hold SET for longer than two (2) seconds. The display will change to display
"SOG", "Sor", "rED", or "Grn".
5. Push an arrow key repeatedly until SoG displays.
6. Push SET and the characters "HYS" or "Ynd" display.
7. Push an arrow key repeatedly until HYS displays.
8. Push SET and the characters "no" or "nC" will display.
9. Push an arrow key repeatedly until “nC” displays.
10.Push SET and a value will display.
11.Push an arrow key repeatedly until 2.5 displays.
12.Push SET and characters will display.
13.Push an arrow key repeatedly until the characters like "nAn" display.
14.Push SET to complete the sensor initial settings.
15.Push SET and "n_1" flashes on the display alternating with the value.
16.Push the up key to display the value for n_1.
17.Use the arrow keys to change the blinking value to "0".

Note: If no actions are performed within ten seconds, the display changes back to the alternating
display. Push one of the arrow keys to change the display back.
18.Push SET to change to the second digit.
19.Use the arrow keys to change the second digit to "9".
20.Push SET to change to the third digit.
21.Use the arrow keys to change the third digit to "5".
22.Push SET to change to the sign position.
23.Use the arrow keys to change the sign to the " " shape. This indicates that the minus
sign is selected.
24.Do not push any keys once the correct value of -59.0 has been entered. Automatically
the display will begin to alternate between "n_1" and the value.
25.Push SET and then push SET again to display to the current measured value.
26.Push and hold SET until "UnL" displays.

27.Use the arrow keys to change the display to "LoC" and then push SET to complete the
setting procedure.

9.6 Base Pressure Sensor

9.6.1 Procedure
1. Locate the base pressure sensor. It is positioned on the front left side and is the left
display of the two displays.
2. Push and hold the SET button until "LoC" displays.
3. Continue pushing one of the arrow keys until "UnL" displays and then push SET.
4. Push and hold SET for longer than two (2) seconds. The display will change to display
"SOG", "Sor", "rED", or "Grn".
5. Push an arrow key repeatedly until SoG displays.
6. Push SET and the characters "HYS" or "Ynd" display.
7. Push an arrow key repeatedly until HYS displays.
8. Push SET and the characters "no" or "nC" will display.
9. Push an arrow key repeatedly until “no” displays.
10.Push SET and a value will display.
11.Push an arrow key repeatedly until 2.5 displays.
12.Push SET and characters will display.
13.Push an arrow key repeatedly until the characters like "nAn" display.
14.Push SET to complete the sensor initial settings.
15.Push SET and "P_1" flashes on the display alternating with the value.
16.Push the up key to display the value for P_1.
17.Use the arrow keys to change the blinking value to "0".

Note: If no actions are performed within ten seconds, the display automatically changes back to
the alternating display. Push an arrow key to change the display back.
18.Push SET to change to the second digit.
19.Use the arrow keys to change the second digit to "0".
20.Push SET to change to the third digit.
21.Use the arrow keys to change the third digit to "4".
22.Push SET to change to the sign position.
23.Use the arrow keys to change the sign to the “ “shape. This indicates that the positive
sign is selected.
24.Do not push any keys once the correct value of 0.40 has been entered. Automatically
the display will begin to alternate between "P_1" and the value after a short time.
25.Push SET and then push SET again to display to the current measured value.
26.Push and hold SET until "UnL" displays.

27.Use the arrow keys to change the display to "LoC" and then push SET to complete the
setting procedure.

9.7 Adjusting Panel Clamp Sensors

The panel clamp sensor dog position is changed in order to adjust the point of when the
panel clamp sensor is activated.
Dogs
Panel clamp sensors NXTBAS196E
9.7.1 Required items

• Jigs PM4577*
NXTBAS195
• Metric Allen wrench set
The jig plate is a 100 mm square plate. Two sides of the jig plate have a thickness of 7.5
mm +/-0.01 and the other two sides have a thickness of 7.4 mm +/-0.01.
9.7.2 Procedure
a Module".) If the module has a side cover, remove the side cover to allow easier access
to the sensor position.
2. Push and hold POWER on the operation panel for more than four seconds and then
release to change the module to sleep mode.
3. Manually change the conveyor width for the lane to be adjusted until the jig plate can be
set in it. Turn the ballscrews to change the conveyor width.
Note: An easier method for adjusting the conveyor exists but requires some planning. Before
attempting to adjust the panel clamper sensor, make a job with a 100 x 100 mm panel, and
then transmit it to the machine and begin production without loading any panels. The
conveyors will be changed to 100 wide for the panel from the job.
4. Set the jig so the edges that are 7.5 mm thick will be clamped by the conveyor.
5. Clamp the jig.

6. With the jig clamped, adjust the dog position so the sensor light is just turned off.
Jig
7.5
Light is off
NXTBAS198E
NXTBAS197E
7. Unclamp the jig plate and remove it. Set the jig plate so the edges that are 7.4 mm thick
will be clamped by the conveyor.
8. Clamp the jig.
9. With the jig clamped, adjust the dog position so the sensor light is just turned on.
Jig
7.4
Light is on
NXTBAS200E
NXTBAS199E
10.If the conveyor is a double conveyor, adjust the sensor dog for lane 2 by repeating the
same instructions.
11.Remove the jig from the module.

Note: Because the conveyor width is manually changed, it is possible that the conveyor panel left
and right sensitivity needs to be adjusted. (See to 9.2 "Sensitivity Adjustment for the
Conveyor Panel Pass Sensor".)

MEMO:

QD008-27 10. Supplementary Information
10. Supplementary Information

10.1 Noise Levels
10.1.1 Measured noise levels
The following table shows the measured noise levels for the machine during operation.
Measurement Points (in the figure) Maximum Noise Level (dB)
(1) Distance from the front side of the machine: 1m 71.6
(2) Distance from the right side of the machine: 1m 70.0
(3) Distance from the left side of the machine: 1m 71.4
(4) Distance from the rear side of the machine: 1m 68.9
M3x4(H08) - M6(H04) - M6(H01+Tray unit-L)
(4)
(3) NXT (2)
(1) 01MEC-0014
WARNING
Operators should use hearing protection such as ear plugs in

operating environments where noise levels are high enough to
cause hearing damage (80 dB or higher).

10. Supplementary Information QD008-27
MEMO:

QD008-27 Index
Index
Numerics Base control box 2
2M base Replacing .......................................... 474
Functions ............................................ 45 Base control box 3
4M base Replacing .......................................... 478
Functions ............................................ 45 Base control box 4
8M base Replacing .......................................... 480
Functions ............................................ 45 Base CPU battery
A Replacing .......................................... 384
Adjusting Base CPU box
Base pressure sensor ....................... 564 Functions ............................................. 51
Base vacuum sensor ........................ 562 Replacing .......................................... 482
Conveyor panel pass sensor ............ 557 Base pressure sensor
Module pressure sensor ................... 561 Adjusting ........................................... 564
Module vacuum sensor ..................... 560 Base support
Panel clamp sensors ......................... 566 Lubricating ......................................... 266
Tray unit-L belt tension ..................... 325 Base vacuum sensor
Tray unit-LT belt tension ................... 330 Adjusting ........................................... 562
Tray unit-LTC belt tension ................. 336 Body
Tray unit-M belt tension .................... 344 Components ........................................ 23
Air regulator C
Cleaning ............................................ 291 Checking
Attaching Conveyor belt tension ............... 318, 356
Module side covers ........................... 112 mechanical valve O-rings .................. 265
Nozzle station ................................... 155 Single conveyor S belt tension .......... 320
Placing head ..................................... 145 Tray unit-L belt tension ...................... 325
Tray unit-M ........................................ 214 Tray unit-LT belt tension ................... 330
B Tray unit-LTC belt tension ................. 336
Backup plates Tray unit-M belt tension ..................... 344
Exchanging ....................................... 159 Cleaning
Base Air regulator ....................................... 291
Functions ............................................ 45 Conveyor belts .................................. 357
Machine configuration ......................... 42 Feeder pallet ..................................... 244
Sensor position ............................. 55, 66 Feeder pallet and part supply base
connector ......................................... 348
Base control box 1
H01 head flange filter ........................ 255
Replacing .......................................... 470
H01 sleeve assembly ........................ 286
H02 head flange filter ........................ 255

Index QD008-27
Mark camera light half mirror ............ 295 PCU (Pallet Change Unit) ................... 37
Mist separator filter ........................... 299 Placing head ....................................... 24
Module (interior) ................................ 245 Reject parts ......................................... 34
Module Top Cover ............................ 352 Tray unit-L ........................................... 30
Nozzle station ................................... 241 Tray unit-LT ......................................... 31
Nozzle vacuum filter .......................... 250 Tray unit-LTC ...................................... 32
Nozzles ............................................. 353 Tray unit-M .......................................... 33
Parts camera glass cover ................. 242 Waste tape processing unit ................. 36
Parts camera glass cover inside light unit Control system
........................................................... 243
Functions ............................................. 51
Parts camera lens ............................. 296
Conveyer controller
Placing head syringes ....................... 256
Replacing .......................................... 499
Placing head vacuum filters .............. 250
Conveyor
Reject parts box ................................ 240
Checking belt tension ................ 318, 356
Reject parts conveyor belt ................ 248
Conveyor belt cleaner
Soft backup pins ............................... 358
Replacing .......................................... 366
Tray unit-L conveyor belts ................. 248
Conveyor belts
Tray unit-L fan filter ........................... 301
Cleaning ............................................ 357
Tray unit-L shuttle belts ..................... 248
Replacing .......................................... 363
Tray unit-LT conveyor belts .............. 249
Conveyor panel clamp
Tray unit-LT feeder slots and connectors
........................................................... 247 Lubricating ......................................... 284
Tray unit-LT shuttle belts .................. 249 Conveyor panel pass sensor
Tray unit-LTC conveyor belts ............ 249 Adjusting ........................................... 557
Tray unit-LTC feeder slots and connectors Cooling fan

........................................................... 247 Replacing .......................................... 410
Tray unit-LTC shuttle belts ................ 249 Cover attachment
Tray unit-M ........................................ 290 Tray unit-L ......................................... 509
Vacuum pump filter ........................... 300 Tray unit-LT ....................................... 517
Waste tape box ................................. 240 Tray unit-LTC .................................... 526
Waste tape cutter .............................. 349 Cover detachment
Waste tape processing unit duct ....... 349 Tray unit-L ......................................... 509
Components Tray unit-LT ....................................... 517
Body .................................................... 23 Tray unit-LTC .................................... 526
Feeder pallet ....................................... 29
D
Mark camera ....................................... 28
Double conveyor
Mark camera light ............................... 28
Functions ............................................. 51
MCU (Module Change Unit) ................ 38
Lubricating ......................................... 314
Nozzle changer ................................... 35
Sensor position ................................... 72
Parts camera ....................................... 27

QD008-27 Index
E H12(S) head ........................................ 48

Empty trays H12HS head ........................................ 48
Removing empty trays ...................... 351 M3(S) module ...................................... 46
Exchanging M6 module .......................................... 46
Backup plates ................................... 159 M6S module ........................................ 46
Nozzle clamp pins ............................. 253 Mark camera ....................................... 50
Nozzle pickup surface ....................... 253 Module ................................................ 46
F Module CPU box ................................. 51
Feeder pallet Module servo box ................................ 51
Cleaning ............................................ 244 Nozzle changer ................................... 49
Components ........................................ 29 Operation panel ................................... 51
Functions ............................................ 50 Panel conveyance ............................... 51
Loading ............................................. 113 Parts camera ....................................... 50
Removing .......................................... 113 Parts supply system ............................ 50
Sensor position ................................... 70 Placing head ....................................... 47
Feeder pallet and part supply base connector Single conveyor ................................... 51
Cleaning ............................................ 348 Single conveyor S ............................... 51
Feeder pallet and parts supply base connector Tray unit-L ........................................... 50
Replacing .......................................... 506 Tray unit-LT ......................................... 50
Feeder pallet DC power supply unit Tray unit-LTC ...................................... 50
Replacing .......................................... 495 Tray unit-M .......................................... 50
Flat cable for X-axis Vision system ...................................... 50
Lubricating ........................................ 277 Fuse on a base control I/F board
Flat cable for Y-axis Replacing .......................................... 399
Lubricating ........................................ 277 Fuse on a board inside a module
Functions Replacing .......................................... 389
2M base .............................................. 45 Fuses on base remote I/O boards
4M base .............................................. 45 Replacing .......................................... 391
8M base .............................................. 45 G
Base .................................................... 45 Grease
Base CPU box .................................... 51 Applying grease ................................ 233
Control system .................................... 51 H
Double conveyor ................................. 51 H01 head
Feeder pallet ....................................... 50 Functions ............................................. 48
H01 head ............................................ 48 Lubricating ......................................... 304
H02 head ............................................ 48 H01 head flange filter
H04 head ............................................ 48 Cleaning ............................................ 255
H08 head ............................................ 48

Index QD008-27
H01 sleeve assembly H12(S) head .............................. 282, 309

Cleaning ............................................ 286 H12HS head ...................... 282, 283, 311
H02 head Module support ................................. 266
Functions ............................................ 48 Nozzle changer up/down shafts ........ 292
Lubricating ........................................ 305 PCU (Pallet Change Unit) ................. 359
H02 head flange filter Single conveyor ................................. 315
Cleaning ............................................ 255 Single conveyor S ............................. 316
H04 head Syringe O-rings ................................. 260
Functions ............................................ 48 Syringes ............................................ 260
Lubricating ................................ 282, 307 Tray unit-L ......................................... 323
H08 head Tray unit-LT ....................................... 328
Functions ............................................ 48 Tray unit-LTC .................................... 334
Lubricating ................................ 282, 309 Tray unit-M ................................ 340, 342
H12(S) head Waste tape processing unit ............... 313
Functions ............................................ 48 XY-robot ............................................ 267
Lubricating ................................ 282, 309 M
H12HS head M3(S) module
Functions ............................................ 48 Functions ............................................. 46
Lubricating ........................ 282, 283, 311 Machine configuration ......................... 39
I M6 module
Inserting Functions ............................................. 46
Module ................................................ 98 Machine configuration ......................... 40
Tray unit-L ......................................... 120 M6S module
Tray unit-LT ....................................... 126 Functions ............................................. 46
Tray unit-LTC .................................... 137 Machine configuration ......................... 40
L Machine configuration .............................. 39
Loading Base .................................................... 42
Feeder pallet ..................................... 113 M3(S) module ...................................... 39
Lubricating M6 module .......................................... 40
Base support ..................................... 266 M6S module ........................................ 40
Conveyor panel clamp ...................... 284 Mark camera
Double conveyor ............................... 314 Components ........................................ 28
Flat cable for X-axis .......................... 277 Functions ............................................. 50
Flat cable for Y-axis .......................... 277 Replacing .......................................... 447
H01 head .......................................... 304 Mark camera light
H02 head .......................................... 305 Components ........................................ 28
H04 head .................................. 282, 307 Mark camera light half mirror
H08 head .................................. 282, 309 Cleaning ............................................ 295

QD008-27 Index
MCU (Module Change Unit) N

Components ........................................ 38 Nozzle changer
mechanical valve O-rings Components ........................................ 35
Checking ........................................... 265 Functions ............................................. 49
Replacing .......................................... 302 Sensor position ................................... 69
Mist separator filter Nozzle changer up/down shafts
Cleaning ............................................ 299 Lubricating ......................................... 292
Module Nozzle clamp pins
Functions ............................................ 46 Exchanging ....................................... 253
Inserting .............................................. 98 Nozzle pickup surface
Pulling out ........................................... 95 Exchanging ....................................... 253
Removing ............................................ 98 Nozzle station
Returning ............................................ 95 Attaching ........................................... 155
Module (interior) Cleaning ............................................ 241
Cleaning ............................................ 245 Removing .......................................... 155
Module control box Nozzle station fluorescent stickers
Replacing .......................................... 462 Replacing .......................................... 387
Module CPU battery Nozzle vacuum filter
Replacing .......................................... 375 Cleaning ............................................ 250
Module CPU box Nozzles
Functions ............................................ 51 Cleaning ............................................ 353
Replacing .......................................... 466 O
Module pressure sensor Operation panel
Adjusting ........................................... 561 Functions ............................................. 51
Module servo amplifier battery
P
Replacing .......................................... 368
PAM
Module servo box
On machine PAM (Placement accuracy
Functions ............................................ 51 measurement) ................................... 535
Module side covers Panel clamp sensors
Attaching ........................................... 112 Adjusting ........................................... 566
Removing .......................................... 112 Panel clamper pins
Module support Replacing .......................................... 367
Lubricating ........................................ 266 Panel conveyance
Module Top Cover Functions ............................................. 51
Cleaning ............................................ 352 Parts camera
Module vacuum sensor Components ........................................ 27
Adjusting ........................................... 560 Functions ............................................. 50
Replacing .......................................... 443

Index QD008-27
Parts camera glass cover Monthly maintenance (every 700 hrs)

........................................................... 248
Cleaning ............................................ 242
Points of caution ................................ 228
Parts camera glass cover inside light unit
Required equipment .......................... 229
Cleaning ............................................ 243
Weekly maintenance (every 160 hrs) 241
Parts camera lens
Yearly maintenance (every 8000 hrs) 291
Cleaning ............................................ 296
Parts supply system
R
Functions ............................................ 50 Reject parts
PCU (Pallet Change Unit) Components ........................................ 34

Reject parts box
Components ........................................ 37
Lubricating ........................................ 359 Cleaning ............................................ 240
Placing head Reject parts conveyor

Remove rejected parts ...................... 350
Attaching ........................................... 145
Components ........................................ 24 Reject parts conveyor belt
Functions ............................................ 47 Cleaning ............................................ 248

Reject parts unit
Removing .......................................... 145
Sensor position ................................... 59 Replacing .......................................... 451
Placing head battery Remove rejected parts

Reject parts conveyor ....................... 350
Replacing .......................................... 370
Placing head syringes Removing
Cleaning ............................................ 256 Feeder pallet ..................................... 113

Module ................................................ 98
Placing head vacuum filters
Cleaning ............................................ 250 Module side covers ........................... 112
Placing head vacuum filters <H01/H02 heads> Nozzle station .................................... 155
Placing head ..................................... 145
Replacing .......................................... 356
Placing head vacuum filters <H04, H08, H12(S) Tray unit-L ......................................... 120
and H12HS heads> Tray unit-LT ....................................... 126
Replacing .......................................... 298 Tray unit-LTC .................................... 137
Preventive maintenance Tray unit-M ........................................ 214
12000 hrs maintenance .................... 299 Waste tape processing unit ............... 453
3 Monthly maintenance (every 2000 hrs) Replacing
........................................................... 266
Base control box 1 ............................ 470
6 Monthly maintenance (every 4000 hrs)
........................................................... 267 Base control box 2 ............................ 474
About preventive maintenance ......... 227 Base control box 3 ............................ 478
Daily maintenance (every 24 hrs) ..... 240 Base control box 4 ............................ 480
Irregular maintenance ....................... 348 Base CPU battery ............................. 384
Maintenance checklist ....................... 234 Base CPU box ................................... 482
Maintenance frequency ..................... 227 Conveyer controller ........................... 499
Conveyor belt cleaner ....................... 366

QD008-27 Index
Conveyor belts .................................. 363 Tray unit-M control board fuses ........ 429
Cooling fan ........................................ 410 Vacuum pump control box ................ 489
Feeder pallet and parts supply base Vacuum pump gaskets ...................... 430
connector .......................................... 506
Vacuum pump inlet valves/outlet valves
Feeder pallet DC power supply unit .. 495 ........................................................... 430
Fuse on a base control I/F board ...... 399 Vacuum pump thermofuse ................ 407
Fuse on a board inside a module ...... 389 S
Fuses on base remote I/O boards .... 391 Safety
Mark camera ..................................... 447 Safety rules for all machine types ......... 2
mechanical valve O-rings .................. 302 Safety rules for NXT-2 ........................... 6
Module control box ............................ 462 Sensor position
Module CPU battery .......................... 375 Base .............................................. 55, 66
Module CPU box ............................... 466 Double conveyor ................................. 72
Module servo amplifier battery .......... 368 Feeder pallet ....................................... 70
Nozzle station fluorescent stickers .... 387 Nozzle changer ................................... 69
Panel clamper pins ........................... 367 Placing head ....................................... 59
Parts camera ..................................... 443 Single conveyor ................................... 75
Placing head battery ......................... 370 Single conveyor S ............................... 77
Placing head vacuum filters Tray unit-L ........................................... 78
<H01/H02 heads> ............................ 356
Tray unit-LT ......................................... 83
Placing head vacuum filters <H04, H08,
H12(S) and H12HS heads> .............. 298 Tray unit-LTC ...................................... 88
Reject parts unit ................................ 451 Tray unit-M .......................................... 92
Tray unit-L and parts supply base Waste tape processing unit ................. 71
connector ......................................... 508
XY-robot .............................................. 67
Tray unit-L interface board fuse ........ 418
Single conveyor
Tray unit-L remover sponge pad ....... 419
Functions ............................................. 51
Tray unit-L servo axis amplifier battery
........................................................... 417 Lubricating ......................................... 315
Tray unit-L servo controller battery ... 415 Sensor position ................................... 75
Tray unit-LT and parts supply base Single conveyor S

connector ......................................... 516 Functions ............................................. 51
Tray unit-LT interface board fuse ...... 423 Lubricating ......................................... 316
Tray unit-LT servo axis amplifier battery Sensor position ................................... 77
........................................................... 422
Single conveyor S belt tension
Tray unit-LT servo controller battery . 420
Checking ........................................... 320
Tray unit-LTC and parts supply base
connector .......................................... 525 Soft backup pins
Tray unit-LTC interface board fuse ... 428 Cleaning ............................................ 358
Tray unit-LTC servo axis amplifier battery Supplementary information
........................................................... 426
Noise levels ....................................... 569
Tray unit-LTC servo controller battery 424

Index QD008-27
Syringe O-rings Removing .......................................... 126

Lubricating ........................................ 260 Sensor position ................................... 83
Syringes Servo axis amplifier battery replacement
........................................................... 422
Lubricating ........................................ 260
Servo controller battery replacement 420
T
Tray unit-LT and parts supply base connector
Tray unit-L
Replacing .......................................... 516
Components ........................................ 30
Tray unit-LT belt tension
Cover attachment .............................. 509
Adjusting ........................................... 330
Cover detachment ............................. 509
Checking ........................................... 330
Functions ............................................ 50
Tray unit-LT conveyor belts
Inserting ............................................ 120
Cleaning ............................................ 249
Interface board fuse replacement ..... 418
Tray unit-LT feeder slots and connectors
Lubricating ........................................ 323
Cleaning ............................................ 247
Removing .......................................... 120
Tray unit-LT shuttle belts
Sensor position ................................... 78
Cleaning ............................................ 249
Servo axis amplifier battery replacement
........................................................... 417 Tray unit-LTC
Servo controller battery replacement 415 Adjusting belt tension ........................ 336
Tray unit-L and parts supply base connector Checking belt tension ........................ 336
Replacing .......................................... 508 Components ........................................ 32
Tray unit-L belt tension Cover attachment .............................. 526
Adjusting ........................................... 325 Cover detachment ............................. 526
Checking ........................................... 325 Functions ............................................. 50
Tray unit-L conveyor belts Inserting ............................................ 137
Cleaning ............................................ 248 Interface board fuse replacement ..... 428
Tray unit-L fan filter Lubricating ......................................... 334
Cleaning ............................................ 301 Removing .......................................... 137
Tray unit-L remover Sensor position ................................... 88
Sponge pad replacement .................. 419 Servo axis amplifier battery replacement
........................................................... 426
Tray unit-L shuttle belts
Servo controller battery replacement 424
Cleaning ............................................ 248
Tray unit-LTC and parts supply base connector
Tray unit-LT
Replacing .......................................... 525
Components ........................................ 31
Tray unit-LTC conveyor belts
Cover attachment .............................. 517
Cleaning ............................................ 249
Cover detachment ............................. 517
Tray unit-LTC feeder slots and connectors
Functions ............................................ 50
Cleaning ............................................ 247
Inserting ............................................ 126
Tray unit-LTC shuttle belts
Interface board fuse replacement ..... 423
Cleaning ............................................ 249
Lubricating ........................................ 328

QD008-27 Index
Tray unit-M Vacuum pump filter

Attaching ........................................... 214 Cleaning ............................................ 300
Cleaning ............................................ 290 Vision system
Components ........................................ 33 Functions ............................................. 50
Control board fuses replacement ...... 429 W
Functions ............................................ 50 Waste tape box
Lubricating ................................ 340, 342 Cleaning ............................................ 240
Removing .......................................... 214 Waste tape cutter
Sensor position ................................... 92 Cleaning ............................................ 349
Tray unit-M belt tension Waste tape processing unit
Adjusting ........................................... 344 Components ........................................ 36
Checking ........................................... 344 Lubricating ......................................... 313
V Removing .......................................... 453
Vacuum pump Sensor position ................................... 71
Gaskets replacement ........................ 430 Waste tape processing unit duct
Inlet valves/outlet valves replacement 430 Cleaning ............................................ 349
Thermofuse replacement .................. 407 X
Vacuum pump control box XY-robot
Replacing .......................................... 489 Lubricating ......................................... 267
Sensor position ................................... 67

Index QD008-27
MEMO:

FUJI Internet
Fuji Internet aims at providing up-to-date information to our customers in

the most efficient manner. This site makes a range of services available,
from manual updates and virtual training, to online technical reports. Fuji
hopes that this site will be used as a source of information in addition to
the services provided by your agent.
Fuji Internet is located at http://www.fuji.co.jp/
Fuji Internet membership is required to access the Technical Information
section of the site. Please contact your agent for membership details.
At any comments or opinions regarding this document can be sent to
intnetqst@fuji.co.jp
Management No. Date Notes
QD008-00 June 15, 2004 MEC-NXT-1.0E

QD008-24a April 18, 2008 -
QD008-25 October 31, 2008 -
QD008-26 June 22, 2009 V5.11
QD008-27 February 10, 2010 V5.15
FUJI Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd.

19 Chausuyama, Yamamachi, Chiryu,
Aichi Prefecture, 472-8686 Japan
Copyright 2010 by Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd.

Printed in Japan
This manual is printed on recycled paper.
Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd. serves its customers from the following
locations:
Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd.

19 Chausuyama Yamamachi, Chiryu, Aichi, 472-8686 Japan
Tel: 81-566-81-2111 Fax: 81-566-83-1140
Fuji America Corporation
171 Corporate Woods Parkway, Vernon Hills, IL. 60061 USA
Tel: 847-913-0162 Fax: 847-913-0186
Fuji Machine Mfg (Europe) GmbH
Peter-Sander-Str. 43, D-55252 Mainz-Kastel Germany
Tel: 06134-202120 Fax: 06134-202200
Fuji do Brasil Maquinas Industriais Ltda.
Rua Joao Cachoeira, 128 Itaim Bibi, Sao Paulo, SP 04535-000 Brazil
Tel: 55-11-3167 1650 Fax: 55-11-3079 1833
FujiPhilippines Services, Inc.
Lot 1, Block 6, Panorama Bldg. 2, Calamba Premiere International Park
Special Economic Zone (CPIP - SEPZ) Calamba, Laguna, 4027 Philippines
Tel: 63-49-502-3683 Fax: 63-49-502-3560
Fuji Machine Mfg (Singapore) Pte Ltd.
Blk 2/51, Ubi Avenue 1, #01-24, Paya Ubi Industrial Park,
Singapore 408933
Tel: 67464966 Fax: 68412326
Fuji Malaysia Office
C/O Mecomb Malaysia Sdn Bhd 2487, Jalan Sultan Azlan Shah,
11700 Penang, Malaysia
Tel: 04-656-4002 Fax: 04-656-2941
Fuji Taiwan Office
C/O Ascentex Industry Corp. 3 Fl, No. 396, Sec. 1, Nei Hu Rd., Taipei,
Taiwan R.O.C.
Tel: 02-8797-8716 Fax: 02-8797-8717
Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd. China Representative Office
Room A, 26F, Zhaofeng World Trade Building, No. 369, Jiangsu Road,
Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-5240-0730 Fax: 021-5240-0728

NXT Mechanial Reference

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NXT Mechanial Reference

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Update Notice

The following manual has been revised and released:

Manual title: NXT Mechanical Reference

Chapter, Section Summary of changes

1.3.3 Tray Unit-LT/LTC Added items relating to the tray unit-LTC.

Chapter, Section Summary of changes

6.8.4 Cleaning the parts camera lens Newly added.

Minor changes and corrections have also been

Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd.

Warranty and Liability

NXT Mechanical Reference i

2.13 PCU (Pallet Change Unit) Components ....... 37

ii NXT Mechanical Reference

3.7.1 Double conveyor ...................................................51

NXT Mechanical Reference iii

4.7 Feeder Pallet Sensors ................................... 70

iv NXT Mechanical Reference

5.2.1 Preparing to remove a module .............................98

NXT Mechanical Reference v

5.10.1 Procedure (when no tray unit-L/LT is attached) 160

vi NXT Mechanical Reference

6.5 Monthly Maintenance (Every 700 Hrs) ......... 248

NXT Mechanical Reference vii

6.8.5 Replacing the placing head vacuum filters

viii NXT Mechanical Reference

6.10.5 Removing empty trays (tray unit-L, tray unit-LT)

NXT Mechanical Reference ix

7.7 Replacing the Base CPU battery ................. 384

x NXT Mechanical Reference

7.12.2 External control box ..........................................408

NXT Mechanical Reference xi

7.21.2 Procedure ......................................................... 424

xii NXT Mechanical Reference

8.5.2 For M3(S) modules .............................................456

NXT Mechanical Reference xiii

8.13.2 External control box ......................................... 491

xiv NXT Mechanical Reference

8.21.1 Required tools ...................................................525

NXT Mechanical Reference xv

9.7.2 Procedure ........................................................... 566

xvi NXT Mechanical Reference

1.1 About Symbols

1.1.1 Degree of Hazards

Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to severe

Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to

1.1.2 Examples of the Symbols

A circle with an exclamation mark is used to draw your attention to to

NXT Mechanical Reference 1

1.2 Safety Rules for All Machine Types

• Body parts or clothing may get caught in the machine, resulting

• Body parts may get caught in the machine, resulting in injury.

Do not operate the machine with the safety covers or doors

• When safety covers or doors are removed, body parts or

Always verify the position of the EMERGENCY STOP

• Always be aware of the positions of the EMERGENCY STOP

Check the safety functions before starting operation.

• Before starting the machine, check the operation of the

Do not remove safety switches or disable safety functions.

• Do not short or remove the machine’s safety switches or disable

2 NXT Mechanical Reference

• Verify that nobody is in or near the machine before operating

Do not go near a machine that has stopped moving.

• There are times during automatic operation when the machine